Nokia N81 User Manual
User guide Issue 1 EN Nokia N81-1 8GB
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION declares that this RM-179 product is in compliance with the essential requirements and ot her relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://www.nokia.com/phones /d eclaration_of_conformity/. é 2007 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, N-Gage, Nser ies, N81, Navi, and Visual Radio are trademarks or registered tradema rks of Nokia Corporation. Noki a tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. Other produc t and compa ny names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tra denames of their respective ow ners. Reproduction, transfer, distribution, or storage of part or all of the cont ents in this document in any form without the prior wr itten permission of Nokia is prohibited. This product includes software licensed from Symbian Software Ltd (c) 1998-2007. Symbian and Symbian OS are trademarks of S ymbian Ltd. Java⢠and all Java-based mar ks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 text input software Copyright (C) 1997-2007. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. Portions of the Maps softwa re are copyright é 2007 The Fr eeType Project. All rights reserved. This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Por tfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in connection with informat ion which has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a consumer engaged in a personal and noncommercial acti vity and (ii) for use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a lice nsed video pr ovider. No lice nse is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional inf ormation, including that related to promotional, internal, and commercia l uses, may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See <http://www.mpegla.com>. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing development. Nokia re serves the right to make changes and improvements to any of th e products described in this document without prior notice. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NO KIA OR ANY OF ITS LICE NSORS BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INC OME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDE NTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSO EVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PRO VIDED âÂÂAS ISâÂÂ. EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLIC ABLE LAW, N O WARRANTI ES OF ANY KI ND, EITHER EXPRESS O R IMPLIED , INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIE D WARRANTIES OF MERCHAN TABILITY AN D FITNESS FOR A PART ICULAR PU RPOSE, ARE MA DE IN RELATION TO THE A CCURACY, RELIABIL ITY OR CONTENTS OF T HIS DOCUMENT. NOKIA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DO CUMENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIOR NO TICE. The availability of particular products and applications and servi ces for these products may vary by region. Please che ck with your Nokia dealer for details, a nd availability of language options. Export controls This device may contai n commodities, tec hnology or software subje ct to export laws and regulations from the US a nd other countries. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANAD A NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interfere nce (for example, when using a telephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your te lephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contac t your local service facility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operatio n is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) th is device must accept any interfe rence receive d , including interference t hat may cause undesired operation. Any changes or modific a tions not expressly approved by Nokia could void the user's authority to operat e this equipment. The third-party applications provided with yo ur device may have been cre ated and may be owned by persons or entitie s not affiliated with or related to Nokia . Nokia does not own the copyrights or intellect ual property rights to the third-par ty applications. As such, Nokia does not take any responsibility for end-user support, functionality of the applicat ions, or the information in the applicat ions or these materials. Nokia does not provide any wa rranty for the thir d-party applications. BY USING THE APPLICATIONS YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE APPLICATIONS ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARR ANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITT ED BY APPLICABLE LAW . YOU FURTHER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT NEITHER NOKIA NOR ITS AFFILIATES MA KE ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WA RRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPL IED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WAR RANTIES OF TIT LE, MERCHANTABILIT Y OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE , OR THAT THE APPLICA TIONS WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY THIRD-PA RTY PATE NTS, COPY RIGHTS, TR ADEMARKS , OR OTHER RIG HTS. Issue 1 EN
Hello 4 Hello Model number: Nokia N81-1. Hereinafter referre d to as Nokia N81. The Nokia N81 8GB device is entertainment on the go! Enjoy high-quality music and gaming wrapped in a sleek and st ylish package, complete with a brilliant 2.4-in ch dis play, dedicated media and game keys, outstanding audio quality, and 8 GB of memory. With your Nokia N81 8GB you can enjoy your favorite music on the go. The Nokia Mu sic Store* offers you over one million songs to browse and purchaseâÂÂover the air using you r N81 8G B and at home with your compatible PC. If you are tired of struggling with wires, connect to compatible stereo headphones with Bluetooth connectivity. Experience high quality mobile gaming with dedicated game keys and enjoy stellar graphics that give you a new way to have fun. The multimedia menu offers you direct access and he lps to exp lore your content quickly and easily. Experience intelligent key illumi nation, whic h keeps ke ys hidden until you need them. Let the fun begin! *To check the Nokia Music Store availability in your country, visit music.nokia.co m.
Contents Hello ...................................... ...................... 4 For your safety .................................... ....... 8 Support ................................. ................... 11 Help ........ ......... ............ ........... ........... ......... ............ ........... ..... 11 Get started.. ........... ......... ............ ........... ......... ........... ............11 Additional applications ...... ........... ..................... ......... ....... 11 Nokia support and contact info rmation ......... ......... ..... 11 Your Nokia N81 .................................. .... 12 Welcome ......... ............ ........... ......... ........... ............ ........... ..... 12 Settings .................. ......... ............ ........... ........... ......... ............12 Transfer content from an other device ............... ............ 12 Essential indicators ........ ............ ........... ........... ............ ....... 14 Navi⢠scroll key ..... ............ .................................. ......... ....... 15 Multimedia menu ......... ............ ........... ........... ............ .........15 Power saver LED............ ............ ........... ........... ............ ......... 16 Volume and louds peaker control ...................... ........... ... 16 Headset. ........... ......... ............ ......... ........... ......... ............ .........16 Prolong battery life ........ ............ .................................. ....... 17 Maps ...... ............ ......... ........... ........... ......... ............ ......... ....... 17 Download! ... ........... ............ ........... ......... ........... ............ ....... 17 Software updates .............. ........... ........... ............ ........... ..... 18 Music .................................... .................... 19 Music player .......... ............ ........... ........... ......... ............ ....... 19 Nokia Music Store .................. ........... ........... ............ ......... 23 Radio ........... ...................... ....................... ........... ............ ....... 24 Nokia Podcasting .......... ............ .................................. ....... 25 Games ........................... ............................ 30 Contacts (phonebook) ............................31 Save and edit names and numbers ............. ............ ....... 31 Copy contacts......... ............ ......... ........... ........... ............ ....... 32 Add ringing tones for contacts .............. ........... .............. 33 Create contact groups ................ ........... .............. ........... ... 33 Messaging .................................. .............34 Write text ................... ........... ........... ......... ............ ........... ..... 35 Write and send messa ges .......... ........... ............ ........... ..... 35 InboxâÂÂreceive me ssages ........... ........... ............ ........... ..... 36 Mailbox .......... ............ ...................... .............................. ....... 37 Listen to messag es ..................... ........... ........... .......... ......... 39 View messages on a SIM card .................. ........... ............ 39 Messagin g settings ........ ............ ........... ......... ............ ......... 39
Gallery ....................................... .............. 44 View and browse files ............ ........... ........... ............ .......... 44 Print Basket ........ ........... ............ ......... ........... ......... ............ ... 4 5 Albums................... ......... ............ ........... ......... ............ ........... . 46 Edit images ........... ............ ........... ........... ............ ......... .......... 46 Edit video clips ............. ............ ...................................... ...... 47 Slide show ............ ............ .................................. ........... ........ 49 Presentations ....... ............ ........... ........... ............ ......... .......... 49 Image print ......... ........... ............ ........... ......... ............ ........... . 49 Print online................ ......... ........... ............ ........... ......... ........ 50 Share online ............ ......... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........ 51 Home network with Ga llery .......... ........... ............ ........... . 51 Camera . ....................................... .............. 53 Take pictures.................... ........... ......... ........... .......... ........... . 53 Take pictures in a sequence ............ ........... ............ .......... 57 You in the pictureâÂÂs elf-timer ................... ............ .......... 58 Tips on taking good photographs .. ........................... ...... 58 Record videos .................... ........... ......... ............ ........... ........ 59 Web .................................... ...................... 62 Browse the web ................ ......... ........... ............ ......... .......... 62 Connection security ................ ........... ........... ............ .......... 65 Bookmarks view ......... ............ ........... ........... ............ ........... . 65 End connection ................. ........... ............ ......... ........... ........ 66 Settings .................... ......... ........... ........... ......... ............ .......... 66 Tools ........................................... ............... 68 File manager .............. ............ ........... ......... ........... ............ ... 68 Mass memory tool ..... ............ ......... ........... ............ ........... . 68 Voice commands ...... ............ ........................................ ...... 69 Connections ........................ ...................... 70 Wireless LAN ................... ........... ......... ........... ............ ......... . 70 Bluetooth connectivity ........... ........... ............ ........... ........ 72 Connection man ager ...... ........... ......... ............ ........... ........ 75 USB ........ ......... ........... ........... ......... ............ ........... ......... ........ 76 PC connections ................. ........... ............ ........... ........... ...... 76 Device manager ................. ............ ......... ........... ........... ...... 76 Home network ................. ......... ........... ............ ........... ........ 77 Wireless Keyboa rd ............... ........... ........... ............ ......... ... 80 Synchronization ....... ......... ............ ........... ........... ............ ... 80 Personalize your device ..... ...................... 82 ProfilesâÂÂset tones ............... ......... ........... ........... ............ ... 82 3-D tones .......... ......... ............ ........... ......... ........... ............ ... 83 Change the look of your device .. ........... ......... ......... ...... 84 Active standby ................ ........... ......... ........... ............ .......... 84 Make calls ................................. ............... 86 Voice calls ................. ........... ......... ............ ........... ........... ...... 86 Video calls ................... ......... ............ ........... ........... ......... ...... 91 Video sharing.......... ........... ........... ............ ........... ......... ........ 92
Answer or decline a call ............... ............ ......... ........... ..... 95 Log .......... ......... ............ ........... ........... ......... ............ ........... ..... 96 Applications .......................... ................... 98 Clock ......... ........... ......... ........... ............ ......... ........... ........... ... 98 Calculator .... ......... ........... ............ ......... ........... ............ .........98 Notes .... ........... ............ ......... ........... ........... ......... ............ ....... 99 Application manager ....... ...................... ..................... ....... 99 Calendar ... ........... ........... ......... ............ ........... ......... ........... 101 Recorder ... ........... ........... ......... ............ ........... ........... ......... 102 RealPlayer ........... ........... ....................... ........... .................. 102 Adobe Flash Player ...... ............ ...................... .................. 103 IMâÂÂinstant mess aging ............ ........... ........... ............ ...... 103 Nokia Lifeblog .............. ............ .................................. ...... 106 Digital rights management ...... ........... ......... ................ 109 Adobe Reader ...... ........... .................................. ................ 110 Converter . ........... ........... ............ ........... ......... ........... ......... 111 Settings ...................................... .......... 112 General ......... ........... ......... ............ ........... ........... .......... .......112 Phone .......... ........... ......... ............ ........... ......... ........... ..........117 Connection ......... ........... ............ ......... ........... ........... ..........120 Applications ........... ............ ...................... ..................... .....124 Troubleshooting: Q&A .......................... 125 Battery information ........................... .. 128 Charging and discharging............... ........... .............. .......128 Nokia battery authentication guide lines............. .......128 Care and maintenance ............... .......... 130 Additional safety information ............. 131 Index ...... ...................................... .......... 134
8 For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAFEL Y Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be susceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device o ff near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Follow any restrictions. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELING Do not use the device at a refueling point. Do not use near fuel or chem icals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTI NG Follow an y restrictions. Do not use the device where blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBLY Us e only in the positions as explained in the product documentation. Do not touch the antenna areas unnecessarily. QUALIFIE D SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMEN TS AND BATTE RIES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RES ISTANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACK-UP COPIES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device.
9 CONNECTING TO OTHER DE VICES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructio ns. Do not connect incompatible products. EMERGENC Y CALLS Ensure the phone function of the device is switched on and in service. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and return to the standby mode. Enter the emergency number, then press the call key. Give your location. Do not end the call until given permis sion to do so. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the (E)GSM 850, 900, 1800, a nd 1900 and UMTS 2100 networks. Contact your ser vice provider for more information about networks. When using the features in th is device, obey all laws and respect local customs, priva cy and legitimate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright protections may pr event some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Your device supports intern et connections and other methods of connectivity. Like comp uters, your device may be exposed to viruses, malicious messages and applications, and other harmful content. Exercise caution and open messages, accept connectivity requests, download content, and accept installations only from trustworth y sources. To increas e the secur ity of y our device, consider installing, us ing, and regularly updating antivirus software, firewall, and other related software on your device and any connected computer. Warning: To use any features in this devic e, other than the alarm clock, the device must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. The office applications support common features of Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Microsoft Office 2000, XP, and 2003). Not all file formats can be viewed or modified. During extended operation, such as an active video sharing session or high-speed data connection, the device may feel warm. In most cases, this condition is normal. If you suspect the device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facility. Your device may have preins talled bookmarks and links for third-party internet sites. You may also access other third- party sites through your device. Third-party sites are not affiliated with Nokia, and Nokia does n ot endors e or
10 assume liability for them. If you choose to access such sites, you should take precautions for security or content. The images in this guide ma y dif fer from your devi ce display. Network services To use the phone you must have service from a network service provider. Many of the features require special network features. These featur es are not available on all networks; other networks ma y require that you make specific arrangements with yo ur service provider before you can use the network services . Your ser vice provider can give you instructions and explain what charges will apply. Some networks may have limitations that af fect how you can use network services. For instance, some networks may not support all language-dependent charac ters and services. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have a s pec ial configuration such as changes in menu names, menu order, and icons. Contact your service provider for more information. This device supports WAP 2.0 pr otocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, such as MMS, browsing, and e-mail require network support for these technologies. Enhancements, batteries, and chargers Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from an AC-3, AC-4 , or AC-5 charger and from an AC-1, ACP-8, ACP-9, ACP-12, or LCH-12 charger when used with the CA-44 charger adapter. The battery intended for use with this device is BP-6MT. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous . For availability of approved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you di sconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord.
Support 11 Support Help When an application is open, select Options > Help to access help for the current view. When you are re ading the instr uctions, to swit ch between help and the application that is open in the background, press and hold . To open help from the main menu, select Tools > Utilities > He lp . Select the desired application to view its help topics. Get started See the get started guide for keys and parts information, instructions for setting up the device and for other essential information. Additional applications There are various applications provided by Nokia and different th ird-party softwa re developers that help you do more with your Nokia N81. These applications are explained in the guides that are available on the Nokia N81 product support pages on www.nseries.com/support or your local Nokia website. Nokia support and contact information Check www.nseries.com/support or your local Nokia website for the latest guides , additional information, downloads, and services rela ted to your Nokia product. If you need to contact customer serv ice, check the list of local Nokia contact centers at www.nokia.com/customerser vice. For ma intenance services, check your near est Nokia service center at www.nokia.com/repair.
Your Nokia N81 12 Your Nokia N81 Welcome When you switch on your devic e for the firs t time, Welcome is displayed. Select from the following: Settings wizard âÂÂto conf igure various settings, such as e-mail Switch âÂÂto transfer content, such as contacts and cal endar entries, from a compati ble Nokia device. See âÂÂTransfer content from another deviceâÂÂ, p. 12. Demo âÂÂto view a demonstration about your device To access Welcome later, press , and select Tools > Utilities > Welcome . You can also access the individual applications from their menu locations. Settings Your device normally has MMS, GPRS, streaming, and mobile internet settings auto matically c onfigured in the device, based upon your network service provider information. You may have settings from your service providers already installed in your device, or you may receive or request the setting s from the network service providers as a special message. To change the general settings in your device, such as language, standby mode, and display settings, see âÂÂPhoneâÂÂ, p. 117. Transfer content from another device With the Switch application, you can transfer content, such as contacts and c ale ndar entries, between two compatible Nokia devices us ing Bluetooth connec tivity. When using the application for the first time, you can transfer content from a compat ible N okia devic e to your Nokia N81. The type of content that can be transferred depends on the model of the device from which you want to transfer content. Your device notifies you if the other device is not compatible. The Switch application can be used without the SIM card, too. If the other device cannot be powered on without a SIM card, you can insert yo ur SIM card in it . When the Nokia N81 is switched on without a SIM card, the offline profile is automatically activated.
Your Nokia N81 13 Transfer content 1 To retrieve data from your other de vice for the firs t time, on your Nokia N81, select Phone switch in the Welcome application, or press , and select Tools > Utilities > Switch . 2 To have the Nokia N81 se arch for de vices with Bluetooth connectivity, select Continue . If you have not already defined a name fo r your Nokia N81, you are prompted for one. Accept the default name, or define a name of your own. 3 For some device models, the Switch application is sent to the other device as a message. To install Switch on the other device, open the message, and follow the instructions on the display. 4 Select the device from which you want to transfer content from the list. You are asked to enter a code on your Nokia N81. Enter a code of your choosing (1-16 digits), and select OK . Enter the same code on the other device, and select OK . The devices are now paired. See âÂÂPair devicesâÂÂ, p. 74. 5 Select the content you want to transfer. Once the transfer has starte d, you can cancel it and continue later. Synchronize, retrieve, or send content After the first transfer, you ma y select from the following to start a new transfer, depending on the model of the other devi ce: to synchronize content between your Nokia N81 and the other device, if the other device supports synchronization. The synchr on ization is two-way. If an item is deleted in one device, it is deleted in both. You cannot restore deleted items with synchroniza tion. to retrieve data from the other device to your Nokia N81. With retrieval, da ta is transferred from t he other device to your Nokia N 81. You may be asked to keep or delete the original data in the other device, depending on the device model. to send data from your Nokia N81 to your other device If Phone switch cannot transfer an item, depending on the type of the other device, you can add the item to the Nokia folder to C:\Data\Nokia or E:\Data\Nokia and transfer it from there. When you select the f older to transfer, the items are synchronized in the corresponding folder in the other device, and vice versa. Use shortcuts to repeat a transfer After a data transfer, you can save a shortcut with the transfer settings to the main view to repeat the same transfer late r.
Your Nokia N81 14 To edit the shortcut, scroll to it, and select Options > Shortcut sett ings . You can, f or example, create or change the name of the shortcut. A transfer log is shown after every transfer. To view the log of a previous transfer, scroll to a shortcut in the main vi ew, and select Options > View log . Handle transfer conflicts If an item to be transferred has been edited in both devices, the device attempts to merge the changes automatically. If this is not possible, there is a transfer conflict. Select Check one by one , Pri ority to this phone , or Priority to other phone to solve the conflict. For further instructions, select Op tions > Help . Essential indicators The device is being used in a GSM network. The device is being used in a UMTS network (network service). You have one or more unread messages in the Inbox folder in Messaging . You have received new e-ma il in the remote mailbox. There are messages waitin g to be sent in the Outbox folder. You have missed calls. Shown if Ringing type is set to Silent , and Message alert tone and E-mail alert tone are set to Off . The device keypad is locked. A clock alarm is active. The second phone line is being used (ne twork service). All calls to the device are diverted to another number. If you have two phone lines (network service), a number indicates the active line. A compatible headset is connected to the device. indicates the connection has been lost. A compatible loopset is connected to the device. A compatible Text phone is connected to the device. A data call is active. A GPRS packet d ata connectio n is active. i ndicates the connection is on hold and that a conn ection is available. A packet data connection is active in a part of the network that supports EDGE. indicates the connection is on hold and that a conne ction is available. The icons indicate that E DGE is avail a ble in the network, but your device is not necessarily using EDGE in the data transfer. A UMTS packet data connection is active. indica tes the connection is on hold and that a conn ection is available.
Your Nokia N81 15 You have set the device to scan for wireless LANs, and a wireless LAN is available. See âÂÂWireless LANâÂÂ, p. 70. A wireless LAN connection is active in a network that has encryption. A wireless LAN connection is active in a net work that does not have encryption. Bluetooth connectivity is on. Data is being transm itted using Bluetooth connectivity. When the indica tor is blinking, your device is trying to connect with another device. A USB conne ction is act ive. Navi⢠scroll key Hereinafter referred to as the scroll key. Use the scroll key to move around the menus ( , , , ) , and to select items ( ). To activate the additional Navi⢠wheel functionality, press , and select Tools > Sett ings > General > Navi wheel > Navi wheel > On . Use Navi wheel to quickly browse through lists in the gallery and music player, and to navigate in the multimedia menu. Just slide your finger around the rim of the scroll key clockwise or counterclockwise. Tip! When in the menus, instead of using the scroll key, you can use the number keys, , and to quickly access the applications. For example, in the main menu, press to open Messaging . Multimedia menu With the multimedia menu, you have quick and easy access to multimedia content, games, your most important contacts, and most recent internet bookmarks and landmarks. Try it, for example, for images and music. To open or close the multimedia menu, press . To browse the tiles, either use the scroll key or the Navi wheel functionality. To return to the multimedia me nu from an open application, press . To change the order of the tiles, select Options > Arrange tiles .
Your Nokia N81 16 Power saver LED The display is switched off to save battery power after the screen saver is activated. A LED blinks to indicate that the device is powered on, but in the sleep mode. To switch off the LED, see âÂÂSleep modeâÂÂ, p. 114. Volume and loudspeaker control To increase or decrease the vo lume level when you have an active call or are listening t o a sound, press the volume k ey. The built-in loudspeaker allows you to speak and listen from a short distance without ha ving to hold the device to your ear. Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To use the loudspeaker during a call, select Options > Activate loudspea ker . To turn off the lo udspeaker, sele ct Options > Activate handset . Headset You can connect a compatible headset or compatible headphones to the Nokia AV Connector (3.5 mm) of your device. You may need to select the cable mode. Do not connect products that create an output signal as this may cause damage to the device. Do not connect any voltage source to the Nokia AV Connector. When connecting any external device or any headset, other than those approved by Nokia for use with this device, to the Nokia AV Connector, pay speci al attention to volume levels. Warning: When you use the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be af fected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. To optimize audio performa nce, attach the supplied earpads to the headset. To use a headset or headphones with a compatible remote control unit, for example, the Nokia Audio Adapter AD-54, connect the unit to the connector in the device, then connect the headset or headphones to the unit.
Your Nokia N81 17 Some headsets do not include a microphone. For phone calls, use such a headset with a remote control unit or the microphone of the device. The Nokia Audio Adapter AD-54 ha s multimedia volume controls that are used to adjust the volume only for music or video playback. When using certain headset enhancements, for example, the Nokia Audio Adapter AD-54, to adjust the volume during a call, use the vo lume key in the device. Prolong battery life Features using Blue tooth connectivity, wireless LAN, and packet data connections, or a llo wi ng s uc h fe atu re s to ru n in the background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. To prolong the operating time of your device, switch Bluetooth connectivity off when you do not need it. Also set Packet data connection to When needed for the device to use a packet data conn ection only if you start an application or action that needs it. See âÂÂPacket dataâÂÂ, p. 123. To close the applications r unning in th e background that you do not use, press and hold , select the app lications from the list, and press . Maps Press , and select Maps . With an external Bluetooth GPS receiver and Maps , you can see your current location on the map, browse maps for di fferent cities and countries, search fo r addresses a nd diff erent points of interest, and plan rout es from on e location to another. You can also purchase extra se rvices, such as cit y guides and a navigation service with voice guidance. For more information on the a pplication, see www.nseries.com/support or your local Nokia website. Download! Download! (network service) is a mobile content shop available on your device. You can browse, download, and install items, such as applicat ions and media files, to your device from the internet. Press , and select Download! . The items are categorized under catalogs and folders provided by different service providers. Some items may be chargeable, but you can usually preview them free of charge.
Your Nokia N81 18 Software updates Nokia may produce software updates that may offer new features, enhanced functions, or improved performance. You may be able to reques t these updates through the Nokia Software Updater PC appli cation. To update the device software, you need the Nokia Software Updater application and a comp atible PC with Microsoft Wind ows 2000 or XP operating system, broadba nd internet access, and a compatible data cable to connect your d evice to the PC. To get more information and to download the Nokia Software Updater applicat ion, visit www.nokia.com/ softwareupdate or your local Nokia website. If software updates over the air are supported by your network, you may also be ab le to request updates through the device. See âÂÂDevice manage râ and âÂÂSoftware updatesâÂÂ, p. 76. Tip! To check the software version in your device, enter *#0000# in the standby mode.
Music 19 Music Music player Music player supports files formats such as .aac, .aac , .eaac , .mp3, .wav, and .wma. Musi c player does not necessarily support all features of a file format or all the variations o f file for mats. You can also use Music player to lis ten to podcast episodes. Podcasting is the method for delivering audio or video content over the internet using either RSS or ATOM technologies for playback on mobile devices and PCs. Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To add songs to your device, see âÂÂTransfer musicâÂÂ, p. 21. For more information about copyright protection, see âÂÂDigital rights managementâÂÂ, p. 109. Play a song or a podcast episode Tip! To open the music player tile of the multimedia menu, press . See âÂÂMultimedia menuâÂÂ, p. 15. 1 Press , and select Music > Music player . 2 Select Music or Podcasts . 3 Select categories to navigate to the song or podcast episode you want to hear. 4 To play the selected file or list of files, press . To pause playback, press , and to resume, press again. To stop playback, press . To fast forward or rewind, press and hold or . To go to the next item, press . To return to the beginning of the item, press . To skip to the previous item, press again within 2 seconds a fter a song or podc ast has sta rted. To switch random play ( ) on or off, select Options > Shuffle . To repeat the current item ( ), all items ( ), or to switch repeat off, select Options > Repeat .
Music 20 If you play podcasts, shuffle and re peat are automatically switched off. To adjust the volume, use the volume key. To modify the tone of the music playback, sel ect Options > Equaliser . To modify the balance and stereo image or to enhance bass, select Options > Audio settings . To view a visualiza tion during playb ack, select Options > Show visualisation . To return to the standby mode and leave the player playing in the background, press the end key, or to switch to another open application, press and hold . Music menu To select more music to play in the Now playing view, select Music . The music menu shows the music available in the device. All songs lists a ll music. To view sorte d songs, select Albums , Artists , Genres , or Composers . To view playlists, select Pl aylists . To refresh the library afte r you have updated your device outside Music player, select Options > Refresh . Playlists To view and manage playlists, in the music menu, select Playlists . The following playlists appear automatically: Most played , Recentl y played , and Recently added . To view details of the playlist, select Options > Playlist details . Create a playlist 1 Select Options > Create playlist . 2 Enter a name for the play list, and select OK . 3 Select Yes to add songs now or No to add the songs later. 4 If you selected Yes, select artists to find the songs you want to include in the playlist. Press to ad d items. To show the song list under an arti st title, press . To hide the song list, press . 5 When you have made your selections, select Done . To add more s ongs later, when viewing the playlist, select Options > Add so ngs . To add songs, albums, artists, genres, and composers to a playlist from the different views of the music menu, select an item and Option s > Add to a playlist > Saved playlist or New playlist . T o r e m o v e a s o n g f r o m a p l a y l i s t , s e l e c t Options > Remove . This does not delete the song from the device; it only removes it from the playlist.
Music 21 To reorder songs in a playlist, scroll to the song you want to move, and select Options > Reorder list . To grab song s and drop them to a new pos ition, use the scroll key. Podcasts The Podcast menu shows the podcasts available in the device. To refresh the collection after you have updated your device outside Music player, select Options > Refresh . Podcast episodes have three stat es: Never played, Partially played, and Completely played. If an episode is partially played, it plays from the last playback position the next time it is played. If an episode is never played or completely played, it plays from the beginning. Home network with music player With UPnP architecture and a wireless local area network (WLAN), you can create a home network of compatible devices. Home network enables you to play content s tored in your Nokia N81 remote ly on a compatible device. You can also copy files from your Nokia N81 to a compatible UPnP enabled device. For more information, see âÂÂHome networkâÂÂ, p. 77 and âÂÂHome network wi th GalleryâÂÂ, p. 51. Play a song or a p odcast remotely 1 Press , and select Music > Music player . 2 Select music or podcasts. 3 Select categories in the following menus to navigate to the song or podcast episode you want to hear. 4 Select the song or podcast yo u want to hear, and select Options > Play > Play via home network . 5 Select the device in whic h the file is played. Copy songs or podcasts wirelessly To copy or transfer media file s from your device to another compatible device, such as a UPnP compatible PC, select a file and Options > Copy to home network or Move to home net. . Content sharing does not have to be switched on. Transfer music You can transfer music from a compatible PC or other compatible devices using a compatib le USB cable or Bluetooth connectivity. For details, see âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 72. PC requirements for music transfer: ⢠Microsoft Windows XP operating system (or later) ⢠A compatible version of the Windows Media Player application. You can get more detailed information
Music 22 about Windows Media Player compatibility from the Nokia N81 section of the Nokia website. ⢠Nokia Nseries PC Suite 1.6 or later Transfer music from PC You can use three different methods to transfer music: ⢠To view your device on a PC as an external mass memory where you can transfer any data files, make the connection with a compatible USB cable or Bluetooth connectivity. If yo u are using the USB cable, select Data transfer as the connection mode. ⢠To synchronize music with Windows Media Player, connect the compatible USB cable and select Media player as the connection mode. ⢠To use Nokia Musi c Manager in Nokia Ns eries PC Suite, connect the compatible USB cable and select PC Suite as the connection mode. Mass storage and media player modes can only be used with files placed in the mass memory of your device. To change the default USB connection mode, press , and select Tools > Connectivity > USB > USB mode . If you transfer music using Data transfer or PC Suite transfer mode, you must refresh the library in your device after you have updated the song selection in your device. To refresh th e library, in th e Music menu , select Opt ions > Refresh . Both Windows Media Player and Nokia Music Manager in Nokia Nseries PC Suite have been optimized for transferring music files. For information about transfer ring music with Nokia Mu sic Mana ger, see the Nokia Nseries PC Suite user guide. Music transfer with Windows Media Player Music synchronization f unc tions ma y vary bet ween different versions of the Windows Media Player application. For more information, see the corresponding Windows Media Player guides and help. Manual synchronization After connecting your device with a compatible PC, Windows Media Player selects manual synchronizat ion if there is not enough free memory in your device. With manual synchronization, you can select the songs and playlists that you want to move, copy, or remove. The first time you connect your device you must enter a nam e th at is u sed as t he n am e of you r d evi ce i n Wi ndo ws Media Player. To transfer manual s elections: 1 After your device is connected with Windows Media Player, select your device in the navigation pane, if more than one device is connected.
Music 23 2 Drag the songs or albums to the lis t pane for synchronization. To remove songs or albums, select an item in the list, and click Remove from list . 3 Check that the list pane contains the files you want to synchronize and that there is enough f ree memory on the device. Click Start S ync. to start the synchronization. Automatic synchronization To change the default file transfer option in Windows Media Player, click the arrow under Sync , select your device, and click Set u p Sync. Clear or select the Sync this device automatically check box. If the Sync this device automatically check box is selected and you co nnect your devi ce, the music libra ry in your device is automatically updated b ased on playlists you have selected in Windows Media Player. If no playlists ha ve been selected, the whole PC music library is selected for synchron ization. Note that your PC library may contain more files that can fit to the device. See the Windows Media Player help for more information. The playlists on your device are not synchronized with the Windows Media Player playlists. Nokia Music Store In the Nokia Music Store ( netwo rk service) you can search, browse, and purchase music to download to your device. To purchase m usic, you firs t need to register fo r the service . To check the Nokia Music Store availability in your co untry, visit music.nokia.com. To access the Nokia Music Store, you must have a valid internet access point in the device. For more details, see âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 121. To open the Nokia Music St ore, press , and select Music > Music store . In the main page, select Help for further instructi ons. Tip! To find more m usic in diffe rent categori es of the music menu, select Options > Find in Music store in the music player. Music store settings You may be asked to ente r the following settings: Default acc. pt. âÂÂSelect the access point to use when connecting to the music st ore. In the music store, you may be able to edit the settings by selecting Options > Settings .
Music 24 You can also access the Nokia Music Store from your compatible PC at music.nokia.com. In the main page, select Help for further instructions. Radio Press , and select Music > Radio . When you open Visual Radio for the first time, a wizard helps you to save loca l stations. You can use the application as a traditional FM radio with automatic tuning and saved st ations, or with parallel visual information related to the radio program on the display, if you tune to stations that offer Visual Radio service. The Visual Radio s ervic e uses packet data (network service). You can listen to the FM radio while using other applications. You can see the latest list of all the stations that offer Visual Radio service at http://www.visualradio.com. If you do not have access to the Visual Radio service, the operators and radio stations in your a rea may not support Visual Radio. To check availability and costs, and to subscribe to the service, contact your service provider. You can normally make a call or answer an incoming call while listening to the radio. The radio is muted when there is an active call. Listen to the radio Note that the quality of the radio broadcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wireless device antenna. A compatible headset or enhancement needs to be attached to the device f or the FM radio to function properly. Press , and select Music > Radio . To start a station search, select or , or press and hold the media keys or . To change the frequency manually, select Options > Manual tuning . If you have previously saved radio stations, to go to the next or previo us saved st ation, select or , or press the media keys or . To adjust the volume, press the volume keys. To listen to the radio using the loudspeaker, select Options > Activate lou dspeaker . Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuo us exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the device nea r your ear when the
Music 25 loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To view available stations based on location, select Options > Station directory (network service). To save the current tuned station to your station list, select Options > Save station . To open the list of your saved stations, select Options > Stations . To return to the standby m ode and leave the FM radio playing in the background, select Options > Play in background . View visual content To view available visual content for a tuned station, select or Options > Start visual service . If the visual service ID has not been saved for th e station, enter it, or select Retrieve to searc h for it in the station directory (network service). When the connection to the visu al service is established, the display shows the current visual content . Saved stations To open the list of your saved stations, select Options > Stations . To listen to a saved station, select Options > Station > Listen . To view available visual content for a s tation with Visual Radio service, select Options > St ation > Start visual service . To change station details, select Options > Station > Edit . Settings Select Options > Settings and from the following: Start-up tone âÂÂSelect whether a tone is played when the application is starte d. Auto-start service âÂÂSelect Yes to have the Visual Ra dio service start automatically when you select a saved station that offers Visual Radio service. Access point âÂÂSelect the access point used for the Visual Radio data connection. You do not need an access poi nt to use the application as an ordinary FM radio. Current region âÂÂSelect the region you are curren tly located in. This setting is di splayed only if there was no network coverage when the application was started. Nokia Podcasting With the Nokia Podcasting application, you can search, discover, subscribe to, and download podcasts over the air, and play, manage, an d share audio and video podcasts with your device.
Music 26 To open Nokia Podcasting, press , and select Music > Podcasting . Settings Before using Nokia Podcasting, set your connectio n and download settings. The recommended connection method is wireless LAN (WLAN). Check with your service provider for terms and data service fees before using other connections. For example, a flat rate data plan can allow large data transfers for one monthly fee. To search for wireless LANs availa ble within range, press and select Tools > Connectivity > Conn. m gr. > Available WLAN networks . To create an internet access point in a network, select Options > Define access point . Connection settings To edit the connection settings, press and select Music > Podcasting > Options > Settings > Conne ction . Define the following: Default access point âÂÂSelect the access point to define your connection to the internet. Search service URL âÂÂDefine the podcast search service to be used in Search . Download settings To edit the download settings, press , and select Music > Podcasting > Options > Settin gs > Download . Define the following: Save to âÂÂDefine the lo cation where you want to save your podcasts. For optimal use of storage space, mass memory is recommended. Update interval âÂÂDefine how often podcasts are updated. Next update date âÂÂDefine the date of the next automatic update. Next update time âÂÂDefine the time of next automatic update. Automatic updates only occur if a specific default access point is selected and Nokia Podcasting is running. If Nokia Podcasting is not runni ng, the automatic updates are not activated. Download limit (%) âÂÂDefine the size of the memory that is used for podcast downloads. If limit exceeds âÂÂDefine what to do if the downloads exceed the download limit. Setting the application to retriev e podcasts automati cally may invol ve the transmi ssion of large amounts of data through yo ur service pr ovider âÂÂs network. Contact your
Music 27 service provid er for inform at ion about data tr ansmissi on charges. To restore the default settings, select Options > Restore default in the Settin gs view. Search Search helps you to find po dcasts by keyword or title. The search engine uses the podcast search service you set up in Podcasting > Options > Settin gs > Connection > Search service URL . To search for podcasts, press ,select Music > Podcasting > Se arch , and enter the desired keywords. Tip! Search looks for podcast titles and keywords in descriptions, not specific ep isodes. General topics, such as football or hip-hop, usua lly give better results than a specific team or ar tist. To subscribe to a marked channel or channels and add it to your Podcasts , select Options > Subscribe . You can also add a podcast to your Podcasts by selecting one. To start a new search, selec t Options > New search . To go the website of the podcast select Options > Ope n web page (network service). To see the details of a podcast, select Options > Description . To send a selected podcast or podcasts to another compatible device, se lect Options > Send . The available options may vary. Directories Directories help you to find new podcast episodes to whi ch to subscrib e. To open Directories, press , and selec t Music > Podcasting > Directories . Contents of the Directories change. Select the desired directory folder to update it (network serv ice). When the color of the folder changes, press the scroll key again to open it . Directories can include top podc asts listed by popularity or themed folders. To open the desired folder topic, press the scroll key. A list of podcasts is displayed. To subscribe to a podcast, sele ct the title, and press the scroll key. After you have subscribed to episodes of a podcast, you can download, manage, and play them in Podcasts. To add a new directory or folder, select Options > New > Web directory or Folder . Enter a title, URL of the .opml (Outline Processor Markup Language), a nd select Done .
Music 28 To edit the selected folder, web link, or web directory, select Op tions > Edit . To import an .opml file stored on your device, select Options > Import OPML file . Select the location of the file, and import it. To send a directory folder as a multimedia message or by Bluetooth connectivity, select the folder and Option s > Send . When you receive a message with an .opml file sent by Bluetooth connectivity, open the file to save the file into Received in Directori es . Open Received to subscribe to any of the links to add to your Podcasts . Download After you have subscribed to a podcast, from Directories , Search , or by entering a URL, you can manage, download, and play episodes in Podcasts . To see the podcasts you have subscribed to, select Podcasting > Podcasts . To see individual episode titles (an episode is a particular media file of a podcast), select the podcast title. To start a download, select the episode title. To download, or continue downloading selected or marked episodes, select Op tions > Download or Continue download . You can download multiple episodes at the same time. To play a portion o f a podca st during download or after partial downloading, select Podcasts > Options > Play preview . Fully downloaded podcasts can be found in Podcasts folder, but will not be shown until the music library is refreshed. The available options may vary. Play and manage podcasts To display the available episodes from the selected podcast, select Options > Open . Under each episode, you will see the file format, the size of the file, and time of the upload. When the podcast is fully downloaded, to play the full episode, select Podcasts > Options > Play , or press and select Music > Mu sic player > Podcasts . To update the selected podcast, or marked podcasts, for a new episode, select Options > Update . To stop the updating of the selected podcast or marked podcasts, select Options > Stop update . To add a new podcast by entering the URL of the podcast, select Options > New podcast .
Music 29 If you do not have an access point defined or if during packet data connection you are asked to e nter a user name and password, contact your service provider. To edit the URL of the selected podcast, select Options > Edit . To delete a downloaded podc as t or marked podcasts from your device, select Options > Delete . To send the selected podcast or marked podcasts to another compatible device as .opml files as a multimedia message or by Bluetooth connectivity, select Options > Send . To update, delete, and send a group of selected podcasts at once, select Options > Mark/Unmark mark the desired podcasts, and select Options to choose the desired action. To open the website of the podcast (network service), select Options > Open web page . Some podcasts provide the opportunity to interact with the creators by commenting and voting. To connect to the internet to do this, select Options > View comments .
Games 30 Games Your Nokia N81 is c ompatible with the N-Gage⢠gaming experience. With N-Gage, you can download and play high-quality multiplayer games. Your device includes either one of the following applications: ⢠Discover N-Gage applicationâÂÂWith th is prev iew application you can get in formation about the upcoming N-Gage gameplay experience, try out game demos, and download an d install the full N-Gage application when it becomes available ⢠N-Gage application-The full featured a pplication gives you access to the comp lete N-Gage experience replacing the Discover N-Gage application in the menu. You can find new games, try and buy games, find other players, and access scores, events, chat, and more. Some features may not be available at the time of software installation on your device, check www.n-gage.com for software updates. Press , and select Games to get started. For the full N-Gage experience, you need internet access on your device, either through the cellular network or wireless LAN. Contact your service provider for more informat ion on data services. For more information, visit www.n-gage.com.
Contacts (phonebook) 31 Contacts (phonebook) Press , and select Contacts . In Contacts you can save and update contact informatio n. You can add a personal ringing tone or a thumbnail image to a contac t card. You can also create contact groups, w hich allow you to send text messages or e-mail to ma ny recipients at the same time. You can add received co ntact information (business cards) to contact s. Contact info rmation can only be sent to or received from compatible devices. To view the amount of contac ts, groups, and the available memory in Contacts , select Options > Contacts info . Save and edit names and numbers 1 Select Options > New contact . 2 Fill in the fields that you want, and select Done . To edit contact ca rds in Contacts , scr oll to the cont act card you want to edit, and s elect Option s > Edit . You can also search for the desired contact by entering the first letters of the name to the search field. A list of the contacts starting with the letters appear on the display. Tip! To add and edit contact cards, you can also use Nokia Contacts Editor available in Nokia N series PC Suite. To attach a small thumbnail imag e to a contac t card, open the contact card, and select Opt ions > Edit > Options > Add thumbnail . The thumbnail im age is shown when the contact calls. To listen to the voice tag assigned to the contact, select a contact car d and Option s > Play voice tag . See âÂÂVoice dialin gâÂÂ, p. 90 . To send contact information, select th e card you want to send and Option s > Se nd business card > Via text message , Via mu ltimedi a , Via e-mail , or Via Bluetooth . See âÂÂMessagingâÂÂ, p. 34 and âÂÂSend data using Bluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 73. Tip! To print contact cards on a compatible Basic Print Profile (BPP) equipped printer with Bluetooth connectivity (such as HP De skjet 450 Mobile Printer or HP Photosmart 8150), select Options > Print . To add a contact to a group, select Options > Add to group (shown only if you have created a group). See âÂÂCreate contact groupsâÂÂ, p. 33. To check to which groups a contact belongs, select the contact and Options > Belongs to groups . To delete a contact card in Contacts , select a card, and press .
Contacts (phonebook) 32 Default numbers and addresses You can assign default numbers or addresses to a contact card. In this way if a conta ct has sever al numbers or addresses, you ca n easily call or send a message to the contact to a certain number or address. The default number is also used in voi ce dialing. 1 In Contacts , select a contact. 2 Select Options > Defaults . 3 Select a default to which you want to add a number or an address, and select Assign . 4 Select a number or an addr ess you want to set as a default. The default number or address is underlined in the contact card. Copy contacts To copy names and numbers from a SIM card to your device, press , and select Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > SIM directory , the names you want to copy and Options > Copy to Contacts . To copy contacts to your SIM card, in Contac ts , select the names you want to copy and Op tions > Copy to SIM directory , or Options > Copy > To SIM directory . Only the contact card fields supported by your SIM card are copied. Tip! You can synchronize your contacts to a compatible PC with Nokia Nseries PC Suite. SIM directory and other SIM services For availability and information on using SIM card serv ices, contact your SIM card vendor. This may be the service provider or other vendor. Press , and select Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > SIM directory to see the names and numbers stored on the SIM card. In the SIM directory you can add, edit, or copy numbers to contacts, and you can make calls. To view the list of fixed dialing numbers, select Options > SIM contacts > Fixed dial contacts . This setting is only shown if supported by your SIM card. To restrict calls f rom your de vice to s elected phone numbers, select Op tions > Activate fixed dialling . You need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivate fixed dialing or edit your fixed dialing contacts. Contact your service provider if you do not have the code. To add new numbers to the fixed dialing list, select Options > Ne w SIM contact . You need the PIN2 code for these functions. When you use Fixed dialling , packet data connections are not possible, except when sending text messages over a packet data connection. In th is case, the message center number and the recipientâÂÂs phone number must be included on the fixed dialing list.
Contacts (phonebook) 33 When fixed dialing is activated, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Add ringing tones for contacts To define a ringing tone for a contact or a contact group, do the following: 1 Press to open a contact card or go to the groups list, and select a contact group. 2 Select Options > Ringing tone . A list of ringing tones opens. 3 Select the ringing tone you want to use for the individual contact or the me mbers of selected group. You can also use a video clip as a ringing tone. When a contact or group member calls you, the device plays the chosen ringing tone (if the caller âÂÂs telephone number is sent with the call an d your device recognizes it). To remove the ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing to nes. Create contact groups 1 In Contacts , press to open the groups list. 2 Select Options > New group . 3 Write a name for the group or use the default name an d select OK . 4 Select the group and Options > Add membe rs . 5 Scroll to a contact, and press to mark it. To add multiple members at a time, repeat this action on all the contacts you want to add. 6 Select OK to add the contacts to the group. To rename a gr oup, se lect Options > Rename , enter the new name, and select OK . Remove members from a group 1 In the groups list, select the group you want to modify. 2 Scroll to the contact, and select Options > Remove from g roup . 3 Select Yes to remove the contact from the group.
Messaging 34 Messaging Press , and select Messaging (network service). Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. E-mail messages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harm ful to your device or PC. Only devices that have compatible features can receive and display multimedia messa ges. The appearance of a message may vary depending on the receiving device. To create a new message, select New me ssage . Messaging contains the following f olders: Inbox âÂÂReceived messages, except e-mail and cell broadcast messages, are stored here. E-mail messages are stored in the Mailbox . My folders âÂÂOrganize your messages into folders. Tip! To avoid rewriting messages that you send often, use texts in the templates folder. You can also cr eate and save your own templates. Mailbox âÂÂConnect to your remot e mailbox to retrieve your new e-mail messages or view your previous ly retrieved e-mail messages of fline. See âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 41. Drafts âÂÂDraft messages that have not been sent are stored here. Sent âÂÂThe last messages that ha ve been sent, excluding messages sent using Bluetooth connectivity are stored here. To change the number of messages to be saved, see âÂÂOther settingsâÂÂ, p. 43. Outbox âÂÂMessages waiting to be sent are temporarily stored in the outbox, for example, when your device is outside network coverage. Reports âÂÂYou can request the network to send you a delivery report of the text messages and multimedia messages you have sent (network service). To enter and send service requests (also known as USSD commands), such as activation commands for network services, to your serv ice provider, select Options > Service command in the main v iew of Messaging . Cell broadcast (network service) allows you to receive messages on various topics, such as weather or traffic conditions, from your service provider. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service prov ider. In the main view of Messaging , select Options > Cell broadcas t . Cell broadcast messages canno t be received in UMTS networks. A packet data connection may prevent cell broadcast reception.
Messaging 35 Write text ABC , abc , and Abc indicate the selected character mode. 123 indicates the number mode. To switch between the letter and number mode, press and hold . To switch between the different character modes, press . To insert a number in the le tter mode, press and hold the desired number key. is disp layed when yo u write text us ing tradit ional text input and when using predictive text input. With predictive text, you can enter any letter with a single keypress. Predictive text input is based on a built-in dictionary to which you can add new words. To turn predictive text inpu t on or off, quickly press twice. Write and send messages Before you can create a multimedia message or write an e-mail, you must have the correct connection settin gs in place. See âÂÂE-mail settingsâÂÂ, p. 37 and âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 41. The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exceeds this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. 1 Select New message and from the following: Text message âÂÂto send a text message Multim edia mes sage âÂÂto send a multimedia message (MMS) Audio message âÂÂto send an audio message (a multimedia message that includes one sound clip) E-mail âÂÂto send an e-mail 2 In the To field, press to select recipients or groups from contacts, or enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e-mail address. To add a semicolon ( ; ) that sepa rates the recipients, press . You can also copy and paste the number or address from the clipboard. 3 In the Subject field, enter the subject of the multimedia message or e-ma il. To change the fields that are visible, select Opt ions > Address fields . 4 In the message field, write the message. To insert a template, select Options > Insert or Insert object > Template . 5 To add a media object to a multimedia message, select Option s > Insert object > Image , Sound clip , or Video clip . 6 To take a new picture or record sound or video for a multimedia message,
Messaging 36 select Options > Insert new > Image , Sound clip , or Video clip . To insert a new slide to the message, select Slide . To see what the multimedia message looks like, select Options > Preview . 7 To add an attachment to an e-mail, select Options > Insert > Image , Sound clip , Video clip , Note , or Othe r for other file types. E-mail attachments are indicated by . 8 To send the message, select Option s > Se nd , or press the call key. Note: Your device may i ndicate th at your message was sent to the message center number programmed into your devi ce. Your device may not indicat e whether the message is received at the intended destination. For more details about messaging services, contact your service provider. Your device supports the sending of text messages beyond the character limit for a sing le message. Longer messages are sent as a series of t wo or more messages . Your service provider may charge accordin gly. Characters that use accents or other marks, and characters fr om some language options, take up mo re space, limiting the number of characters that can be sent in a single message. You may not be able to send video clips that are saved in the .mp4 format or that exceed the size limit of the wireless network in a multimedia message. Tip! You can combine images, video, sound, and text to a presentation and send it in a multimedia message. Start to create a multimedia message, and select Options > Create pr esentation . The o ption is shown only if MMS creation mode is set to Guided or Free . See âÂÂMultimedia messagesâÂÂ, p. 40. InboxâÂÂreceive messages In the Inbox folder, indicates an unread text message, an unread multimedia message, an unread audio message, and data received through Bluetooth connectivity. When you receive a message, and 1 new message are shown in the standby m ode. To open the message, select Show . To open a message in Inbox , scroll to it, and press .To reply to a received message, select Options > Reply . Multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Multimedia message objects may contain malicious software or otherwis e be harmful to your device or PC. You may receive a notification that a multimedia message is waiting in the multimedia message center. To start a
Messaging 37 packet data connection to re trieve the message to y our device, s elect Options > Retr ieve . When you open a multimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a message. is shown if sound is included, or if video is included. To play the sound or the video, select the indicator. To see the media objects that have been included in the multimedia message, select Options > Objects . If the message includes a multimedia presentation, is displayed. To play the presen tation, select the indicator. Data and settings Your device can receiv e many kinds of messages that contain data, such as business cards, ringi ng tones, operator logos, calendar entrie s, and e-mail notifications. You may also receive s ettings from your service provider or company information management department in a configuration message. To save the data from the message, sele ct Options and the corresponding option. Web service messages Web service messages are noti fications (for example, news headlines) and may contain a text message or a link. For availability and subscription, contact your s ervice provider. Mailbox E-mail settings Tip! Use Settings wizard to define your mailbox settings. Press , and select Tools > Utilities > Sett. wizard . To use e-mail, you must have a valid internet access point (IAP) in the device and define your e-mail settings correctly. See âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 121. If you select Mailbox in the Messagin g main view and have not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. To start creating the e-mail settings with the mailbox guide, select Start . See also âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 41. You must have a separate e-mail account. Follow the instructi ons given b y your remote mailbox and internet service provider (ISP). When you create a new mailbox, the name you giv e to the mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailboxes. Open the mailbox When you open the mailbox, the device asks if you want to connect to the mailbox ( Connec t to mailbox? ).
Messaging 38 To connect to your mailbox and retrieve new e-mail headings or messages, select Yes . When you view messages online, you are continuously connected to a remote mailbox using a data connection. To view previously retrieved e- mail messages offline, select No . To create a new e-mail message, select New message > E- mail in the messaging main view or Options > Create message > E-mail in your mailbox. See âÂÂWrite and send messagesâÂÂ, p. 35. Retrieve e-mail messages If you are offline, select Options > Connec t to start a connection to the remote mailbox. Select Options > Retrieve e-mail and one of the options. To close the connection, select Options > Disconnect . To open an e-mail message, press the scroll key . 1 When you have an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Options > Retrieve e-mail and one of the following: New âÂÂto retrieve all new messages Selected âÂÂto r etrieve only the messages that have been marked All âÂÂto retrieve all messages from th e mailbox To stop retrieving messages, select Cancel . 2 If you want to close the connection and view the e-mail messages offline, select Options > Disconnect . 3 To open an e-mail messag e, press . If the e-mail message has not been retrieved and you are offline, you are asked if you want to retrieve this message from the mailbox. To view e-mail attachments, open the message, and sele ct the attachment field indicate d by . If the attachment has a dimmed indicator, it has not been retrieved to the device; s elect Options > Retr ieve . Retrieve e-mail messages automaticall y To retrieve messages automatica lly, select Options > E- mail settings > Automatic retrieval . For more information, see âÂÂAutomatic retrievalâÂÂ, p. 42. Setting the device to retrie ve e-mail automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data t hrough your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transmission charges. Delete e-mail messages To delete the contents of an e-mail message from the device while still retaining it in the remote mailbox, select Options > Delete . In Delete mess age from: , select Phone only .
Messaging 39 The device mirrors th e e-mail headings in the remote mailbox. Although you delete the message c ontent, the e-mail heading stays in your device. If you want to remov e the heading as well, you must first delete the e-mail message from your remote mailbox, and then make a connection from your device to the remote mailbox again to update the status. To delete an e-mail from the device and the remote mailbox, select Options > Delete . In Delete me ssage from: , select Phone and server . To cancel deleting an e-mail from the server, scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the ne xt connection ( ), and select Options > Restore . Disconnect from the mailbox When you are online, to end the data connection to the remote mailbox, select Options > Disconnect . Listen to messages You can listen to audio, mail, multimedia, and text messages in the Inbox . To listen to a message, select it and select Options > Listen . View messages on a SIM card Before you can view SIM messages, you must copy them to a folder in your device. 1 In the Messaging main view, select Options > SIM messages . 2 Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 3 Select Options > Copy . A list of folders opens. 4 To start copying, select a folder and OK . To view the messages, open the folder. Messaging settings Fill in all fields marked with Must be define d or with a red asterisk. Follow the instructions given by your service provider. You may also obtain settings from your service provider in a configuration message. Some or all message centers or access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Text messages Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Text message and from the following:
Messaging 40 Message centres âÂÂView a list of all text message centers that have been defined. Character encoding â To use char acter convers ion to another encoding system when available, select Re duced support . Message centre i n use âÂÂSelect which message center is used to deliver text messages. Receive report âÂÂSelect whether the network se nds delivery reports on your messages (network service). Message validity âÂÂSelect how long the message center resends your message if the firs t attempt fails (network service). If the message cannot be sent within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message center. Message sent as âÂÂContact your service provider to learn if your message center is able to convert text messages into these other formats. Preferred connection âÂÂSelect the connection to be used. Reply via same centre âÂÂSelect whether yo u want the reply message to be sent using th e same text message center number (ne twork serv ice). Multimedia messages Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message and from the following: Image size âÂÂDefine the size of the image in a multimedia message. MMS creation mode âÂÂIf you select Guide d , the device informs you if you try to send a message tha t may not be supported by the recipient. If you select Restricted , the device prevents you from sending messages that may not be supported. To include conten t in your messages without notifications, select Free . Access point in use âÂÂSelect which acc ess point is used as the preferred connection. Multimedia retrieval âÂÂSelect how you want to rece ive messages. To receive messages automatically in your home cellular network, select A u t o i n h o m e n e t w . . Outside your home cellular network, you re ceive a notifi cation that there is a message to retrieve in the multimedia message center. Outside your home cellular ne tw ork, sending and receiving multimedia messages may cost you more. If you select Multime dia retr ieval > Always automatic , your device automatically makes an ac tive packet data connection to retrieve the message both in and outside your home cellular network. Allow anon. msgs. âÂÂSelect whether you want to reject messages from an anonymous sender.
Messaging 41 Receive adverts âÂÂDefine whether you want to receive multimedia message advertisements. Receive report âÂÂSelect whether you want the status of the sent message to be shown in the log (network service). Deny report sending âÂÂS elect wh ether you w ant to deny your device sending delivery reports of received messages. Message validity âÂÂSelect how long the message center resends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the message cannot be sent within the validity period, the message is delete d from the message center. E-mail Press , and select Messaging > Option s > Se ttings > E-mail . To select which mailbox you want to use for sending e-mail, select Mailbox in use and a mailbox. To remove a mailbox and its messages from your device, scroll to it, and press . To create a new mailbox, select Options > New mailbox . Select Mailboxes and a mailbox to change the following settings: Connection settings , User settin gs, Retrieval settings , and Automatic ret rieval . Connection settings To edit the settings for the e-mail you receive, select Incoming e-mai l and from the following: User name âÂÂEnter your user name, given to you by your service provider. Password âÂÂEnter your password. If you leave this field blank, you are prompted for th e password when you try to connect to your remote mailbox. Incoming mail server âÂÂEnter the IP address or host name of the mail server that receives your e-mail. Access point in use âÂÂSelect an internet access point (IAP). See âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 121. Mailbox name âÂÂEnter a name for the mailbox. Mailbox type âÂÂDefines the e-mail pr otocol that your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4 . This setting cannot be changed. Security (ports ) âÂÂSelect the security option used to secure the connection to th e remote mailbox. Port âÂÂDefine a port for the connection. APOP secure login (for POP3 only)âÂÂUse with the POP3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to the remote e-mail server while connecting to th e mailbox. To edit the settings for the e-mail you send, select Outgoing e-mail and from the following:
Messaging 42 My e-mail address âÂÂEnter the e-mail address given to you by your service provider. Outgoing mail server âÂÂEnter the IP addr ess or hos t name of the mail server that sends your e-mail. You may only be able to use the outgoing server of your service provider. Contact your service provid er for more information . The settings for User name , Password, Access point i n use , Security (ports) , and Port are similar to the ones in Incoming e-mail . User settings My name âÂÂEnter your own name. Your name replaces your e-mail address in the recipientâÂÂs device when the recipientâÂÂs device supports this function. Send message âÂÂDefine how e-mail is sent from your device. Select Immediately for the device to connect to the mailbox when you select Send message . If you select During next conn. , e-mail is sent when the connection to the remote mailbox is available. Send copy to self âÂÂSelect wh ether you want to send a copy of the e-mail to your own mailbox. Include signature âÂÂSelect whether you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messages. New e-mail al erts âÂÂSelect whether you want to receive the new e-mail indications (a tone, a note, and a mail indicator) when new mail is received. Retrieval settings E-mail to retrieve âÂÂDefine which parts of the e-mail are retrieved: Headers only , Size limit (POP3), or Msgs. & attachs. (POP3). Retrieval amount âÂÂDefine how many new e-mail messages are retrieved to the mailbox. IMAP4 folder pa th (for IMAP4 only)âÂÂDefine the folder path for folders to be subscribed. Folder subscriptions (for IMAP4 only)âÂÂSubscribe to other folders in the remote mailbox and retrieve content from those folders. Automatic retrieval E-mail notifi cations âÂÂTo aut omatically retrieve the headings to your device when you receive ne w e-mail in your remote mailbox, select Auto-update or Only in home netw. . E-mail r etriev al âÂÂTo automatically retrieve t he headings of new e-mail messages from your remote mailbox at defined times, selec t Enabled or Only in home netw. . Define when and how often the messages are retrieved. E-mail notifi cations and E-mail retrieval cannot be active at the same time. Setting the device to retrie ve e-mail automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data t hrough
Messaging 43 your service provider's netw ork. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transmission charges. Web service messages Press , and select Messaging > Option s > Se ttings > Service message . Select whether you want to receive service messages. If you want to set the device to automatically activate the browser and start a network connection to retrieve content when you receive a service message, select Download messages > Automatically . Cell broadcast Check the available topics and related topic numbers with your service provider. Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Cell b roadcast and from the following: Recept ion âÂÂSelect whether you want to receive cell broadcast messages. Language âÂÂSelect the languages in which you want to receive messages: All , Selec ted , or Other . Topic detection âÂÂSelect whether the device automatically searches for new topic numbers, and saves the new numbers without a name to the topic list. Other settings Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Other and from the following: Save sent messages âÂÂSelect wh ether you want to save a copy of the text messages, mu ltimedia messages, or e-mail that you send to the Sent folder. Number o f saved ms gs. âÂÂDefine how many sent messages are saved to the Sent folder at a time. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. Memory in use âÂÂSelect the memory where you want to save your messages: Phone memory or Mass memory .
Gallery 44 Gallery To store and organize your images, video c lips, sound clips, playlists, and streaming links, or share your files with other compatible UPnP devices thro ugh wireless LAN, press , and select Gallery . Tip! To open the image tile of the multimedia menu, press . See âÂÂMultimedia menuâÂÂ, p. 15. View and browse files Select Images & videos , Tracks , , Lifeblog , Sound clips , St reaming links , Presentations , or All files , and press to open it. The content in the Images & videos folder is shown in the landscape mode. You can browse and open folders; and mark, copy, and move items to folders. You ca n also create albums; and mark, copy, and add items to albums. To open a file, press . Video clips, .ram files, and streaming links are opened and played in RealPlayer , and music and sound clips in Music player . See âÂÂRealPlayerâÂÂ, p. 102, and âÂÂMusic playerâÂÂ, p. 19. To download images or videos, in the Images & vi deos folder, select the download ic on. The browser opens, and you can select a bookmark you want to use to downl oad items. Images and video clips Pictures taken and video clips recorded with the camera are stored in the Images & videos folder in Gallery . Images and video clips can also be sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail atta chment, or through Bluetooth connectivity. To be able to view a rec eived image or video clip in Gallery or in the Real player, you must first save it. Select Gallery > Images & videos . The images and video clip files are in a loop, and ordered by date. The number of files is displayed. When the image is opened, to zoom in an image, press the game keys next to the display. The zooming ratio is not stored permanently. To rotate the selected image left or right, selec t Options > Rotate > Left or Right . To edit a video clip o r a photo, select Options > Edit . An image editor or a video editor opens. See âÂÂEdit video clipsâÂÂ, p. 47. See âÂÂEdit imagesâÂÂ, p. 46.
Gallery 45 To creat e custo m video clips, select a video clip in the gallery, and select Options > Ed it . See âÂÂEdit video clipsâÂÂ, p. 47. To print your images on a comp atible printer, or to store them for printing, select Options > Print . See âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 49. You can also tag images for later printing to the Print Bas ket in Gallery . See âÂÂPr int BasketâÂÂ, p. 45. To add an image or a video clip to an album in the gallery, select Options > Albums > Add to album . To use the picture as a background image, select the picture and Options > Use image > Set as wallpaper. To delete an image or video clip, from the active toolbar, select Delete . See âÂÂActive toolbarâÂÂ, p. 45. To switch from Ga llery to the camera, press the capture key. Active toolbar In the Images & videos folder, you can use the active toolbar as a shortcut to select different tasks. The active toolbar is available only when you have selected an image or a video clip. In the active toolbar, scroll up or down to different items, and select them by pressing the scroll key. The available options vary depending on the view you are in and whether you have selected an image or a video clip. Yo u can also define whether the active tool bar is always visible on the display or activated by a keypress. If you want the active toolbar to be visible on t he display, select Option s > Show icons . If you want the active toolbar to be visible only when you need it, select Options > Hide icons . To activate the active toolbar, press . Select from the following: to play the selected video clip to send the selected image or video clip / to add or remove an image from the Print Basket. See âÂÂPrint BasketâÂÂ, p. 45. to view the images in the Print Basket to start a slide show of your images to delete the selected image or video clip to print the viewed image The available options may vary depending on the view you are in. Print Basket You can tag images to the Print Basket, and print them later with a compatible printer or in a compatible printing
Gallery 46 kiosk, if available. See âÂÂIma ge printâÂÂ, p. 49. The tagged images are indicated with in the Images & videos folder and albums. To tag an image for later printing, select an image and Add to Print Basket from the active toolbar. To view the images in the Print Basket, select View Print Basket from the active toolbar, or select from the Images & videos folder (available only when you have added pictures to the Print Basket). To remove an image from the Print Basket, select an image in the Images & videos f o l d er o r i n a n a l bu m , a n d Remove from Print Basket from the active toolbar. Albums With albums you can convenie ntly manage your images and video clips. To view the albums list, select Images & videos > Options > Albums > View albums . To add a picture or a video clip to an album in the gallery, scroll to a picture or video clip, and select Options > Albums > Add to album . A list of albums opens. Select the album to which you want to add the picture or v ideo clip. You can also create a n ew album. To remove a file from an al bum, press . The file is not deleted from the Images & videos folder in Gallery . To create a new album, in the albums list view, select Options > New albu m . Edit images To edit the pictures after taking them, or the ones already saved in Gallery , select Options > Edit . Select Options > Apply effect to open a grid where you can select different edit optio ns indicated by smal l icons. You can crop and rotate the image; adjust the brightness, color, contrast, and resolution ; and add effects, text, clip art, or a frame to the picture. Crop image To crop an image, se lect Options > Appl y effect > Crop . To crop the image size manually, s elect Manual or a predefined aspect ratio from the list. If you select Man ual , a cross is displayed in the uppe r left corner of the image. Use the scroll key to select the area to crop, and select Set . Another cross is displayed in the lower right corner. Again select the area to be cropped. To adjust the first selected area, select Back . The selecte d areas for m a rectang le that forms the cropped image. If you selected a predefined aspect ratio, select the upper left corner of the area to be cropped. To resize the highlighted area, use the scroll key. To freeze the selected
Gallery 47 area, press . To move the area within the picture, use the scroll key. To select the area to be cropped, press . Reduce redness To reduce redness of the eyes in an image, select Options > Apply effect > Red eye reduction . Move the cross onto the eye, and press . A loop is displayed on the display. To resize the loop to fit the size of the eye, use the scroll key. To reduce the redness, press . Useful shortcuts Shortcuts in the image editor: ⢠To view an image in the full screen, press . To return to the normal view, press ag ain. ⢠To rotate an image clockwise or counterclockwise, press or . ⢠To zoom in or out, press or . ⢠To move on a zoomed image, scroll up, down, left, or right. Edit video clips To edit video clips in Gallery and create custom video clips, scroll to a video clip, and select Options > Edit > Merge , Change sou nd , Add text , or Cut . See âÂÂGalleryâÂÂ, p. 44. The video editor supports video file formats 3gp and .mp4, and sound file forma ts .aac, .amr, .mp3 and .wav. It does not necessarily support all featur es of a file format or all the variations of file f ormats. The custom video clips are automatically saved in the Images & videos in Gallery . The clips are saved in the mass memory. Add images, video, sound, and text You can add images, video clips, and text to a video clip selected in Gallery to create custom video clips. To combine an image or a video clip with the selected video clip, in the Images & videos folder, select Opti ons > Edit > Merge > Image or Video clip . Select the desired file. To add a new sound clip and replac e the original sound clip in the video clip, select Options > Ed it > Change sound and a sound clip. To add text to the beginning or the end of the video clip, select Options > Edit > Add text , enter the text you want to add, and select OK . Then select where you want to add the text: Beginning or End .
Gallery 48 Cut video clip You can trim the video clip, and add start and end marks to exclude parts from the video clip. In the Images & videos folder, select Optio ns > Edit > Cu t . To play the selected video clip from the start, select Options > Play . To select which parts of the vi deo clip are included in the custom video clip, and define the start and end points for them, scroll to the desired point on the video, and select Options > Start mark or En d mark . To edit the start or end point of the selected part, sc roll to the des ired mark, a nd press the scroll key. You can then move the selected mark forwards or backwards on the timeline. To remove all the marks, select Options > Remove > All marks . To preview the video clip, select Options > Play marked section . To move on the timeline, scroll left or right. To stop playing the video clip, select Pause . To continue playing the clip, select Options > Play . To return back to the cut video view, select Back . To save the changes, and return to Gallery , select Done . Edit video clips to send To send a video cli p, select Options > Send > Via multimedia , Via e-mail , Via Bluetooth , or Post to w eb . Contact your network service provider for details of the maximum multimedia message size that you can send. If yo u wa nt t o s e nd a v i de o cl ip t ha t i s o v er th e ma x im u m multimedia message size allowed by your service provider, you can send the clip using Bluetooth wireless technology. See âÂÂSend data using Bluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 73. Y ou can also transfer your videos to a compatible PC using Bluetooth connectivity, or a compatible USB data cabl e. You can also cut the video clip for sending it in a multimedia message. In the video editor main view, select Options > Movie > Edit for MM S . The duration and size of the video clip is shown on the display. To edit the size of the clip, scroll left or right. When the clip is the proper size to send, select Options > Send via MMS . If your video clip is in .mp 4 format, you may not be able to send it in a multimedia message. To change the file format of the clip, scroll to it in Gallery , and select Options > Edit > Options > Settings > Resolution > MMS compatible . Return to the video editor main view, select Options > Movie > Save , and enter a name for the clip. The video clip is saved in .3g pp format and can be sent in a multimedia message. The file format of the original video clip does no t change.
Gallery 49 Slide show In the active toolbar, select Start s lide show ( ) t o v i ew a slide show of images in full screen. The slide show starts from the selected file. Select from the following: Pause âÂÂto pause the slide show Continue âÂÂto resume the slide show, if paused End âÂÂto close the slide show To browse the images, pres s ( previous) or (next) (available only when Zoom and pan is off). To adjust the tempo of the s lide show, before starting the slide sh ow, sele ct Options > Slide show > Settings > Delay between sli des . To make the slide show move smoothly from one slide to another, and let the gallery ra ndomly zoom in and out in the images, select Zoom and pan . To add sound to the slide show, select Options > Slide show > Settings and from the following: Music âÂÂSelect On or Off . Song âÂÂSelect a music file from the list. To decrease or increase the volume, use the volume key in your device. Presentations With presentations, you can view SVG (scalab le vector graphics) f iles, such a s ca rtoons and maps. SVG images maintain their appearance when printed or viewed with different screen sizes and re solutions. To view scalable vector graphics, select Presenta tions , scroll to an image, and select Options > Play . To pause playing, select Options > Pause . To zoom in, press . To zoom out, press . To rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise or counter-clockwise, press or . To rotate the image 45 degrees, press or . To switch between full screen and normal screen, press . Image print To print images with Image print , select the image you want to print, and the print option in the gallery, camera, image editor, or image viewer. Use Image print to print your images usin g a compatible USB data cable, wireless LAN , or Bluetooth conn ectivity.
Gallery 50 You can only print images th at are in .jpeg format. The pictures ta ken with the c amera are automatically saved in .jpeg format. To print to a printer compatib le with PictBridge, connect the data cable before you se lect the print option, and check that the data cable mode is set to Image print or Ask on connection . See âÂÂUSBâÂÂ, p. 76. Printer selection When you use Image print for the first time, a list of available compatible printers is displayed after you select the image. Select a printer. Th e printer is set as the default printer. If you have connected a printer compatible wi th PictBridge using a comp atible Nokia connect ivity cable, the printer is automatically displayed. If the default printer is not av ailable, a list of available printing devices is displayed. To change the default printer, select Opt ions > Se ttings > Default printer . Print preview After you select the printer, the selected images are displayed using predefined layouts. To change the layout, press or to browse through the available layouts for the selected printer. If the images do not fit on a single page, press or to disp lay the additional pages. Print settings The available options vary depe nding on the capabilities of the printing device you selected. To set a default printer, select Options > Default printer . To select the paper size, select Paper size , the size of paper from the list, and OK . Select Cancel to return to the previous view. Print online With Print online , you can order prints of i mages online directly to your home, or to a store where you can pick them up. You can also order diffe rent products with the selected image, such as mugs or mouse pads. The available products depend on the service provider. To use Print online , you must have at least one printing service configuration file installed. The files can be obtained from printing service providers that suppo rt Print online . For more information on the application, see www.nseries.com/support or your local Nokia website.
Gallery 51 Share online With Share online , you can share images and video clips in compatible online albums, weblogs, or in other compatible online sharing services on the web. You can upload content, save unfinished posts as drafts and continue later, and view the content of the albums. The supported content types may vary depending on the service provider. To use Share online , you must subscribe to the service with an online image sharing service provider, and create a new account. You can usually subscribe to the service on the web page of the service pr ovider. Contact your service provider for details on subsc ribing to the service. For more information on compatible service providers, see the product support pages at www.nseries.com/support or your local Nokia website. For more information on the application, see www.nseries.com/support or your local Nokia website. Home network with Gallery With UPnP architecture and wireless local area network (WLAN) you can create a home network of compatible devices. Home network enables you to view content st ored in your Nokia N81 remote ly on a compatible device. You can also copy files between your Nokia N81 and a compatible UPnP enabled device. For more information, see âÂÂHome networkâÂÂ, p.77 and âÂÂHome network with music playerâÂÂ, p. 21. Show media files stored in your device To select images, videos, and sound clips stored in your device, and show them in an other home network device, such as a compatible TV, do the following: 1 In Ga llery , select an image, a video c lip, or a sound clip. 2 Select Options > Show via home network . 3 Select a compatible device in which the media file is shown. The images are shown both in th e other home network device and your devic e, and the video clips and sound clips are played only in the other device. To print images saved in Gallery through Ho me media with a UPnP compatible printer, select the print option in Gallery . See âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 49. Content sharin g does not have to be switched on. To search files with different criteria, select Options > Find . To sort the found files, select Options > So rt by . Copy media files To copy or transfer media file s from your device to another compatible device, such as a UPnP compatible PC, select a file in Gallery and Options > Move and copy > Copy to
Gallery 52 home network or Move to home net. . Content sharing does not have to be switched on. To copy or transfer files from the other device to your device, select a file in the other device and Options > Copy to > Phone me mory or Mass memory . Content sharing does not have to be switched on.
Camera 53 Camera Your Nokia N81 has two cameras, a high r esolution camera on the back of the device (the main camera in landscape mode) and a lower resolution camera on the front (the secondary camera in portrait mode). You can use both cameras to take still pict ures and record videos. Your device supports an image capture resolution of 1600x1200 pixels using the main camera. The ima ge resolution in this guid e may appear different. The images and video clips ar e automatically saved in the Images & v ids. folder in Gallery . The cameras produc e .jpeg images. Video clips are re corded in the MPEG-4 file format with the .mp4 file extension, or in the 3GPP file format with the .3gp file extension ( sharing quality). See âÂÂVideo settingsâÂÂ, p. 61. You can send images and video clips in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachme nt, or by using Bluetooth connectivity or wireless LAN connection. You can also upload them to your compatible online album. See âÂÂShare onlineâÂÂ, p. 51. Take pictures When taking a picture, note the following: ⢠Use both hands to keep the camera still. ⢠The quality of a digitally z oomed picture is lower than that of a nonzoomed picture. ⢠The camera goes into the batte ry sa ving mode if ther e are no keypresses for a mo ment. To continue taking pictures, press . To take a picture, do the following: 1 To activate the main camera, press and hold . If the camera is in Video mode , select Switch to image mode from the active toolbar. 2 To take a picture, in the main camera, press . Do not move the devic e before the image is saved. To zoom in or out, use the volume key in your device. To make lighting and color adjustments before taking a picture, use the scroll key to scroll through the active toolbar. See âÂÂAdjust color and lightingâÂÂ, p. 56. Saving the captured image may take longer if you change the zoom, lighting, or color settings.
Camera 54 To activate the front camera, select Options > Use secondary camera . To take a picture, press . To zoom in or out, press or . To leave the camera open in the background, and use other applications, press . To return to the camera, press and hold . Still image camera indicators The still image camera viewfinder d isplays the following: 1 The current capture mode indicator. 2 The active toolbar, .See âÂÂActive toolbarâÂÂ, p. 54. 3 Battery charge level indicator. 4 The image resolution indicator indicates whether the quality of the image is Print 2M - Large , Print 1M - Medium , or MMS 0.3M - S mall . 5 The image counter displays the estimated number of images you can capture using the current image quality setting and memory in use (the counter is not displayed during image capture). 6 The device memory ( ) and mass memor y ( ) indicators shows where images are saved. Active toolbar The active toolbar provides yo u with shortcuts to different items and settings before and after taking a picture or recording a video. Scroll to items, and select them by pressing . You c an also defi ne when the activ e toolbar is visible on the display. If you want the active toolbar to be visible before and after taking a picture or recording a video, select Options > Show icons . To view the active toolbar only when you need it, select Options > Hide icons . Only the capture mode and battery level indicators are shown on the display. To activate the active toolbar, press . The toolbar is visible for 5 seconds. Before taking a pic ture or reco rding a video, in the active toolbar, select from the following: to select the scene to select the flash mode (images only) to activate the self-timer (i mages only). See âÂÂYou in the pictureâÂÂself-timerâÂÂ, p. 58.
Camera 55 to activate the sequence m ode (images only). See âÂÂTake pictures in a sequenceâÂÂ, p. 57. to select a color effect to show or hide the viewfinder grid (images only) to adjust white balance to adjust the exposure co mpensation (images only) to adjust light se nsitivity (images o nly) to switch between the video and image modes The icons change to reflect the current status of th e setting. The available options vary de pending o n the capture mode and view you are in. See also active toolbar opt ions in âÂÂAfter taking a pictureâÂÂ, p. 55, âÂÂAfter recording a vid eoâ , p. 60, and âÂÂActive to olbarâÂÂ, p. 45 in Gallery . After taking a picture After you take the picture, se lect the following from the active toolbar (available only if Show ca ptured image is set to On in still image camera settings): ⢠If you do not want to keep the image, select Delete . ⢠To send the image, press the call key, or select Send . For more information, see âÂÂMessagingâÂÂ, p. 34, âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 72, and âÂÂShare onlineâÂÂ, p. 5 1. This option is not available duri ng an active call. You can also send the image to a call recipient during an active call. Select Send to caller (only available during an active call). ⢠To tag images to the Print Basket for later printing, select Add to Print Basket . ⢠To send the picture to a compatible online album, select Post to (available only if you have set up an account for a compatible online album. See âÂÂShare onlineâÂÂ, p. 51). To use the picture as wallpaper in the active standby, select Options > Set as wallpaper . To set the image as a call image for a contact, select Options > Set as contact call img. . Still image camera settings There are two kinds of settings for the still image camera: active toolbar settings and main settings. To use active toolbar settings, see âÂÂAdjust color and lightingâÂÂ, p. 56. The active to olbar se ttings r eturn to th e default settings after you close the camera, but the main settings remain the same until you change them again. To change the main settings, select Options > Settin gs and from the following:
Camera 56 Image quality â Print 2M - Large (1600x1200 resolution), Print 1M - Medium (1152x864 resolution) or MMS 0.3M - Small (640 x480 resolution). If you want to print the image, select Print 2M - Large or Print 1 M - Medium . To se nd the image through MMS, select MMS 0.3M - Small . These resolutions are only av ailable in the main camera. Add to album âÂÂSelect whethe r you want to save the image to a certain album in the gallery. If you select Yes , a list of available albums opens. Show captured image âÂÂSelect On if you want to see the captured image after it is taken, or Off if you want to continue taking pi ctures immediately. Default image name âÂÂDefine the default name for the captured images. Extended digital zoom (main camera only)â On (continuous) allows the zoom incr ements to be smooth and continuous between digital and extend ed digital zoom, On (paused) allows the zoom increments to pause at the digital and extended digital step point, and Off allows a limited amount of zoom while retaining the image resolution. Capture tone âÂÂSelect the tone you want to hear when you take a picture. Memory in use âÂÂSelect where to store your images. Restore camera se ttings âÂÂSelect Yes to return the defaul t values to the camera settings. Flash The flash is available on ly in the main camera. Keep a safe distance when using the flash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a pict ure. The camera ha s an LED flash fo r low light condition s. The following flash modes are available for the s till image camera: Automatic () , R. eye redu. () , On () , a n d Off () . To change the flash mode, in th e active toolbar, select the desired flash mode. Adjust color and lighting To enable the camera to reproduce colors and lighting more accurately, or to add ef fects to your pictures or videos, use the scroll key to scroll through the active toolbar, and select from the following options: White balance âÂÂSelect the current lighting condition from the list. This allows the camera to reproduce co lors more accurately. Exposure compe nsation (images only)âÂÂIf you are shooting a dark subject against very light background such
Camera 57 as snow, adjust the exposure to 1 or even 2 to compensate the background brightness. For light subjects against dark background, use -1 or -2. Flash mode âÂÂSelect the desired flash mode. See âÂÂFlashâÂÂ, p. 56. Colour ton e âÂÂSelect a color effect from the list. Light sens itivity (images only)âÂÂIn crease the light sensitivity in low light to decrease the risk of getting unsharp or too dark images . Higher sensitivity may increase the graininess of the images. The screen display changes to match any setti ngs you make, so that you see how the change affects the pictures or videos. The available settings va ry dependin g on t he sele cted camera. The setup settings return to the default settings when you close the camera. If you select a new scene, the color and lighting settings are replaced by the selected scene. See âÂÂScenesâÂÂ, p. 57. You can change the setup settings after select ing a scene if needed. Scenes A scene helps you to find the right color and lighting settings for the current environment. The settings of each scene have been set according to a certain style or environment. Scenes are only availabl e in the main camera. In the active toolbar, selec t from the following options: Video scenes Auto ( ) (default) and Night () Image scen es Auto ( ) (default ), User defined () , Portrait () , Landscape () , Night () , a n d Night portrait () . When you take pictures, the default scene is Auto . To make your own scene suitable for a certain environment, scroll to User defined , and select Options > Change . In the user defined scene you can adjust different lighting and color settings. To copy the settings o f another scene, select Based on scene mode and the desired scene. Take pictures in a sequence The sequence mode is availabl e only in the main camera.
Camera 58 To set the camera to take six pictures or more in a sequence (if enough memory is available), in the active toolbar, select Sequence mode > Burst to take six pictures, or the time interv al for taking pictures. The number of pictures taken depends on the available memory. To take six pictures, press . To stop taking pictures, press Cancel . To take more than six pictures, press and hold . To stop taking pictures, release it. The number of pictures taken depends on the available memory. To use a time interval between taking pictures, select Sequence mode and a time interval. To start taking pictures, press . To stop taking pictures before the time ends, press again. After you take the pictures, they are shown in a grid on the display. To view a picture, press t o open it. If you used a time period for taking pictur es, the last ta ken picture is shown o n the di splay. You can also use the sequence mode with the self-timer. When using the self-timer, the maximum number of pictures is six pictures. To return to the sequence mode viewfinder , press . To switch off the sequence mode, in the active toolbar, select Sequence mode > Si ngle shot . You in the pictureâÂÂself-timer The self-timer is available only in the main camera. Use the self-timer to delay the capture so that you can include yourself in the picture. To set the self-timer delay, in the active toolbar, select Self timer > 2 seconds , 10 seconds , or 20 seconds . To ac tivate th e self-timer , select Activate . The de vice beeps when the timer is running. The camera takes the picture after the selected delay elapses. To switch off Self timer , in the active toolbar, select Self timer > Off . Tip! In the active toolbar, select Self timer > 2 seconds to keep your han d steady when taking a picture. Tips on taking good photographs Picture quality Use the appropriate picture quali ty. The camera has three picture quality modes ( Print 2M - Large , Print 1M - Mediu m , or MMS 0.3M - Small ). Use th e High setting to make sure that the camera produc es the best picture quality available. Note howeve r, that better picture quality requires more storage space. For MMS and e-mail attachments it may be necessary to use MM S 0.3M -
Camera 59 Small setting. You can define the quality in Op tions > Settings . Background Use a simple background. For portraits and other pictures with people, avoid having yo ur subject in front of a cluttered, complex background that may distract attention from the subject. Move the camera, or the subject, when these conditions cannot be met. Move the camera closer to the object to take clearer po rtraits. Depth When shooting landscapes and sceneries, add depth to your pictures by placing objects in the foreground. If the foreground object is too close to the camera, it may be blurred. Lighting conditions Changing the source, amount, and direction of light can change photographs dramatica lly. Here are some typical lighting conditions: ⢠Light source behind the subject. Avoid placing y our subject in front of a strong light source. If the light source is behind the subject or visible in the display, the resulting picture may have weak contrast, may be too dark, and may contain unwanted light effects. ⢠Sidelit su bject. Strong side light gives a dramatic effect but may be too harsh, resulting in too much contrast. ⢠Light source in front of the subject. Harsh sunlight may cause the subjects to squint the ir eyes. The contrast may also be too high. ⢠Optima l lightin g is found in situations where ther e is plenty of diffused, soft light available, for example, on a bright, partially cloudy da y or on a sunny day in the shadow of trees. Record videos 1 To activate the main came ra, press and hold . If the camera is in the Image mode , select Switch to video mode from the active toolbar. 2 Press to start recording. In the p ortrait mode, use the scroll ke y for record ing. The record icon is shown and a tone sounds, indicating that recording has started. 3 Select Stop to stop recording. The vi deo clip is automatically saved to the Images & vids. folder of Gallery . See âÂÂGalleryâÂÂ, p. 44. The maximum length of the video clip depends on the available memory. To pause recording at any time, select Pause . The pause icon ( ) blinks on the display. Video recording automatically stops if recordi ng is set to pause and t here
Camera 60 are no keypresses within a minute. Select C ontinue to resume reco rding. To zoom in or out of the subject, press the volume key on the side of the device. In the po rtrait mode, to zoom in or out, press or . To make lighting and color adjustments before recording a video, use the scroll key to scroll through the active toolbar. See âÂÂAdjust color and lightingâÂÂ, p. 56 and âÂÂScenesâÂÂ, p. 57. To activate the front camera, select Options > Use secondary camera . Video capture indicators The video viewfinder displays the following: 1 The current capture mode indicator. 2 The audio mute on indicator. 3 The active toolbar, which you can sc roll through before recording to select different items and se ttings (the toolbar is not displayed during recording). See âÂÂActive toolbarâÂÂ, p. 54. 4 Battery charge level indicator. 5 The video quality indicator indicates whether the quality of the video is High , Normal , or Sharing . 6 The video clip file type. 7 The total available video re cording time. When you are recording, the current vide o length indicator also shows the elapsed time and time remaining. 8 The device memory ( ) and mass memor y ( ) indicators show where videos are saved. To display all viewfinder indicators, select Options > Show icons . Select Hide icons to display only the video status indicators, and during the reco rding, the available record time, zo om bar when z ooming, and the s electio n keys. After recording a video After you record a video clip, select the following from the active toolbar (available only if Sh ow captured video is set to On in Video settings): ⢠To immediat ely play th e video clip you just recorde d, select Play . ⢠If you do not want to keep the video, select Delete . ⢠To send the video clip using multimedia message, e-mail, or Bluetooth connecti vity, press the call key, or select Send . For more information, see âÂÂMessagingâÂÂ, p. 34, âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 72, and âÂÂShare onlineâÂÂ, p. 51. This option is not available during an active call. You may not be able to send video clips
Camera 61 saved in the .mp4 file format in a multimedia message. You can also send the video clip to a call recipient during an active cal l. Select Send t o caller . ⢠To upload the video clip to a compat ible online album, select Post to (available only if you have set up an account for a compatib le online album. See âÂÂShare onlineâÂÂ, p. 51). Video settings There are two kinds of settings for the video recorder: Video setup and main settings. To adjust Video setup settings, see âÂÂAdjust color and lightingâÂÂ, p. 56. The setup settings return to the default settings after you c lose the camera, but the main settings remain the same u ntil you change them again. To cha nge the main settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: Video quality âÂÂSet the quality of the video clip to High (best quality for long term usage and playback on a compatible TV or PC and handset), Normal (standard quality for playback through your handset), or Sharing (limited video clip size to send using a multimedia message). If you want to view the video on a compatible TV or PC, select High , which has QVGA resolution (320x240) and the .mp4 file format. To send the video clip through MMS, select Sharing (QCIF resolution, .3gp file format). The size of the video clip recorded with Sharing is limited to 300 KB (about 20 seconds in dura tion) so that it can be conveniently sent as a multimedia message to a compatible device. Audio recording âÂÂSelect Mute if you do not want to record sound. Add to album âÂÂSelect whether you want to add the recorded video clip to a certain album in Gallery . Select Yes to open a list of available albums. Show captured video âÂÂSelect whether you want the first frame of the recorded video clip to be shown on the display after the recording stops. Select Play from the active toolbar (main camera) or Options > Play (secondary camera) to view the vid eo clip. Default video name âÂÂDefine the default name for the captured video clips. Memory in use âÂÂDefine the default memory store. Restore camera settings âÂÂSelect Yes to return the default values to the camera settings .
Web 62 Web Press , and select Web (net work se rvice). Shortcut: To star t the Web browser, press and hold in the standby mode. With the Web browser, you can view hypertext markup language (HTML) web pages on the internet as originally designed. You can also br owse web pages that use extensible hypertext markup language (XHTML), or the wireless markup language (W ML), and that are designed specifically for mobile devices. With Web , you can zoom in and out on a page, use Min i Map and Page Overview to navi gate on pages, read web feeds and blogs, bookmark web pages, and download content. Check the availability of services, pricing, and fees with your service provider. Service providers will also giv e you instructions on how to use their services. To use the Web browser, you need an a ccess point to connect to th e internet. See âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 121. Browse the web To browse a web page, in the bookmarks v iew, select a bookmark, or enter the address in the field ( ). Then press . To open links and make selections, press . To enter a new web page address you want to visit, select Options > Go to web address . Tip! To visit a web page saved as a bookmark in the bookmarks view, while browsing, press and select a bookmark. To retrieve the latest content of the page from the server, select Options > Navigation options > Rel oad . To save the web address of th e current page as a bookmark, select Options > Save as bookmark . To use visual history to view snapshots of the p ages you have visited during the current browsing session, select Back (avail able if History list is set on in the browser settings and the current page is not the first page you visit). To go to a previously visited page, select the page. To save a page while browsing, select Options > Tools > Save page .
Web 63 You can save pages and browse them later, when offline. You can also group these saved pages into folders. To access the pages you have saved, sele ct Options > Bookmarks > Saved pages . To open a sublist of commands or actions for the currently open page, select Options > Service options (if supported by the web page). Shortcuts while browsing ⢠Press to open your bookmarks. ⢠Press to search for keyw ords in the current page. ⢠Press to return to the previous pag e. ⢠Press to list all open windows. ⢠Press to close the current window if two or more windows are open. ⢠Press to show the page overview of the current page. Press again to zoom in and view the desired section of the page. ⢠Press to enter a new web address. ⢠Press to go to the start page. ⢠Press or to zoom the page in or out. Text search To search for keywords within the current web pag e, select Options > Find > Text , and enter a keyword. To go to the previous match, press . To go to the next match, press . Tip! You ca n also search for ke ywords within the page by pressing .. Toolbar in the browser With the toolbar, you can sele ct the most frequently used features in the browser. To ope n the toolbar, press and hold on an empty spot on a we b page. To move within the toolbar, press or , To select a feature, press . In the toolbar, select from the following: ⢠Frequently u sed links to view a list of the web addresses you visi t frequently ⢠Page overview to vie w the overview of the current web page ⢠Find to search for keywords within the current page ⢠Reload to refresh the page ⢠Subscribe to web f eeds (if av ailable) to view a list of available web feeds on the current web page, and subscribe to a web feed Download and purchase items You can download items such a s ringing tones, images, operator logos, themes, and vide o clips. These items can be provided free of charge, or you can purchase them. Downloaded items are handled by the respective applications in your device; for example, a downloaded photo can be saved in Gallery .
Web 64 Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sour ces, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or ha ve passed the Java Verified TM testing. 1 To download the item, select the link. 2 Select the appropriate option to purchase the item (for example, âÂÂBuyâÂÂ). 3 Carefully read all the information provided. To continue the download, select Accept . To cancel the download, select Cancel . When you start a download, a list of ongoing and completed downloads from the cu rrent browsing session is displayed. To view the list, select Options > Downloads . In the list, scroll to an item, and select Options to cancel ongoing downloads, o r open, save, or delete completed downloads. Mini Map Mini Map helps you to navigate on web pages that contain a large amount of informa tion. When Min i Map is set on in the browser settings and you scroll through a large web page, Mini Map opens and shows an overview of the web page you browse. To move on Mi ni Map , press , , , or . When you find the desired location, stop scrolling; Mini Map disappears, leaving you to t he selected spot. To set Mini Map on, select Options > Settings > General > Mini Map > On . Page overview When you are browsing a web page that contains a large amount of information, you ca n use Page Overview to view what kind of information the page contains. To show the page overview of the current page, press . To find the desired spot on the page, press , , , or . Press again to zoom in and view the desired section of the page. Web feeds and blogs Web feeds are xml files on web pages that are used by the weblog community and news organizations to share the latest headlines or text, for example , news feeds. Blogs or weblogs are web diaries. Most of the web feeds use RSS and ATOM technologies. It is common to find web feeds on web, blog, and wiki pages. The Web browser automatically detects if a web page contains web feeds. To subscribe to a web f eed, select Options > Subscribe . To view the web feeds you have subscribed to, in the bookmarks view, select Web feeds . To update a web feed, select it, and select Options > Refresh .
Web 65 To define how the web feeds are updated, select Options > Settings > Web feeds . See âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p. 66. Connection security If the security indicator is displayed during a connection, the data transmis sion between the device and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does no t indicate that the d ata transmission between the gate way and the content server (or place where the reque sted re source is stored) is secure. The service provider secures the data transmission between the gateway and the content server. Security certificates may be required for some services, such as banking services. You ar e notified if the identity o f the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. See also âÂÂCertificate managementâÂÂ, p. 116 for more information on the certificates and certificate details. Bookmarks view The bookmarks view allows yo u to select web addresses from a list, or from a coll ection of bookmarks in the Auto. Bookmarks folder. You can also enter the URL address of the web page you want to visit directly into the field ( ). indicates the starting page defined for the default access point . You can save URL addresses as bookmarks while browsing on the internet. You can also save addresses received in messages to your bookmarks, and send saved bookmarks. To open the bookmarks view while browsing, press , or select Option s > Bookmarks . To edit the details of a bookmark, such as the title, select Options > Bookmark manager > Edit . In the bookmarks view, you can also enter other browser folders. The Web browser allows y ou to save web pages during browsing. In the Saved pages folder, you can view the content of the pages you have saved offline. The Web browser also keeps track of the web pages you visit during browsing. In the Auto. Bookmarks folder, you can view the list of visited web pages. In Web Feeds , you can view saved links to web feeds and blogs you have subscribed to. Web feeds are commonly found on major news organiza tion web pag es, personal weblogs, online communities that offer latest headlines, and article summaries. Web feeds use RSS and ATOM technologies.
Web 66 End connection To end the connection and view the browser page offline, select Op tions > Tools > Disconnect , or to end the connection and close the browser, select Options > Exit . Pressing the end key does not end the connection but takes the browser to the background. To delete the information th e network server coll ects about your visits to various web pages, select Options > Clear privacy data > Delete cookies . Empty the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the device. A cache is a memory location that is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information re quiring passwords, empty t he cache after each use. The info rmation or services you have accessed are stored in the cache. To empty the cache, select Op tions > Clear privacy data > Clear cache . Settings Select Options > Settings and from the following: General settings Access point âÂÂChange the default access point. See âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 120. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Homepage âÂÂDefine the home page. Mini Map âÂÂS et Mini Map on or off. See âÂÂMini MapâÂÂ, p. 64. History list âÂÂWhile browsing, to select Back to see a list of the pages you have visited during the current browsing session, set History list on. Security warnings âÂÂHide or show sec urity notific ations. Java/ECMA script âÂÂEnable or disable the use of script s. Page settings Load content âÂÂS elect whether you want to load images and other objects while browsing. If you select Text only , to load images or objects la ter during browsing, select Options > Tools > Load im ages . Screen size âÂÂSelect between the Full screen view and the normal view with the Options list. Default encodin g âÂÂIf text charac ters are not s hown correctly, you can select another encoding according to language for the current page. Font size âÂÂDefine the font size that is used fo r web pages. Block pop-ups âÂÂAllow or block automatic opening of different pop-ups while browsing.
Web 67 Automatic reload âÂÂIf you want the web pages to be refreshed automatically while browsing, select On . Privacy settings Auto. bookmarks âÂÂEnable or disable automatic bookmark collecting. If you want to cont inue saving the add resses of the visited web pages into the Auto. Bookmarks folder, but hide the folder from the bookmarks view, select Hide folder . Form data saving âÂÂIf you do not want the data you enter into different forms on a web page to be saved and used the next time you open the page, select Off . Cookies âÂÂEnable or disable the re ceiving and s ending of cookies. Web feeds settings Automatic updates âÂÂDefine whether you want the web feeds to be updated automatically or not, how often you want to update them and whic h connection to use. Settin g the application to retrieve web feeds automatically may involve the transmission of la rge amounts of data through your service provider's netw ork. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transmission charges. Acc. point fo r auto-update (only av ailable when Automatic updates is on)âÂÂChange the access point for auto-update.
Tools 68 Tools File manager To browse file s and folders, press , and sele ct Tools > File mgr. . The device memory view ( ) opens. Press to open the mass memory view ( ). To find a file, select Optio ns > Find and the memory from which to search. En ter a search text that matches the file name. To view what types of data yo u have in the device and how much memory the different da ta types consume, select Options > Memory details . The amount of available free memory is shown in Free memory . Memory lowâÂÂfree memory Many features of the device use memory to store data. The device notifies you if the memory is low. To free device memory, tr ansfer data to a compatible PC. To remove data to free memory, use File manager to delete files you no longer need, or go to the respective application. For exampl e, you can remove the following: ⢠Messages in the folders in Messagin g and retrieved e-mail messages from the mailbox ⢠Saved web pages ⢠Contact informa tion ⢠Calendar notes ⢠Applications shown in App. manager that you do not need Mass memory tool To monitor the amount of used and free space in the device mass memory, press , and select Tools > Utilities > Memory . To see how much disc space the different applications and data types us e, select Options > Memory details . To change the name of the mass memory, select Options > Mass memory name . To back up information from the device memory to the mass memory, select Options > Back up phone memory . To restore info rmation from th e mass memory to th e device memory, select Options > Rest. from mass mem. . Format mass memory When mass memory is reforma tted, all data in the memory is permanently lost. Ba ck up data you want to keep before
Tools 69 formatting the mass memory. You ca n use Nokia Nseries PC Suite to back up data to a compatible PC. Digital rights management technologies (D RM) may prevent some back- up data from being restored. Contact your service provider for more information about DRM use d for your content. See also âÂÂDigital rights mana gementâÂÂ, p. 109. To format mass memory, select Options > Format mass memory . Select Yes to confirm. Formatting does not guar antee that all confidential data stored in the device mass memor y is permanently destroyed. Standard formatti ng only marks the formatted area as available space and deletes the address to find the files again. The recove ry of formatted or even overwritten data may still be possible with special recovery tools and software. Voice commands You can use voice comman ds to control yo ur device. Fo r more information about the enhanced voice comman ds supported by your device, see âÂÂVoice dialingâÂÂ, p. 90. To activate enhanced vo ice commands for sta rting applications and profiles, you must open the Voice comm. application and its Profiles folder. Press , and select Tools > Utilities > Voice comm. > Profiles ; the device creates voice tags for the applications and profiles. To use enhanced voice commands, press and hold the right selection key in the standby mode, and say a voice command. The voice command is the nam e of the application or profile displayed in the list. To add more applications t o the list, select Options > New application . To add a second voice command that can be used to start the application, select Options > Change command , and enter the new voice command as text. Avoid very short names, abbreviations, and acronyms. To listen to the synthesized v oice tag, select Options > Playback . To change voice c ommand settings, select Op tions > Settings . To switch off the synthesizer that play s recognized voice tags and commands in th e selected device lang uage, select Synthesiser > Off . To reset voice recognition learning, for example, when the main user of the device has changed, select Remove voice adapts. .
Connections 70 Connections Wireless LAN Your device supports wireless local area network (wireless LAN). With wireless LAN, you can connect your device to the internet and compatible devices that have wireless LAN. For information about usin g your device with other compatible UPnP devices through wireless LAN, see âÂÂHome network with GalleryâÂÂ, p. 51 and âÂÂHome network with music playerâÂÂ, p. 21. To use wireless LAN, a wireless LAN must be available in the location and your device must be co nnected to the wireless LAN. Some places, like France, have re strictions on the use of wireless LAN. Check with your local authorities for more information. Features using wireless LAN, or allowing such featur es to run in the background while us ing other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. Your device supports the follo wing wireless LAN features: ⢠IEEE 802.11b/g sta ndard ⢠Operation at a frequency of 2.4 GHz ⢠Wired equivalent privacy (WEP) with keys up to 128 bits, Wi-Fi protected access (WPA), and 802.1x encryption methods. These functions can be used only if they are supported by the network. Wireless LAN connections To use wireless LAN, you must create an internet access point (IAP) in a wireless LAN . Use the access point for applications that need to connect to the internet . See âÂÂWireless LAN access pointsâÂÂ, p. 71. Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increa se the security of your wireless LAN connection. Using encryp tion reduces the risk of unaut horized ac ce ss to y our data. A wireless LAN connection is established when you cr eate a data connection using a wi reless LAN internet access point. The active wireless LAN connection ends when you close the last application usin g the connection. To end all the connections simultaneously, see âÂÂConnection managerâÂÂ, p. 75. You can use wireless LA N duri ng a voice call or when packet data is active. Yo u ca n only be connected to one wireless LAN a ccess point devi ce at a time, but severa l applications can use the sa me internet access point.
Connections 71 When the device is in the Offline profile, you can still use wireless LAN (if available). Re member to comply with any applicable safety requiremen ts when establishing and using a wireless LAN connection. Tip! To check the unique media access control (M AC) address that identifies your device, enter *#62209526# in the standby mode. WLAN wizard The WLAN wizard helps you to c onnect to a wireless LAN and manage your wireless LAN connections. The WLAN wizard s hows the status of your wir eless LAN connections in the active standby mode. To view the available options, scroll to the row showing the status, and press . If the search finds wire less LANs, and for example, WLAN network found is displayed, to auto mat ically create an IAP and start the web browser using this IAP, select the status, Start Web browsing , and the network. If you select a secured wireless LAN network, you are asked to enter the relevant passcodes. To connect to a hidden network, you must enter the correct network name (service set identifier, SSID). To create a new access point for a hidden WLAN, select New WLAN . After entering the required data, the connection is automatically tested. If you are connected to a wireless LAN, the IAP name is displayed. To start the web br owser using this IAP, select the status and Continue Web browsing . T o end the connection in the wireless LAN, select the status and Disconnect WLAN . If wireless LAN scanning is of f and you are not connected to any wireless LAN, WLAN scanning off is displayed. To set scanning o n and search for avail able wireless LANs, scroll to the row showing the status, and press . To start a search for available wireless LANs , select a status and Search for WLAN . To set wireless LAN scanning off, select a sta tus and WLAN scanning off . To access the WLAN wizard in the men u, press , and select To ols > WLAN wiz. . Wireless LAN access points To search for wireless LANs available within range, press , and selec t Tools > WLAN wiz. . Select Options and from the fol lowing: Filter WLAN networks âÂÂto filter out wireless LANs in the list of found networks. The selected networks are filtered out the next time the application searches for wireless LANs. Details âÂÂto view the details of a network shown in the list. If you selec t an active connection, t he connecti on detai ls are displayed.
Connections 72 Define access point âÂÂto create an IAP in a wireless LAN Edit access point âÂÂto edit the details of an existing IAP You can also use Conn. mgr. to create IAPs. Operating modes There are two operating modes in wireless LAN: infrastruc ture and ad hoc. The infrastructure operating mode allows two kinds of communication: wireless devices are connected to each other through a wireless LAN access point d evice, or wireless devices are connected to a wired LAN through a wireless LAN access p oint device. In the ad hoc operating mode, devices can send and receive data directly with each other. To create an internet access point for an ad hoc network, see âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 121. Bluetooth connectivity You can connect wirelessly to other compatible devices with Bluetooth connectivity. Compat ible devices may include mobile phones, computers, and enhancements such as head sets and ca r kits. You can use Bluetooth connectivity to send images, video clips, music and sound clips, and notes; connect wirelessly to your compatible PC (for example, to transfer files); con nect to a compatible printer to print images with Image print . See âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 49. The two devices need to be within 10 meters (33 feet) of each other, but the connecti on may be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant w ith Bluetooth Specification 2.0 supporting the following profiles: Advanced Audio Distribution Profile, Basic Imaging Profile, Dial-up Networking Profile, File Transfer Profile, Generic Object Exchange Profile, Gen eric Access Profile, Hands-Free Profile, Headset Profile, Object Push Profile, and Serial Port Profile. To ensure interope rability between other devices supporting Bluetooth connectivit y, use Nokia approved enhancements for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other de vices to determine their compatibility with this device. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth connectivity in some locations. Check with your local authorities or service provider. Features using Bluetooth conne ctivity, or allowing such features to run in the background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life.
Connections 73 When the device is locked, you cannot use Bluetooth connectivity. See âÂÂPhone and SIM cardâÂÂ, p. 114 for more information on locking the device. Settings Press , and select Tools > Bluetooth . When you open the application for the firs t time, you are asked to define a name for your device. Select from the following: Blueto oth âÂÂTo connect wirelessly to another compatible device, first set Bluetooth connectivity On , then establish a connection. To switch off Bl uetooth connectivity, select Off . My phone's vi sibility âÂÂTo allow your device to be found by other devices with Bluet ooth connectivity, select Shown to all . To set a time after which the visibility is set from shown to hidden, select Define period . To hide your device from other devices, select Hidden . My phone's name âÂÂEdit the name shown to other devices using Bluetooth wireless technology. Remote SIM mode âÂÂTo enable another device, such as a compatible car kit enhancemen t, to use the SIM card in your device to connect to the network, select On . For more information, see âÂÂRemote SIM modeâÂÂ, p. 75. Security tips When you are not using Bluetooth connectivity, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visibility > Hidden . In this way, you can better control who can find your device with Bluetooth connectivity, and connect to it. Do not pair with or accept connect ion requests from an unknown device. In this way, you can better protect your device from harmful conten t. Send data using Bluetooth connectivity Several Bluetooth conne ctions ca n be active at a time. For example, if you are connected to a compatible headse t, you can also transf er files to another compatible device at the same time. For Bluetooth connectivity indicators, see âÂÂEssential indicato rsâÂÂ, p. 72. Tip! To send text using Bluetooth connectivity, open Notes , write the text, and select Opti ons > Send > Via Bluetooth . 1 Open the application where the item you want to send is stored. For example, to send an image to another compatible device, open Gallery . 2 Select the item and Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . Devices with Blueto oth connectivity within range s tart to appear on the display.
Connections 74 Device icons: computer, phone, audio or video device, and other device. To interrupt the search, select Stop . 3 Select the device with which you want to connect. 4 If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds, and you are asked to enter a passco de. See â Pair dev icesâÂÂ, p. 74. 5 When the connection has been established, Sending data is shown. Tip! When searching for devices, some devices may show only the uniq ue address (device address). To find the unique address of your device, enter the code *#2820# in the standby mode. Pair devices To pair with compatible devices and view your paired devices, in the Bluetooth application main view, press . Before pairing, create your ow n passcode (1-16 digits), and agree with the owner of the other device to use the same code. Devices that do not have a user interface have a factory-set passcode. The passcode is used only once. 1 To pair with a device, select Options > New paired device . Devices with Bluetoot h connectivity within range start to appear on the display. 2 Select the device, and enter the passcode. The same passcode must be entered on the other device as well. Some audio enhancements connect automatically to your device after pairing. Otherwise, scroll to the enh ancement, and select Opt ions > Connect to audio device . Paired devices are indicated by in the device se arch. To set a device as authorized or unauthorized, scroll to a device, and select from the following options: Set as authorised âÂÂConnections between your device and this device can be made without your knowledge. No separate acceptance or author ization is needed. Use this status for your own devices, such as your compatible headset or PC, or devices that belong to someone you trust. indicates authorized devices in the paired devices view. Set as unauthorised âÂÂConnection requests from this device must be accept ed separately every time. To cancel a pairing, scroll to the device, and select Options > Delete . If you want to cancel all pairings , select Options > Delete all . Receive data using Bluetooth connectivity When you receive data throug h Bluetooth connectivity, a tone sounds, and you are asked if you wa nt to accept the message. If you accept, is shown , and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging . Messages
Connections 75 received through Bluetooth co nnectivity are indicated by . See âÂÂInboxâÂÂreceive messagesâÂÂ, p. 36. Remote SIM mode To use the remote SIM mode with a compatible car kit enhancement, set Bluetooth connectivity on, and enable the use of the remote SIM mode with your device. See âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p. 73. Before the mode can be act ivated, the two devices must be paired and th e pairing initiated from the other device. When pairing, use a 16-digit passcode, and set the other device as authorized. See âÂÂPair devicesâÂÂ, p. 74. Activate the remote SIM mode from the other device. When remote SIM mode is on in your device, Remote SIM is displayed in the standby mode. The connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indica tor ar ea, and you cannot use SIM card services or features requiring cellular network coverage. When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only use a compatible connected enha ncement, such as a car kit, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not make any calls, excep t to the emergency numbers programmed into your device, while in this mode. To make calls from your device, you mu st firs t leave the remote SIM mode. If the device has been locked, enter the lock code to unlock it first. To leave the remote SIM mode, press the power key, and select Exi t remote SIM mode . Connection manager Data connections Press , and select Tools > Connectivi ty > Conn. mgr. > Active data connections . In the active connectio ns view, you can see the open data co nnections: data calls ( ), high-speed data calls ( ), packet data connections ( ) , and wireless LAN connections ( ). Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary , depending on network features, roundin g off for billing, and so fo rth. To end a connection, select Options > Disconnect . To close all open connections, select Options > Disconnect all . To view the details of a connection, select Options > Details . The details shown depend on the connection type. Wireless LAN To search for wireless LANs available within range, press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Conn. m gr. > Available WLAN networks .
Connections 76 The available wireless LAN vi ew shows a list of wireless LANs within range, their network mode ( Infrastructure or Ad-hoc ), and signal strength indicator. is shown for networks with encryption, an d if your device has an active connection in the network. To view the details of a network, select Options > Details . To create an internet access point in a network, select Options > Define access point . USB Press , and select Tools > Conne ctivity > USB . To have the device ask the purpose of the USB cable connection each time the cable is connected, select Ask on connection > Yes . If Ask on connection is set to off or you want to ch ange the mode during an active connection, select USB mode and from the following: Media player âÂÂto synchronize music with Windows Media Player. See âÂÂMusic transfer with Windows Media PlayerâÂÂ, p. 22. PC Suite âÂÂto use Nokia PC applications such as Nokia Nseries PC Suite, Nokia Lifeblog, and Nokia Sof tware Up dater Data transfer â to transfer data between your device and a compatible PC Image print âÂÂto print images on a compatible printer. See âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 49. PC connections You can use your device with a varie ty of compatible PC connectivity and data communications app lications. With Nokia Nseries PC Suite you can, for e xample, transfer images between your device and a compatible PC. Always create the connection from the PC to synchronize with your device. Device manager Software updates You may view and update the current software ver sion of your device, and check the date of a possible previous update (n etwork s ervice). Press , and select Tools > Utilities > Device mgr. . To check whether softwar e u pdates are available, select Options > Check for updates . Select an internet access point when asked.
Connections 77 If an update is available, info rmation ab out it is displayed. Select Accept to accept to download the updat e or Cancel to cancel the download. The download may take several minutes. You can use your device during the down load. Downloading software updates may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Co ntact your servic e provider for information about data transmission charges. Make sure that the device ba ttery has enough power, or connect the charger before starting the update. Warning: If you install a software update, you cannot use the device, even to make emergency calls, until the installation is completed and the device is restarted. Be sure t o back up data before accepting installation of an update. When the download is complete, select Yes and then Accept to install the update, or No to install it later by using Options > Install update . The installation may take several minutes. The device updates the software and restarts. To complete the update, select OK . When asked, select an internet access point. Y our device sen ds the software updat e status to the server. To view the server profile settings used for softwar e updates, select Option s > Settings . Server profiles Press , selec t Tools > Utilities > Device mgr. , and press . You may receive server profiles and different configuration settings from your service pr oviders and company information management department. These configuration settings may in clude connection and other settings used by different a pplicatio ns in your device. Scroll to a server profile, and select Optio ns and from the following: Start configuration âÂÂto connect to the server and receive configuration settings for your device New server profil e âÂÂto create a server profile To delete a server profile, scroll to it, and press . Home network Your device is compatible with UPnP architecture. Using a wireless LAN acc ess point device or a wirele ss LAN router, you can create a home network and connect compa tible UPnP devices that support wire less LAN to the network, such as your Noki a N81, a compatible PC, a com patible printer, and a compatible sound system or TV, or a sound system or TV equipped with a compatible wireless multimedia receiver.
Connections 78 Using the wireless LAN function of the No kia N81 in a home network requires a working wireless LAN home connection setup and the other target home devices to be UPnP enabled and to be connected to the same home network. The home network uses the security settings of the wireless LAN connection. Use the home network feature in a wireless LAN infrastructure network with a wireless LAN access point device and encryption enabled. You can share medi a files saved i n Gallery with othe r compatible UPnP devices using the home network. To manage your Home network settings, press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Settings . You can also use the home network to view, play, copy, or print compatible media files from Gallery . See âÂÂView and share media filesâÂÂ, p. 79. Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increa se the security of your wireless LAN connection. Using encryption reduces the risk of unauthorized access to your data. Your device is connected to the home network only if you accept a connection request from another compatible device, or in Gallery , select the option to view, play, print, or copy media files on your Nokia N81. Important security information When you co nfigure your wir eless LAN ho me network, enable an encryption method on your access point device, then on the other devices you intend to connect to your home network. Refer to the documentation of the devices. Keep any passcodes secret and in a safe place separate from the devices. To view or change the settings of the wireless LAN in ternet access point in your device , see âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 121. If you use the ad hoc operating mode to create a home network with a compatible device, enable one of the encryption methods in WLAN security mode when you configure the internet access point. This step reduce s the risk of an unwanted party joinin g the ad hoc network. Your device notifies you if an other device attempts to connect to it and the home network. Do not accept connection requests from an unknown device. If you use wireless LAN in a network that does not have encryption, switch off sharing Nokia N81 files with other devices, or do not share any priv ate media files. To change sharing settings, see âÂÂHom e media settingsâ , p. 78. Home media settings To share media files with other compatible UPnP devi ces through wir eless LAN, you m ust create and configure your
Connections 79 wireless LAN home interne t access point, then configure the Home me dia application. See âÂÂWireless LANâÂÂ, p. 70 and the wireless LAN settings in âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 121. The options related to Home network in applications are not available before the Home network settings have been configured. When you access the home media application for the first time, the setup wizard opens, and helps y ou to define the home media settings for your device. To use the setup wizard later, in the home network main view, select Options > Run wizard , and follow the instructions on the display. To connect a compatible PC to the home network, on the PC, you must install the related software from the DVD-ROM supplied with your device. Configure settings To configure the home media application, select Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Settings and from the following: Home access point âÂÂSelec t Always ask if you want the device to as k for the home access point ev ery time you connect to the home network, Create new to define a new access point that is used automatically when you use Home media , or None . If your home network does not have wireless LAN security settings enabled, you get a security warning. You can continue, and switch the wireless LAN security on later; or ca ncel defining the access point, and first switch on the wireless LAN security. See Wireless LAN in âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 121. Device name â Enter a name for your device that is shown to the other compatible devices in the home network. Set sharing on and define content Select Tools > Connectivity > Home me dia > Share content . Content sharing âÂÂAllow or deny sharing media files with compatible devices. Do not set Content sharing on before you have configured all the other settings. If you set Content sharing on, the other UPnP compatible devices in the home network ca n view and copy your files you have selected for sharing in the Images & vid eo and Music folders. Images & video and Music âÂÂSelect media files for sharing with other devices, or vi ew the sharing status of Images & video and Music . To update the content of the folders, select Option s > Refresh content . View and share media files If Content sh aring is on in your device, the other UPnP compatible devices in the home network can view and copy the media files you have selected to share in Share content . If you do not want the other devices to access
Connections 80 your files, set Content sharing off. Even if Content sharing is off in your device, you can still view and copy the media files stored in another home network device if it is allowed by the other device. For more information, see âÂÂHome network with GalleryâÂÂ, p. 51 and âÂÂHome network with music playerâÂÂ, p. 21. Wireless Keyboard To set up a Nokia Wireless Keyboard or other compatible wireless keyboard supporting the Bluetooth Human Interface Devices (HID ) profile for use with your device, use the Wireless keyb d. application. The keyboard enables you to enter text in comfort, us ing the full QWER TY layout, for text messages, e-mail, and calendar entries. 1 Activate Bluetooth c onnectivity on your device. 2 Switch on the keyboard. 3 Press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Wireless keybd. . 4 Select Optio ns > Find keyboard to start searching for devices with Bluetooth connectivity. 5 Select the keyboard from th e list, and press to start the connection. 6 To pair the keyboard with yo ur device , enter a passcode of your choice (1 to 9 digits) o n the device and the same passcode on your keyboard. To enter the digits of the passcode, you may need to press the Fn key first. 7 If you are asked for a keyboard layout, select it fro m a list on your device. 8 When the name of the keyboard appears, its status changes to Keyboard connected , and the green indicator of your keyboard blinks slowly; the keyboard is ready for use. For details on the operation and maintenance of your keyboard, see its user guide. Synchronization Sync enables you to synchronize your notes, calendar, text messages, or contacts with v arious compatible applications on a compatible computer or on the internet. You may receive synchronization settings in a special message. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 37. In the Sync main view, you can see the different synchronization profiles. A sy nchronization profile contains the necessary settings to synchronize data in your device with a remote database on a server or compatible device. 1 Press , and select Tools > Sync .
Connections 81 2 Select a synchronization profile and Options > Synchronise . To cancel synchronization before it finishes, select Cancel .
Personalize your device 82 Personalize your device To personalize your device, select from the following: ⢠To use the standby display for fast access to your most frequently used applications, see âÂÂActive standbyâÂÂ, p. 84. ⢠To change the standby mode background image, see âÂÂChange the look of your deviceâÂÂ, p. 84. ⢠To customize the ringing tones, see âÂÂProfilesâÂÂset tonesâÂÂ, p. 82 and âÂÂAdd ringing tones for contactsâÂÂ, p. 33. ⢠To change the shortcuts assigned for the different presses of the scroll key and left and right selection keys in the standby mode, see âÂÂStandby modeâÂÂ, p. 113. ⢠To change the clock shown in the standby mode, press , and select Applications > Cl ock > Options > Settings > Clock type > An alogue or Digital . ⢠To change the welcome note to an image or animation, press , and sel ect T ools > Se ttings > General > Personalisation > Display > Welcome note / logo . ⢠To change the look of the menu display, in the main menu, select Options > Change Menu view . ⢠To rearrange the main menu, in the main menu, select Options > Move , M ove to folder , or New fo lder . You can move less used applications into folders and place applications that yo u use more often into the main menu. ⢠To arrange the tiles in the multimedia menu, press , and select Options > Arrange tiles . ProfilesâÂÂset tones To set and customize the ringing tones, message alert tones, and other tones for different events, environments, or caller groups, press , and select Tools > Profiles . To change the profile, select Tools > Profiles , a profile, and Options > Activate . You can also change the profile by pressing in the standby mode. Scroll to the profil e you want to activate, and select OK . Tip! To switch between th e ge neral and silent profiles, press an d hold . To modify a profile, press , and select Tools > Profiles . Scroll to the profile, and select Options > Personalise . Scroll to the setting you want to change, and press to open the choices. Tones stored on the mass memory are indicated with . When you choose a tone from a list, the Download sounds link (network service) opens a list of bookmarks. You can select a bookmark and start connection to a web page to download tones.
Personalize your device 83 If you want the callerâÂÂs name to be spoken w hen your device rings, select Options > Perso nalise , and set Say caller's name to On . The callerâÂÂs name must be saved in Contacts . To create a new profile, select Options > Create new . Offline profile The Offline profile lets you use the device without connecting to the wireless netw ork. When you activate the Offline profile, the connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator area. All wireless RF signals to and from the device are prevente d. If you try to send messages, they are placed in the outbox to be sent later. When the Offline profile is active, you can us e your device without a (U)SIM card. Important : In the offline profile you cannot make or receive any ca lls, or use other features that require cellular network coverage. Cal ls may still be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To make calls, you must first activa te the phone function by changing profiles. If the devi ce has been locked, enter the lock code. When you have activated the Offline profile, you can still use the wireless LAN, for example, to r ead your e-mail or browse on the internet. Remember to comply with any applicable safety requiremen ts when establishing and using a wireless LAN connection. See âÂÂWireless LANâÂÂ, p. 70. You can also use Bluetooth connectivity while in the Offline profile. See âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 72. To leave the Offline profile, press the power key, and select another profile. The device re-enables wireless transmissions (providing there is sufficient signal strength). 3-D tones Press , and select Tools > Utilities > 3-D tones . With 3- D tones you can enable three-dimensional sound effects for ringing tones. Not all ringing tones suppor t 3-D effects. To enable the 3-D effects, select 3-D ring ing tone effects > On . To change the 3âÂÂD effect that is applied to the ri nging tone, sel ect Sound trajectory and the desired effect. To modify the ef fect, sele ct from the follow ing settings: Trajectory speed âÂÂScroll left or right to adjust the speed at which sound moves from one direction to another. This setting is not available for all ringing tones . Reverberatio n âÂÂSelect the type of echo.
Personalize your device 84 Doppler effect âÂÂSelect On to have the ringing tone sound higher when you are closer to your device, and lower when you are farther away. When you get clos er to the devi ce, the ringing tone seems to become higher, and lower when you move away from it. The Doppler effect is not available for all sound trajectories. To listen to the ringing tone with the 3âÂÂD effect, select Options > Play tone . If you enable the 3-D tones but do not select any 3-D effect, stereo widening is applied to the r inging tone. To adjust the ringing tone volume, select Tools > Profiles > Options > Personalise > Ringing volume . Change the look of your device To change the look of the di splay, such as the wallpaper and icons, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Themes . To change the theme that is us ed for all the applications in your device, select Themes > Ge neral . To preview a theme before activating it, select Options > Preview . To activate the theme, select Options > Set . The active theme is indicated by . The themes on the mass memory are indicated by . To change the layout of the main menu, select Themes > Menu view . To open a browser connection and download more themes, in General or Menu view , select Download themes (network service). Important: Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. To edit the wallpaper, select Them es > Wallpaper to change the background image on the display for the activ e standby mode. Active standby The active standby display shows status indicators, widgets, the now playing view, and search. To switch the active standby on or off, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Standby mode > Active standby .
Personalize your device 85 Scroll to an application or event, and press . The standard scroll ke y shortcuts available in the standby mode cannot be used when active standby is on. To change the default applicationsâ shortcuts, pres s , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Standby mode > Active standby apps. . Some shortcuts may be fixed , and you cannot change them.
Make calls 86 Make calls Voice calls 1 In the standby mode, enter the phone number, including the area code. To remove a number, press . For international calls, press twice fo r the character (replaces th e international access code), and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. 2 Press the call key to call the number. 3 Press the end key to end the call (or to can cel the call attempt). Pressing the end ke y always ends a call, even if another a pplication is active. To adjust the volume during a call, use the volume key on the side of your device. You ca n also use the scroll key. If you have set the volume to Mute , select Unmute first. To make a ca ll from Contact s , press , and select Contacts . Scroll to the desired name, or enter the first letters of the name to the search field. Matching contac ts are listed. To call, press the call key. You must copy the contacts from your SIM card to Contacts before you can make a ca ll from Contact s. See âÂÂCopy contactsâÂÂ, p. 32. To call a recently dialed numb er in the standby mode, press the call key. Scroll to the number, and press the call key. To send an image or a video cli p in a multimedia message to the other participant of the call, select Options > Send MMS (in UMTS networ ks only). You can edit the message and change the recipient before sending. Press the call key to send the file to a compatible device (network service). To send DTMF tone strings (for example, a password), select Options > Send DTMF . Enter the DTM F string or search for it in Contacts . To enter a wait character ( w ) or a pause character ( p ), press repeatedl y. Select OK to send the tone. You can add DTMF ton es to the Phone number or DTMF fields in a contact card. To put an active voice call on hold while answering another incoming call, select Options > Hold . To switch between the active and the held c all, select Optio ns > Swap . To connect the active and held calls and drop yourself from the line, sele ct Options > Tran sfer . Tip! When you have only one active voice c all, to put the call on hold, press the ca ll key. To activate the call, press the call key again. During an active call, to ro ute the sound from the handset to the loudspeaker, select Options > Activate
Make calls 87 loudspea ker . If you have attached a compatible headset with Bluetooth connectivity, to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Activ ate handsfree . To switch back to the handset, select Options > Act ivate handset . Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To end an active call and replace it by answering the waiting call, select Options > Replace . If you have several calls acti ve, to end them all, select Options > End all calls . Many of the options that you can use during a voice call are network services. For information on conference calls and voice dialling, see the extended user guide at www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia web site. Internet calls With the internet call service (network service), you can make and receive calls over the internet. To make or receive an internet call, your device must be connected to an internet call service. Press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Internet tel. . To connect to an i nternet call ser vice, your devic e must be in the coverage of a connection network, such a s a wireless LAN access point. Important: Always enable one of th e available encryption methods to increa se the security of your wireless LAN connection. Us ing encryption reduces the risk of unauthorized access to your data . Some places, like France, have restrictions on the use of wireless LAN. Check with your local authorities for more information. Available access points vary according to the service provid er. To connect to the internet cal l service, select an available connection network from the list, and press . The saved networks, which are marked with , are shown first on the list. To stop making the connection, select Cancel . After you have successfully connected to a service, you can save the used wireless LAN network as a known acc ess point. Select Options and from the fol lowing: Connect to service âÂÂt o establish a connection to a service, when there is an internet call service and suitable connection network available. Disconnect from s erv. âÂÂto end to the connection to the internet call service.
Make calls 88 Change service âÂÂto select the internet call service for outgoing calls, if the device is connected to more than one service. This option is shown only if there is more than one configured service available. Configure service âÂÂto configure new services. This option is shown only if there ar e services that have not been configured. Save network âÂÂto save the network you are currently connected to. The previously saved networks are marked with on the list of networks . This option is shown only if you are connected to an unsa ved wireless LAN network. Use hidden network âÂÂto connect to an internet call service using a hidden wireless LAN network. Refresh âÂÂto manually refresh the list of connectio n networks. Use this option if your wireless LAN network is not shown on the list. The list is also refreshed automatically every 15 seconds. Settings âÂÂto change the settings. Exit âÂÂto close the application. The available options may vary. Your device can be connected only to one wireless LAN access point at a time. If you use two or more internet call services, which use the same ac cess point, your device may be connected to multiple services at the same time. The service used for outgoing inte rnet calls is shown where the connection networks are listed; to c hange it, select Change service . When you are connected to an internet call serv ice, is shown in the standby mode. You may have a shortcut for In ternet tel. in the active standby, or you can add it there. By using t he shortcut, you can register manually, if an in ternet call service and access point are available. If you are already connected to an internet call service, the device asks if you want to disconnect from the service. To make an internet call in the standby mode, enter the phone number or internet address and press the call key. To switch between the number and letter mode, press and hold #. To end the call, press th e end key. You can also make an internet call from Contact s and Log . To make a call from Contacts , press and select Contacts , scroll to the des ired contac t, and sel ect Options > Internet call . To make a call from Log , press and select Tools > Log > Recent calls and Missed calls , Received calls or Dialled numbe rs , scroll to the desired contact and select Option s > Internet call . If Internet call is set as the preferred call type, and your device is connected to an internet call service, calls are made as internet calls as default. Your device supports voice ca lls over the internet (net calls). Your device attempts emergency calls primarily over
Make calls 89 cellular networks. If an emergency call using cellular networks is not successful, your device attempts an emergency call through your internet call provider. Due to the established nature of ce llular telephony, you should use cellular networks for emerge ncy calls, if possible. If yo u have cellular network coverage av ailable, make sure that your cellular phone is switched on and ready to make calls before you attempt an emergency call. The capability for an emergency call using intern et telephony depends on the availability of a WLA N netw ork and your internet call provider's implementation of emergency call capabilities. Contact your internet call prov ider to check the internet telephony emergency call capabili ty. Settings To see the settings for the intern et call services, press , and select Tools > Co nnectiv ity > Internet tel. > Settings . To view or choose the preferred call type for outgoing calls, select Options > Change > Default call t ype > Cellular or Interne t call . To open the service settings view of the selected ser vice, select Options > Open . The available options may vary. Service settings Press and selec t Tools > Connectivity > Internet tel. > Options > Settin gs > Se ttings: . To see the settings of the service, select Login type and from the following: Automatic âÂÂTo automatically log in to the internet call service. When a known network is found, the device connects to the internet call service automatically. Manual âÂÂTo manually log in to the internet call service. If you use the automatic login type for wireless LAN networks, the device period ic ally scans for wireless LAN networks, which increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. Select Saved conn . networks to see the connection networks that are recognized by the internet call service. These networks are used for automatic login and are marked with on the list of connection networks. Select Edit service settings to open service-spec ific settings. This option is only av ailable if a service-spec ific software plug-in has been installed in the device. Saved connection networks To view or remove the connection networks you have saved for an internet call service, press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Internet tel . > Settings > Settings: > Saved conn. networ ks . > Options > Open .
Make calls 90 Select Options > Remove to remove a connection network from the service. Voice and video mailboxes To call your voic e or video mailbox (network servi ces, video mailbox available only in the UMTS network), press and hold in the standby mode, and select Voice mailbox or Vide o mailbox . See also âÂÂCall divertâÂÂ, p. 119, and âÂÂVideo callsâÂÂ, p. 91. To change the phone number of your voice or video mailbox, press , and select Tools > Utilities > Call mailbox , a mailbox, and Options > Change number . Enter the number (obtained from your network service provider), and select OK . Make a conference call 1 Make a call to the first participant. 2 To make a call to another participant, select Optio ns > New call . The first call is automatically put on hold. 3 When the new call is answ ered, to join the first participant in the conference call, select Options > Conference . To add a new person to the call, repeat step 2, and select Options > Conference > Add to conference . Your device supports conf erence c alls between a maximum of six participan ts, including yourself. To have a private conver sation with one of the participants, select Options > Conference > Private . Select a participant and Private . The conference call is put on hold on your device . The other participants can still continue the conference call. After you finish the private conversation, select Options > Add to conference to return to the conference call. To drop a part icipant , select Options > Conferen ce > Drop participant , scroll to the participant, and select Drop . 4 To end the active conferen ce call, press the end key. Speed dial a phone number To activat e speed dia ling, p ress , and select Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Speed dialling > On . To assign a phone number to one of the speed dialing keys ( â ), press , and select Tools > Utilities > Speed dial . Scroll to the key to which you want to assign the phone number, and select Options > Assign . is reserved for the voice or video mailbox. To call in the standby mode, press the speed dial key and the send key. Voice dialing Your device supports enhanced voice commands. Enhanced voice commands are not dependent on the
Make calls 91 speakerâÂÂs voice, so the user does not record voice tags in advance. Instead, the device creates a voice tag for the entries in contacts, and compar es the spoken voice tag to it. The voice recognition in the device adapts to the main userâÂÂs voice to recognize the voice comman ds better. The voice tag for a contact is th e name or nickname that is saved on the contact card. To l isten to th e synthesized voice tag, open a contact ca rd, and select Options > Play voice tag . Make a call with a voice tag Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumstances. When you use vo ice dialing, th e loudspeaker is in use. H old the device at a short distan ce away when you say the v oice tag. 1 To start voice dialing, in the standby mode, press and hold the right selection key. If a compatible headset with the headset key is a ttached, press and hold the headset key to s tart voice dialing. 2 A short to ne is play ed, and Speak now is dis played. Say clearly the name or nickname that is saved on the contact card. 3 The device plays a synthesized voice tag for the recognized contact in the selected device language, and displays the name and number. After a timeout of 2.5 seconds, the device dials the number. If the recognized contact was not correct, s elect Next to view a list of other matches or Quit to cancel voice dialin g. If several numbers are saved under the name, the device selects the default number if it has been set. Otherwise the device selects the fi rst availa ble number of the following: Mobile , Mobile (home) , Mobile (business) , Telephone , Tel. (home) , and Te l. (business) . Video calls When you make a video call (network service), yo u can see a real-time, two-way video between you and the recipient of the call. The live video image, or video image captured by the camera in your device is shown to the video call recipient. T o b e a b l e t o m a k e a v i d e o c a l l , y o u m u s t h a v e a U S I M c a r d and be in the coverage of a UM TS network. For av ailability of and subscription to video call services, contact your network service provider. A video call can only be made between two parties. The video call can be made to a compatible mobile device or an ISDN client. Video calls cannot be made while another voice, video, or data call is active.
Make calls 92 Icons: You are not receiving video (the recipient is not sending video or the network is not transmitt ing it). You have denied video sending from your device. Even if you denied video sending during a video call, the call is still charged as a video call. Check the pricing with your service provider. 1 To start a video call, enter the phone number in the standby mode, or select Contacts and a contact. 2 Select Options > Call > Video call . The secondary camera on the front is used by default for video calls. Starting a video call may take a while. Waiting for video image is sho wn. If the call is not successful (for example, video calls are not supported by the network, or the receiving device is not compatible ), you are aske d if yo u want to try a normal call or send a text or multimedia message instead. The video call is active when you see two video images, and hear the sound through the loudspeaker. The call recipient may deny video sending ( ), in which case you only hear the sound and may see a still image or a grey background graphic. To change between showing video or hearing only sound, select Op tions > Enable or Disable > Sending video , Sending audio , or Sending aud. & video . To zoom in or out your own image, press or . To switch the places of the sent video images on the display, select Options > Change image order . To route the audio to a compatible headset with Bluetooth connectivity attached to your device, select Options > Activate hand sfree . To route the audio back to the loudspeake r of your dev ice, selec t Options > A ctivate handset . To adjust the volume during a video call, use the volume key on the side of the device. To use the main camera for sending video, se lect Options > Use main camera . To switch back to the secondary camera, select Options > Use secondary camera . To end the video call, press the end key. Video sharing Use Video sha ring ( n e t w o r k s er v i c e ) t o se n d l i v e v id e o o r a video clip from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. The loudspeaker is acti ve when you activate Video sharing . If you do not want to use the louds peaker for the voice call while you shar e video, you can also use a compatible headset.
Make calls 93 Video sharing requirements Because Video sharing requires a UMTS connection, your ability to use Video sharing depends on the UMTS network availability. Contact you r service provider for mo re information on the service an d network availability, and fees associated with using this service. To use Video sharing you must do the following: ⢠Ensure that your device is set up for person-to-p erson connections. See âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p. 93. ⢠Ensure you have an active UMTS connection and are within UMTS networ k coverage . See âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p. 93. If you start the sharing session while you are within UMTS network coverage and a handover to GSM occurs, the sharing session is discontinued, but your voice call continues. You cannot start Video sharing if you are not within UMTS network coverage. ⢠Ensure that both the sender and recipient are registered to the UMTS netw ork. If you invite someone to a sharing session and the recipientâÂÂs device is not within UMTS network cove rage, or does not have Video sharing installed o r person-to-person connections set up, the recipient does not know that you are sending an invitation. You receive an error message that the recipient cannot accept the invitation. Settings Person-to-person connection settings A person-to-person connection is also known as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) connection. The SIP profile settings must be configured in your device before you can use Video sharing . Ask your service provider for the SIP profile settings, and save them in y our device. Your service provider may send you the settings over the air or give you a list of the needed parameters. If you know a recipientâÂÂs SIP address, you can enter it on the personâÂÂs contact card. Press , select Contacts , and open the con tact card (or sta rt a new card for that person). Select Options > Add detail > SIP or Share view . Enter the SIP address in the format username@domainname (you can use an IP address instead of a domain name). If you do not kn ow a SIP address for the contact, you can also use the phone number of the recipient includ ing the country code, for example 358, to share video (if supported by the network service provider). UMTS connection settings To set up your UMTS connection, do the following: ⢠Contact your service provider to establish an agreement for you to use the UMTS network.
Make calls 94 ⢠Ensure that your UMTS access point connection settings are configured properly. For help, see âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 120. Share live video or video clip 1 When a voice call is act ive, select Options > Share video > Live video , and open the lens cover in the back. To share a video clip, select Options > Share video > Recorded clip . A list of video c lips saved in the device opens. Select a clip you want to share. To preview the clip, select Options > Play . 2 If you share live video, your device sends the invitation to the SIP address you have added to the contact card of the recipient. If you share a video clip, select Options > Invite . You may need to convert the video clip into a suitable format to be able to sh are it. Clip must be converted for sharing. Conti nue? is displayed. Select OK . If the contact information of the recipient is saved in Contacts , and the cont act has se veral SIP ad dresses or phone numbers including the country code, select the desired address or number. If the SIP address or phone number of the recipient is no t available, enter the SIP address or the phone number of the recipient including the country code, and select OK to send the invitation. 3 Sharing begins automatica lly when the recipient accepts the invitation. 4 Select Pause to pause the sharing session. Select Continue to resume sharing. To fast forward or rewind the video clip, press or . To play the clip again, select Play . 5 To end the sharing sessi on, select Stop . To end the voice call, press the end key. Vide o sharing also ends if the active voice call ends. To save the live video you shared, selec t Save to accept the Save shared video clip? query. T he shared video is saved in the Images & videos folder in Gal lery . If you access other applications while you are shar ing a video cli p, the shari ng is paused . To return to th e video sharing view and continue shar ing, in the active standby mode, select Options > Continue . See âÂÂActive standbyâÂÂ, p. 84. Accept an invitation When someone sends you a shar e invitation, an invitation message is displayed showing the senderâÂÂs name or SIP address. If your device is not set to Silent , it rings when you receive an invitation. If someone sends you a share invitation and you ar e not within UMTS network coverage, you will not know that you received an invitation. When you receive an invitation , select from the following:
Make calls 95 Accept âÂÂto activate the sharing session. Reject âÂÂto decline the invitation. The sender receives a message that you rejected th e invitation. You can also press the end key to decline the sharing session and disconnect the voice call. When you are receiving a video clip, to mute the sound of the clip, select Mute . To end video sharing, select Stop . Video sharing also ends if the active voice call ends. Answer or decline a call To answer the call, press the call key, or open the slide. To mute the ringing tone when a call comes in, select Silence . If you do not want to answer a call, press the end key. If you have activated the Call diver t > If busy function to divert calls, declining an incoming call also diverts the call. See âÂÂCall divertâÂÂ, p. 119. When you select Reject to reject an i ncoming call, yo u can send a text message informing the caller that you cannot answer the call. Select Options > Send text message . To set up this option and write a standard text message, see âÂÂCallâÂÂ, p. 118. Answer or reject a video call When a vide o call arrives, is dis played. Press the call key to answer th e video call. Al low video image to be sent to call er? is displayed. To start sending a live video image, select Yes . If you do not activat e the video call, video sending is not activated, and you only hear th e sound of the caller. A grey screen replaces the video image. To replace the grey screen with a still image captured by the camera in your device, see âÂÂCallâÂÂ, Image in video call , p. 118. To end the video call, press the end key. Call waiting You can answer a call while you have another call in progress if you have activated Call waiting in Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Call waitin g (network service). To answer the waiting call, press the call key. The first call is put on hold. To switch between th e two calls, select Swap . To connect an incoming call or a call on hold with an active call and to disconnect yourself from the calls, select Options > Transfer . To end the active call, press the end key. To end both calls, select Options > End all c alls .
Make calls 96 Log To monitor the phone numbers of missed, received, and dialed voice calls, press , and select Tools > Log > Recent calls . The device regi sters missed and received calls only if the ne twork supports these functions, the device is switched on, and within the network service area. To clear all recent call lists, select Optio ns > Clear recent calls in the recent calls main view. To clear one of the c all registers, open the register yo u want to erase, and select Options > Clear list . To clear an individual event, open a register, scroll to the event, and press . Call duration To monitor the approximate duration of your incoming and outgoing calls, press , and select Tools > Log > Call duration . Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. To clear call duration timers, select Options > Clea r timers . For this you need the lock code. See âÂÂPhone and SIM cardâÂÂ, p. 114. Packet data To check the amount of data sent and received during packet data connections, press , and select Tools > Log > Packet data . For example, you may be charged for your packet data connections by the amount of data sent and received. Monitor all communication events Icons in Log are as follows: Incoming Outgoing Missed communication events To monitor all voice calls, text messages, or data and wireless LAN connections registered by the device, press , select Tools > Lo g , and press to open the general log. Subevents, such as a text messa ge sent in more than one part and packet data conne ctions, are logged as one communication event. Connections to your ma ilbox, multimedia messaging center, or web pages are shown as packet data connections. To add an unknown phone number from Log to your contacts, select Options > Save to Contacts . To filter the log, select Options > Filter and a filter.
Make calls 97 To erase the contents of the log, recent calls register, and messaging delivery reports permanently, select Options > Clear l og . Select Yes to confirm. To remove a single event from the log, press . To set the log duration, select Options > Settings > Log duration . If you select No log, all the log contents, recent calls register, and messaging delivery reports are permanently deleted. Tip! In the details view, you can copy a phone number to the clipboard, and paste it to a text message, for example. Select Options > Copy numb er . To view from the packet d ata counter ho w much data i s transferred and how long a cer tain packet data conn ection lasts, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event indicated by Pack. , and select Options > Vi ew details .
Applications 98 Applications Clock Press , and select Applicat ions > Clock . To view your active and inactive alarms, pr ess . To set a new quick alarm, select Opt ions > New quick alarm . When an alarm is active, is shown. Quick alarms are set for the next 24 hours and they cannot be repeated. To turn off the sou nding alarm, selec t Stop . To stop the alarm for 5 minutes, select Snooze . If the alarm time is reached while the device is switched off, the device swi tches itself on and starts soundi ng the alarm tone. If you select Stop , the device asks whether you want to activate the device for calls. Select No to switch off the device or Yes to make a nd receive calls. Do not select Yes when wire less phone use may cause interference or danger. To cancel the next alarm, select Application s > Clock > Options > Remove alarm . To set a new alarm, selec t Application s > Clock , press , and select Options > New alarm . Def ine th e repetition, if needed. To change clock settings, select Applications > Clock > Options > Sett ings . Set time and date, define time and date formats, clock type, or the alarm tone. In Workdays select weekdays for repetition options. To allow the mobile phone ne twork to update the time, date, and time zone information to your device (network service), select Applications > Clock > Options > Settings > Network operator time > Auto-update . World clock To open the world clock vi ew, select Clock , and press twice. In the world clock view, you can view the time in different cities. To add cities to the list, select Options > Add city . You can add a maximum of 15 cities to the list. To set your current city, scroll to a city, and select Options > Set as current city . The city is displayed in the clock main view, and the time in your device is changed according to the city selected. Check that the time is correct and matches your time zone. Calculator Press , and select Applicati ons > Calc ulator .
Applications 99 Note: This calculator has limited accuracy and is designed for simple calculations. Notes To write notes in .txt format, press , and select Applicatio ns > Notes . Application manager Press , and select Applications > App. mgr. . You can install two types of applicat ions and software to your device: ⢠J2ME TM applications based on Java TM technology with the extension .jad or .jar ( ). ⢠Other applications and software suitable for the Symbian operating system ( ) . The installation files have the .sis extension. Only install software specifically designed for your Nokia N81. Software providers will often refer to the official model number of this product: the Nokia N81-1. Installa tion files may be t ransf erred to your device fr om a compatible computer, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using Bluetoot h connectivity. You can use Nokia Application Installer in Nokia Nseries PC Suite to install an application to your device. Install applications and software i ndicates a .sis application, a Java application, that the application is not fu lly installed, and that the application is installed in the mass memory. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trus ted so urces, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Verified TM testing . Before installation, note the foll owing: ⢠To view the application ty pe, version number, and the supplier or manufacturer of the appli cation, select Options > View details . To display the security cert ificate details of the application, in Cer tificates , select View details . See âÂÂCertificate managementâÂÂ, p. 116. ⢠If you install a file that cont ains an update or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original application if you ha ve the original installation file or a full back-up copy of the removed software package. To restore the original application, remove the application, and install the ap plication again from the original installation fi le or the back-up copy. ⢠The .jar file is required for insta lling Java appl ications. If it is missing, the device may ask you to download it. If there is no access poi nt defined for the applicati on, you are asked to select one. When you are downloading
Applications 100 the .jar file, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the server. You obtain these from the supplier or manufactur er of the application. 1 To locate an installation file, press , and select Applications > App. mgr. . Alternatively, search the device memory or the mass memory in File mgr. , or open a message in Messaging > Inbox that contains an installation file. 2 In App. mgr. , select Options > Install . In other applications, scroll to the in stallation file, and press to start the installation. During installation, the device shows information about the progress of the installation. If you are installing an application without a digital signature or certification, the device displays a warning. Continue installation only if you ar e sure of the origin and contents of the application. To start an installed application, lo cate it in the menu, and press . If the application does not have a default folder defined, it is installed in the Applications folder. To see which softwa re packages are installed or removed and when, select Options > View log . Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one application with antivirus functionali ty could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functioning. After you install applications to mass memory, installation files (.sis) remain in the de vice memory. The files may use large amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To maintain sufficient memory, use Nokia Nseries PC Suite to back up installation files to a compatible PC, then use the file manager to remove the installation files from the device memory. Se e âÂÂFile managerâÂÂ, p. 68. If the . sis file is a message attachment, delete the message from the Messaging inbox. Remove applications and software Scroll to a software package, and select Options > Remove . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove software, you can only reinstall it if you have the original software pack age or a full backup of the removed software package. If you remove a soft ware package, you may no longer be able to open documents created with that so ftware. If another software package depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Settings Select Options > Settings and from the following:
Applications 101 Software installat ion âÂÂSelect whether Symbian software that has no verified digital signature can be installed. Online certificate check âÂÂSelect to check the online certificates before in stalling an application. Default web address âÂÂSet the default address used when checking online certifica tes. Some Java applications may re quire a message to be sent or a network connection to a specific access point for downloading extra data or components. In the App. mgr. main view, scroll to an application, and select Options > Open to change settings related to that spec ific application. Calendar Press , and select Applications > Calendar . To add a new calendar entry, scroll to the desired date, select Options > New entry and one of the following: 1 Meeting âÂÂto remind you of an appointment that has a specific date and time Memo âÂÂto write a general entry for a day Anniversary âÂÂto remind you of birthdays or special dates (en tries are repeated every year) To-do âÂÂto remind you of a task that needs doing by a specific date 2 Fill in the fields. To set an alarm, select Alarm > On , and enter the Alarm ti me and Alarm date . To add a description for an appointment, select Options > Add description . 3 To save the entry, select Done . Shortcut: In the day, week, or month calendar view, press any key ( â ). An appointment entry opens, and the characters yo u enter are added to Subjec t . In the to-do view, a to-do note entry opens. When the calendar a larms for a note, select Silence to turn off the calendar a larm tone. Th e r eminder text stays on the screen. To end the calendar alarm, select Stop . To set the alarm to snooze, select Snooze . You can synchronize your calendar with a compatible PC using Nokia Nseries PC Suite. When creating a calendar entry, set the desired Synchronisation option.
Applications 102 Calendar views Select Options > Settings to change the starting day of the week or the view that is shown when you open the calendar. To go to a certain date, select Options > Go to date . To jump to toda y, press . To switch between the month view, week view, day view, and to-do view, press . To send a calendar note to a compatible device, select Options > Send . If the other device is not compatible with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), the ti me information of received calendar entr ies may not be displayed correctly . To modify the calendar, select Options > Settings > Calendar alarm tone , Default view , Week star ts on , and Week view title . Manage your calendar entries To delete more than one event at a time, go to the month view, and select Optio ns > Delete entry > Befo re date or All entries . To mark a task as completed, scroll to it in the to-do view, and select Options > Mark as done . Recorder To record voice memos, press , and select Applications > Media > Re corder . To record a telephone conversation, open Recorder during a voice call. Both parties hear a tone every 5 seconds during r ecording. RealPlayer Press , and select Applications > Media > RealPlayer . With RealPlayer , you can stream media files over the ai r without saving them to the devi ce first or play video clips saved in the device. RealPlayer supports files with extensions such as .3gp, .mp4, or .rm. However, RealPlayer does not necessarily support all file formats or all the variations of file formats. In the landscape view, use th e media keys to control the player. Play video clips 1 To play a saved media file, select Options > Open and from the following: Most recent clips âÂÂto play one of the last six files played in RealPlayer . Saved clip âÂÂto play a file saved in Gallery 2 Scroll to a file, and press the scroll key to play the file.
Applications 103 To adjust the volume, use the volume key. Stream content over the air Many service providers require you to use an internet access point (IAP) for your default access point. Other service providers allow you to use a WAP access point. In RealPlayer , you can only open an rtsp:// URL address. However, RealPlayer will play a .ram file if you open an http link to it in Browser. To stream content over the air, select a streaming link saved in Gallery , on a web page, or re ceived in a text message or multimedia message. Before live content begins streaming, your device connects to the site and starts loading the content. Only the link to the content is sav ed in your device. RealPlayer settings You may receive RealPlayer settings in a special message from the service provider. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 37. For more information, contact your service provider. Select Options > Settings and from the following: Video âÂÂto adjust the contrast of the video or have RealPlayer automatic ally repeat video clips after they finish play ing. Streaming âÂÂContact your service pr ovider for the correct settings. Adobe Flash Player To view, play, and interact with compatible flash files made for mobile devices, press , and select Applications > Media > Flash Player . Scroll to a flash file, and press . IMâÂÂinstant messaging Press , and select Applications > Media > IM . Instant messaging (network service) allows y ou to converse with other people using instant messages and join discussion forums (IM groups) with specific topics. Various service providers mainta in IM servers that you ca n log in to after you register to an IM service. Service providers may differ in their support of features. Select Conversati ons to start or continue a conversation with an IM user; IM contacts to create, edit, or view the online status of your IM contacts; IM groups to start or continue a group conversation with multiple IM users; or Recorded chats to view a previous instant messaging session that you saved.
Applications 104 Receive IM settings You must save the settings to access the service that you want to use. You may receive the settings in a special text message from the network ope rator or service provider that offers the IM service. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 37. You can also enter the settings manually. See âÂÂChat server settingsâÂÂ, p. 106. Connect to an IM server 1 To connect to the IM server in use, open IM , and se lect Options > Log in . To change the I M server in use and save new IM servers, see âÂÂChat server settingsâÂÂ, p. 106. 2 Enter your user ID and pa ssword, and press to log in. You obtain the user ID and password for the IM server from your service provider. 3 To log out, select Options > Log out . Modify your IM settings Select Options > Settings > Preference s and from the following: Use screen nam e (shown only if IM groups are supported by the server)âÂÂTo enter a nickname, select Yes . Show my av ailabilit y âÂÂTo allow others to see if you are online, select To everyone . Allow messages from âÂÂTo allow messages from all, select All . Allow invitations f rom âÂÂTo allow invitations only from your IM contacts, select IM contacts only . IM invitations are sent by IM contac ts who want you to join th eir groups. Sort IM contacts âÂÂSelect how your IM conta cts are sorted: Alphabetically or By online status . Availability reloading âÂÂTo select how to update information about whet her your IM contacts are online or offline, select Automatic or Manual . Offline contacts âÂÂSelect whether I M contacts with an offline status are shown in the IM contacts lis t. Own message colour âÂÂSelect the color of the instant messages you send. Received msg colour âÂÂSelect the color of th e instant messages you receive. IM alert tone âÂÂChange the tone played when you receive a new instant message. Search for IM groups and users To search for groups, in the IM groups view, select Options > Search . You can search by Gro up name , Topic , and Members (user ID).
Applications 105 To search f or users, in the IM contacts view, selec t Options > New IM contact > Search from server . You can search by User's nam e , User ID, Phone n umber , and E-mail address . Join IM groups The I M groups view shows a list of the IM groups that you have saved or are currently joined to. To join a saved IM group, press . To join an IM group that is not on the list, but for which you know the group ID, select Options > Join new group . To leave the IM group, select Opti ons > Leave IM group . Chat After you join an IM group, you can view the messages that are exchanged there, and send your own messages. To send a message, write the message in the message editor field, and press . To send a private message to a participant, select Options > Send private message . To reply to a private message sent to you, select the message and Options > Reply . To invite IM contacts who are online to join the IM group, select Options > Send invitation . To prevent receiving messages from certain participants, select Option s > Blocking options . Record chats To record the messages th at are exchanged during a conversation or while you are jo ined in a IM group , select Options > Record chat . To stop recording, select Options > Stop recording . To view the recorded chats, in the main view, select Recorded chats . View and start conversations The Conversatio ns view shows a list of the individual conversation participants that you have an ongoing conversation with. Ongoing conversations are automatically closed when you exit IM . To view a conversation, scroll to a participant, and press . To continue the conversation , write your me ssage, and press . To return to the conver sations li st withou t closi ng the conversation, selec t Back . To close the conversation, select Options > End conv ersation . To start a new conversation, select Options > New conversation .
Applications 106 To save a conversation part ic ipant to your IM contacts, select Op tions > Add to IM contacts . To send automatic replies to incoming messages, select Options > Set auto reply on . You can still receive messages. IM contacts In the IM contacts vi ew, you can retr ieve chat cont act lists from the server, or add a new chat contact to a contact list. When you log in to the server , the previously used chat contact list is retrieved fr om the server auto matically. Chat server settings Select Options > Settings . You may receive the settings in a special text message from the network operator or service provider that offers th e chat service. You obtain the user ID and password from yo ur service provider when you register to the service. If you do not know your user ID or password, contact your service provider. Servers âÂÂView a list of all defined IM servers. Default server âÂÂChange the IM server to which you want to connect. IM login type âÂÂTo log in automatically when you start IM , select On app. start-up . To add a new server to your list of IM servers, select Servers > Options > New server . Enter the following settings: Server name âÂÂthe name for the chat server Access point in use âÂÂthe access point you want to use for the server Web address âÂÂthe URL address of the IM server User ID âÂÂyour user ID Password âÂÂyour login password Nokia Lifeblog To start Nokia Lifeblog on your device, press , and select Applications > Media > Li feblog > Options > Open . Lifeblog is a combination of software for mob ile device and PC that keeps a multimedia diary of the items that you collect with your device. Li feblog organizes your photos, videos, sounds, text messages, multimedia messages, and weblog posts into a chronology that you can browse, search, share, publish, and back up. Both Nokia Lifeblog PC and Nokia Lifeblog mobile let you send or blog your items for others to see. Lifeblog mobile automatically keeps track of your multimedia items. Use Lifeblog on your device to browse
Applications 107 your items, send them to others, or publish them on the web. Connect your device to a compatible PC using a compatible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivity to transfer and synchronize the it ems on the device with your compatible PC. Lifeblog PC provides easy browsing and searching of the items that you coll ected with your devi ce. With one-button transfer using a USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivity, your favorite photos, videos, text, and multimedia messages are transf erred back to your device. For safekeeping, you can back up your Nokia Lifeblog database using your hard disk , compatible CDs, compatible DVDs, compatible removable drive, or co mpatible network drive. Additionally, you ca n post items to your weblog (blog). For more inform ation on weblog serv ices and thei r compatibility with Nokia Lifeblog, visit www.nokia.com/lifeblog , or press F1 in the Li feblog PC application to open Nokia Lifeblog Help. Installation on your PC You must install Nokia Lifeblog PC (provided on the DVD-ROM) to a compatible PC before using it. Before you install Nokia Lifeblog on a compatible PC, you need the following: ⢠1 GHz Intel Pentium or equiva lent, 128 MB RAM ⢠400 MB of available hard disk space (if Microsoft DirectX and Nokia Nseries PC Suite must be installed) ⢠Graphics capability of 1024x768 and 24-bit color ⢠32 MB graphics card ⢠Microsoft Windows 2000 or Windows XP To install Lifeblog on your PC: 1 Insert the DVD-ROM supplied with your device. 2 Install Nokia Nseries PC Suite (includes Nok ia Connectivity Cable drivers for USB connection). 3 Install Lifeblog for PC. If Microsoft Dir ectX 9.0 is not already installed on your PC, it is installed at the same time with Lifeblog for PC. Connect your device and PC To connect your device and a compatible PC using a compatible USB data cable: 1 Ensure that you have installed Nokia Nseries PC Suite (available on the DVD-ROM). 2 Connect the USB data cable to the device and the PC. The USB mode should be PC Suite . When you conne ct your device to the PC fo r the firs t time afte r you have installed Nokia Nseries PC Suite, the PC installs the specific driver for your de vice. This may take a while. 3 Start the Lifeblog PC application.
Applications 108 To connect your device and a compatible PC using Bluetooth wireless technology: 1 Ensure that you have ins ta lled Nokia Nseries PC Suite on your PC. 2 Ensure that you have pair ed your device and the PC through Bluetooth wirele ss technology with Get Connected in Nokia Nseries PC Suite (available on the DVD-ROM). For more information on N okia Nseries PC Suite, see the guides av ailable at the Nokia N81 product support pages at www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia websit e. For more information on Bluetooth connectivity, see the user guide for your device. 3 Activate Bluetooth connectivity on your device and on your PC. Copy items To copy new or edited items from your device to your PC, and copy the selected items from your PC to your device: 1 Connect your device to the PC. 2 Start the Lifeblog application on your PC. 3 In the Lifeb log PC appli cation, select File > Copy from phone and to Phone . The new items from your device are copied to your PC. The items on the To phone view on your PC ar e copied to your device. Browse timeline and favorites When you start Lifeblog on your device, the Timeline view opens and shows your multimedia items. To open your saved favorite s, select Opt ions > View favourite s . When you start Lifeblog on your PC, you have several ways to move around in the Ti meline and Favourites views. The fastest way is to move the slider handle forward or backward, fast or slow. Alternatively, click the time ba r to select a date, use the Go to date featu re, or use the arrow keys. Post to the web To share your best Lifeblog items, send them to your weblog on the internet for others to see. You must first create an account with a compatible weblog service, create one or more weblogs that you use as the destination of your posts, and add the weblog account to Lifeblog. The recommended weblog service for Nokia Lifeblog is TypePad from Six Apart, www.typepad.com. On your device, to add the weblog account in Lifeblog, select Options > Settings > Blog . On your PC, edit accounts in the Blog account manager window. To post items to the web from your device, do the following:
Applications 109 1 In Timeline or Favourites , select the items that you want to post to the web. 2 Select Options > Post to Web . 3 If you use the feature for the first time, Lifeblog retrieves a weblog list from the weblog server. 4 The weblog post dialog o pens. Select the weblog you want to use from the Post to: list. If you have created new weblogs, to update the weblog list, select Options > Refresh blog list . 5 Enter a title and a caption for the post. You can also write a longer story or description i n the body text field. 6 When everything is ready, select Optio ns > Send . To post items to the web from your PC, do the following: 1 In Timeline or Favourites , select the items (a maximum of 50) that you want to post to the web. 2 Select File > Post to the Web... . The Post to the Web window opens. 3 Enter a title and a caption for the post. You can also write a longer story or description i n the body text field. 4 Select the weblog that you want to use from the Post to: list. 5 When everything is ready, click the Send button. Import items from other sources In addition to the .jpeg images of your device, you can also import .jpeg images and .3gp and .mp4 vid eo clips, .amr sound files, and .txt text files from other sources (such as a CD, DVD, or folders on your hard disk) into Lifeblog . To import items from a compatible PC to Lifeblog for PC, do the following: 1 In Timeline or Favourites , select File > Import from PC... . The Import window opens. 2 Browse the list to find the image or video file, or sound or text file from the lis t, or navigate to other folders to find the file that you want to import. Use the Look in list to browse other drives or appliances. 3 Select a folder, file, or seve ra l files. You can view their content in the Preview: pane. 4 Click Open to import the folder (including subfolders) or selected files. Digital rights management Content owners may use differ ent types of digital rights management (DRM) technologies to protect their intellectual property, including copyrights. This device uses various types of DRM software to access DRM-protected content. With this device you can access content protected with WMDRM 10, OMA DRM 1.0, and OMA DRM 2.0. If certain D RM softwar e fails to protect the content, content owners may ask that such DRM soft ware's ability to access new DRM-protected content be revoked. Revocation may also prevent renewal of su ch DRM-protected content
Applications 110 already in your device. Revocation of such DRM software does not affect the use of content protected wi th other types of DRM or the use of non-DRM-protected content. Digital rights management (DRM) protected content comes with an associat ed activat ion key th at defin es your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM protected content, to back up both the activation keys and the content, use the backup feature of Nokia Nseries P C Su ite. Other transfer methods may not transfer the activati on keys which need to be restored with the content for you to be able to continue the use of OMA DRM protected content after the device memory is formatted. You may also need to restor e the activatio n keys in c ase th e files on your device get corrupted. If your device has WMDRM protected content, both the activation keys and the content will be lost if the device memory is formatted. You may al so lose the activation keys and the content in case the files on your device get corrupted. Losing the activati on keys or the content may limit your ability to us e the same content on your device again. For more information, contact your service provid er. Some activa tion ke ys may be connected to a specif ic SIM card, and the protected content can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. To view the digital rights activ ation keys stored in your device, press , and select Applications > Media > Actv. keys and from the following: Valid keys âÂÂView keys that are connected to one or more media files and keys whose va lidity period has not started yet. Invalid keys âÂÂView keys that are not valid; the time period for using the media file is exceeded or there is a protected media file in the device but no connected a ctivation key. Not in use âÂÂView keys that have no media files connected to them in the device. To buy more usage time or extend the usage period for a media file, select Options > Get new key . To view detaile d information , such as the validit y status and ability to send the file, scro ll to an activation key, and press . Adobe Reader With Adobe Reader, you can read .pdf documents on the display of your device. This application has been optimized for .pdf document content on handsets and ot her mobile devices, and provides only a limited set of features compared with PC versions.
Applications 111 To open documents, press , and select Applicat ions > Office > Adobe PDF . Your recent files are listed in the file view. To open a document, scroll to it, and press . Use File mgr. to browse and open documents stored in the device. More information For more information, visit www.adobe.com. To share questions, suggestio ns, and information abo ut the application, visit the Adobe Reader for Symbian OS user forum at http://adobe.com /support/forums/main.html. Converter To convert measures from on e unit to another, press , and select Applications > Office > Converter . Convert er has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. 1 In the Type field, select the measure you want to use. 2 In the first Unit field, select the unit from which you want to convert. In the next Un it field, select the unit to which you want to convert. 3 In the first Amount field, enter the value you want to convert. The other Amount field changes automatically to show the converted value. Set base currency an d exchange rates Select Type > Currency > Options > Currency rates . Before you can make cu rrency co nversions, you must select a base currency and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is always 1. Note: When you change base currency, you must enter new exchange rates because all previously set exchange rates are cleared.
Settings 112 Settings To change settings, press , and select Tools > Settings . Scroll to General , Phone, Connection , or Applications, and press . Scroll to a setting or setting group you want to change, and press . Some settings may be preset fo r the device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change them. General To edit the general settings of your device or restore the original default device se ttings, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation , Date and time , Sl ide handling , Sleep mode , Enhancemen t , Security , Factory settin gs , Navi wheel or Positioning . For Date and time , see âÂÂClockâÂÂ, p. 98. Personalisation Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Display to adjust display brightness, select font and icon size, adjust power saver time-out, select the welcome screen and select the backlight time- out. To edit settings related to the display, standby mode, and general functionalit y of your device, p ress , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation . Tones allows you to change the tones of c alendar, clock, and the currently active profile. Themes opens the Themes application. See âÂÂChange the look of your deviceâÂÂ, p. 84. Voice comms. opens the setting s for the Voice comm . application. See âÂÂVoice commandsâÂÂ, p. 69. Display Brightness âÂÂPress or to adjust the brightness of the display. Font size âÂÂAdjust the size of the text and icons on the display. Power saver time-out âÂÂSelect the time-out period after which the power saver is activated. Welcome note / logo âÂÂThe welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time you switch on the device. Select Default to use the default image, Text to write a welcome note, or Image to select an image from Gallery .
Settings 113 Light time-o ut âÂÂSelect a time-out after which the backlight of the display is switched off. Standby mode Active standby âÂÂUse shortcuts to applicat ions in the standby mode. See âÂÂActive standbyâÂÂ, p. 84. Active standby apps. âÂÂSelect the application shortcuts you want to appear in the active standby. This setting is only available if Active stan dby is on. Shortcuts > Le ft selection key and Right selection key â Assign a shortcut to the selection keys in the standby mode. You can also assign keypad shortcuts for th e different presses of the scroll key. The scroll key shortcuts are not available if the active standby is on. Operator logo âÂÂThis setting is only available if you have received and saved an operator logo. Select Off if you do not want the logo to be shown. Language Phone language âÂÂChanging the language of the displa y texts in your device also affects the format used for date and time and the separators used, for example, in calculations. Automatic selects the language accord ing to the information on your SIM card. After you change the display text language, the device restarts. Changing the settings for Phone language or Writing language affects every application in your device, and the change remains effective until you change these settings again. Writing language âÂÂChanging the language affects the characters an d special charac t ers available when writing text and the predictive text dictionary used. Predictive text âÂÂSet the predictive text input On or Off for all editors in the device. The pr edictive text dictionary is not available for all languages. Slide handling Opening the sli de âÂÂTo select whether incoming calls are answered when opening the slide, select Answer incoming call or Call not answered . Closing the slide âÂÂTo select whether active calls are ended when closing the slide, select End active call or Cont inue active call . Keyguard activation âÂÂTo select whether the keypad is locked when closing the slide, sele ct On when closi ng slide or Off when closing slide . To receive a query every time when closing the slide, select Always ask .
Settings 114 Sleep mode Select Off to disable the power saver LED for the sleep mode. Enhancement Enhancement sett. For enhancement indicators, see âÂÂEssential indicatorsâÂÂ, p. 14. The available settings depend on the type of enhancement. Select an enhancement and from the following: Default profile âÂÂSet the profile that you want activated each time you connect a cert ain compatible enhancement to your device. See âÂÂProfilesâÂÂset tonesâÂÂ, p. 82. Automatic answe r âÂÂSet if you want the device to answer an incoming call automatically after 5 seconds. If the ringing type is set to Beep once or Si lent , automa tic answer is disabled. Lights âÂÂSet whether lights remain on, or are switched off after the time-out. This setting is not available for all enhancements. If you are using a Text phone or a Loopset , you must activate it on your device. T o activa te Text phone , select Text phone > Use text phone > Ye s . To activate the loopset, select Loopset > Use loopset > Yes . Security To edit settings related to the sec urity, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Securi ty > Phone and SIM card , Certificate management , or Security module . Phone and SIM card PIN code request âÂÂWhen active, th e code is requested each time the device is switched on. Deactivating the personal identification number (PIN) code request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. PIN code , PIN2 code , and Lock code âÂÂYou can change the lock code, PIN code, and PIN2 code. These codes can only include the numbers from 0 to 9 . If you forget any of these codes, contact your service provider. See âÂÂGlossary of PI N and lock codesâÂÂ, p. 115. Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialing of the emergency number. Keypad autolock period âÂÂSelect whether the keypad is locked when your devi ce has been idle for a certain period of time.
Settings 115 Tip! To lock or unlock the keypad manually, pull the lock switch. Phone autolock period âÂÂTo avoid unauthorized use, you can set a time -out afte r whic h the device automatically locks. A locked device cannot be used until the correct lock code is entered. To turn off the autolock period, select None . See âÂÂGlossary of PIN and lock codesâÂÂ, p. 115. When the device is locked, ca lls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Tip! To lock the device manually, press . A list of commands opens. Select L ock phone . Lock if SIM card changed âÂÂYou can set the device to ask for the lock code when an unknown SIM card is inserted into your device. The device maintains a list of SIM cards that are recognized as the ownerâÂÂs cards. Closed user group âÂÂYou can specify a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you (network s ervice). When calls are limited to clos ed user groups, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Confirm SIM s ervices âÂÂYou can set the device to display confirmation messages when you are using a SIM card service (network service). Glossary of PIN and lock codes If you forget any of these codes, contact your service provid er. Personal identific ation nu mber (PIN) codeâÂÂThis code protects your SIM card agai nst unauthorized use. The PIN code (4 to 8 digits) is usua lly supplied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unblock it. UPIN codeâÂÂThis code may be supplied with the USIM card. The USIM card is an enhanced version of the SIM card and is supported by UMTS mobile phones. PIN2 codeâÂÂThis code (4 to 8 digits) is supplied with some SIM cards, and is required to access some functions in your device . Lock code (also known as security code)âÂÂThis code (5 digits) can be used to lock the device to avoid unauthorized use. The factory se tting for the lock code is 12345 . To avoid unauthorized use of yo ur device , change the lock code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your device. If yo u forget the code, cont act your service provider. Personal unblocking key (PUK) code and PUK2 codeâÂÂThese codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectiv ely. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact th e service provider whose SIM card is in your device.
Settings 116 UPUK codeâÂÂThis code (8 digits ) is required to ch ange a blocked UPIN code. If the code is not supplied with the USIM card, contac t the servic e provider whose USIM c ard is in your device. Certificate management Digital certificat es do not guar antee safety; they are used to verify the origin of software. In the certificate management main view, you can see a list of authority certifi cates th at are stored in your device. Press to see a list of personal certificates, if available. Digital certificates should be used if you want to connect to an online bank or another site or remote server for actions that involve transferring confident ial information. They should also be used if yo u want to reduce the risk of viruses or other malicious software and be sure of the authenticity of software wh en downloading and installing software. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation cons iderably sm aller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; the certificate mana ger must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increased security to be available. Certificates ha ve a restricted lifetime. If âÂÂExpired certificateâ or âÂÂCerti ficate not valid yet" is shown even if the certificate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your device are correct. Before changing any certificate settings, you must ma ke sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belongs to the listed owner. View certificate detailsâÂÂcheck authenticity You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signature and the period of validity of a server certificate have been checked. You are notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. To check certificate details, scroll to a certificate, and select Options > Certificate details . When you open certificate details, the validity of the certificat e is checked, and one of the following notes may be displayed: ⢠Certific ate not tru sted âÂÂYou have not set any application to use the certific ate. See âÂÂChange the trust settingsâÂÂ, p. 117. ⢠Expired c ertific ate âÂÂThe period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. ⢠Certific ate not val id yet âÂÂThe period of validity has not yet begun for the selected certificate. ⢠Certific ate corrup ted âÂÂThe certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issuer.
Settings 117 Change the trust settings Before changing any certificat e settings, you must make sure that you really trust th e owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belongs to the listed owner. Scroll to an authority certificat e, and select Options > Trust settin gs . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications that can use the selected certificate is shown. For example: ⢠Symbian in stallation : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. ⢠Interne t : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify servers. ⢠App. instal lation : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Java application. Select Options > Edit trust setting to change the value. Security module To view or edit a secu rity module (if available) in Security module , scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view detailed information about a securit y module, scroll to it, and select Options > Security details . Factory settings To reset some of the settings to their original values, s elect Factory settings . To do this, you need the lock code. See âÂÂPhone and SIM cardâÂÂ, p. 114. After resetting, the device may take a longer time to power on. Documents and files are unaffected. Navi wheel Select On to perform certain actions (for example, browse through lists in some appli cations) by sliding yo ur finger around the rim of the scroll key. Positioning Positioning met hods âÂÂSelect the positioning methods used to detect the loca tion of your device: Bluetoot h GPS to use a compatible external GPS receiver with Bluetooth connectiv ity, and Network based to use information from the cellular network (network service). The location information can be used by compatible applications in your device. Positioning ser ver âÂÂDefine an access point and a positioning server for sec ure positioning. The positioning server may be preset by your service provider, and you may not be able to edit the settings . Phone To edit the settings related to making an d receiving calls, press , and se lect Tools > Se ttings > Phone > Call , Call divert , Call barring , or Network .
Settings 118 Call Send my caller ID âÂÂYou can set your phone number to be displayed to ( Yes ) or hidden from ( No ) the person to whom you are calling, or the value may be set by your service provider when you ma ke a subscription ( Set by network ) (netwo rk service ). Send my internet call ID âÂÂYou can set your internet call ID to be displayed to ( Yes ) or hidden from ( No ) the person to whom you are calling. Call wa iting âÂÂIf you hav e activated call waiting (network service), the network notifies you of a new incoming call while you have a call in progress. Set the function on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the function is activated ( Check status ). Intern et call waiti ng âÂÂSelect Activated t o b e n o t i f i e d o f a new incoming internet call while you have a call in progress. Internet call alert âÂÂSelect On to be al erted for incoming internet calls. If you select Off , you are not alerted, but a notification about missed calls appears. Default call type âÂÂTo set internet calls as default calls when starting the call wi th the call key, select Internet call . If internet telephone service is not available, a regular voice call is started instead. Reject call with SMS âÂÂSelect Yes to send a text message to a caller informing why you could not answer the call. See âÂÂAnswer or decline a callâÂÂ, p. 95. Message text âÂÂWrite a text to be sent in a te xt message when you reject a call. Image in video call âÂÂIf video is not sent during a video call, you can select a still image to be displayed instead. Automatic redial âÂÂSelect On , and your device makes a maximum of 10 attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful call attempt. To stop automatic redialing, press the end key. Show call duration âÂÂActivate this setting if you want the length of a call to be displayed during the call. Summary after call âÂÂActivate this setting if you want the duration of the call briefl y displayed after the call. Speed dialling âÂÂSelect On , and the numbers assigned to the speed dialing keys ( - ) can be dialed by pressing and holding the key. See al so âÂÂSpeed dial a phone numberâÂÂ, p. 90. Anykey answer âÂÂSelect On , and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pressing any keypad key, except the left selection key, right selection key, power key, a nd end key. Line in use âÂÂThis setting (network service) is shown only if the SIM card supports two subs criber numbers, that is, two
Settings 119 phone lines. Select which phone line you want to use f or making calls and sending text messages. Calls on both lines can be answered irrespective of the selected line. If you select Line 2 and have no t subscribed to this network service, you will not be able to make calls. When line 2 is selected, is shown in the standb y mode. Tip! To switch between the phone lines, press and hold in the standby mode. Line change âÂÂTo prevent line selection (network service), select Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Call divert Call div ert a l l o w s y o u t o d i v e r t y o u r i n c o m i n g c a l l s t o y o u r voice mailbox or another phone number. For details, contact your service provider. Select which calls you want to divert and the desired diverting option. To divert voice calls when your number is busy or when you reject inc oming calls, select If busy . Set the option on ( Ac tivate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the option is activated ( Check status ). Several diverting options can be active at the same time. When all calls are diverted, is shown in the standby mode. Call barring and call di verting cannot be active at the same time. Call barring Call barring (network service) allo ws you to restrict the calls that you make or rec eive with the device. To change the settings, you need the barring password from your service provider. Select the desired barring option, and set it on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whethe r the option is active ( Check status ). Call barring affects all calls, including data calls. Call barring and call di verting cannot be active at the same time. When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain official emergency numbers. Network Your device can automatically switch between the GSM and UMTS networks. The GSM network is indicated with in the standby mode. The UMTS network is indicated with . Network mode (shown only if supported by the network service provider)âÂÂSelect which network to use. If you select Dual mod e , the device uses the GSM or UMTS
Settings 120 network automatically, according to the network parameters and the roaming agreements between the network service providers. Cont act your service provider for more details. Operator selection âÂÂSelect Au tomatic to set the d evice to search for and selec t one of the available networks, or Manual to manually select the network from a list of networks. If the connection to the manually selected network is lost, the device sounds an error tone and asks you to reselect a network. The selected network must have a roaming agreement with yo ur home cellular network. Glossary: A roaming agreement is an agreement between two or more network service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use the services of other service providers. Cell info display âÂÂSelect On to set the device to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on microcellular network (MCN) technology and to acti vate cell info reception. Connection To edit access point and othe r connection settings, press , and select Tools > Settin gs > Co nnectio n > Bluetooth , USB , Access points , Packet data , Wireless LAN , Data call , SIP settings , Interne t telephone sett ings , Configurations , or APN control . For USB settings, see âÂÂUSBâÂÂ, p. 76. For settings for Bluetooth connectivity, see âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p. 73. Data connections and access points Your device supports packet data c onnections (network service), such as GPRS in th e GSM network. When you use your device in GSM and UMTS networks, multiple data connections can be active at the same time, and access points can share a data connection. In the UMTS network, data connections remain active during vo ice calls. You can also use a wireless LAN data connection. See âÂÂWireles s LANâÂÂ, p. 70. Only one connec tion in one w ireless LAN can be active at a time, but several applications can use the same internet access point. To establish a data connection, an access po int is required. You can define different kinds of access points, such as: ⢠MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages ⢠Internet acces s point (IAP) to send and receive e-mail and connect to the internet Check the type of access point you need with your service provider for the service you want t o access. For availability and subscription to packet data connection servic es, contact your service provider.
Settings 121 Access points You may receive access point setti ngs in a message from a service provider. See âÂÂData an d settingsâÂÂ, p. 37. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by yo ur service provider, and you ma y not be able to chan ge, create, edit, or remove them. indicates a protected access point. indicates a packet data access point, and a wireless LA N access point. Tip! You can create inter net access points in a wireless LAN with the WLAN wizard. Se e âÂÂWLAN wizardâÂÂ, p. 71. To create a new access point, select Options > New access point . To edit the settings of an access point, select Options > Edit . Follow the instructions fr om your service provider. Connection name âÂÂEnter a descriptive name for the connection. Data bearer âÂÂSelect the data connection type. Depending on the data connection you select, only certain setting fields are available. Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Other fields can be left empty, unless you have b een instru cted otherwise by your service provider. To be able to use a data co nnection, the network service provider must sup port this feature, and if necessary , activate it for your SIM card. Packet data access points Follow the instructions from your service provider. Access point name âÂÂYou obtain the access point name from your service provider. User name âÂÂT he user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service provi der. Prompt password âÂÂIf you must enter the password every time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the devi ce, select Yes . Password âÂÂA password may be ne eded to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service provi der. Authentication âÂÂSelect Normal or Secur e . Home page âÂÂDepending on the access point yo u are setting up, enter the web address or th e address of the multimedia messaging center. Select Options > Advanced settings to change the following settings: Network type âÂÂSelect the internet protocol type to use: IPv4 or IPv6 . The other settings depend on the selected network type.
Settings 122 Phone IP address (for IPv4 only)âÂÂE nter the IP address of your device. DNS address âÂÂIn Primary DNS address , enter the IP address of the primary DNS server. In Secondar y DNS address , enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server. Contact your internet servic e provider to obtain these addresses. Proxy server address âÂÂDefine the address for the proxy server. Proxy port number âÂÂEnter the proxy port number. Wireless LAN access po ints Follow the instructions from the wireless LAN service provider. WLAN networ k name âÂÂSelect Enter manually or Search for networks . If you select an existing network, WLAN network mode and WLAN securi ty mode are determined by the settings of it s access point device. Network statu s âÂÂDefines whether the target network is hidden or not. WLAN netw ork mode âÂÂSelect Ad-hoc to create an ad hoc network and to allow devices to send and receive data directly; a wireless LAN acces s point device is not need ed. In an ad-hoc network, all devices must use the same WLAN networ k name . WLAN security mode âÂÂSelect the encryption used: WEP , 802.1x (not for ad hoc networks), or WPA/WPA2 . If you select Open network , no encr yption is used. The WEP, 802.1x, and WPA functions can be used only if the network supports them. WLAN security settings âÂÂEnter the settings for the selected security mode: Security settings for WEP : ⢠Wep key in use âÂÂSelect the WEP key number. You can create up to four WEP keys. The same settings must be entered on the wireless LAN access point device. ⢠Authentication type âÂÂSelect Ope n or Shared for the authentication type between your device and the wireless LAN access poi nt device. ⢠WEP key settings âÂÂE nter WEP encryption (length of the key), WEP key format ( ASCII or Hexadecimal ), and WEP key (the WEP key data in the selected format). Security settings for 802.1x and WPA/WPA2 : ⢠WPA/WPA2 âÂÂSelect the means of authentication: EAP to use an extensible authentication protocol (EAP) plug-in, or Pre-shared key to use a password. Complete the appropriate settings: ⢠EAP plug-in settings (only for EAP )âÂÂEnter the settings as your service provider instructs.
Settings 123 ⢠Pre-shared key (only fo r Pre-shared key )âÂÂEnter a password. The same pa ssword must be entered on the wireless LAN access point device. ⢠WPA2 only mode (only for WPA/W PA2 )âÂÂSelect whether Temporal Key Integrit y Protocol (TKIP) is used. Homepage âÂÂDefine a home page. Select Options > Advanced settings and from the following: IPv4 settings : Phone IP address (the IP address of your device), Subnet mask (the subnet IP address), Default gateway (the gateway), and DNS address . Enter the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS server. Contact your internet service provider for these addresses. IPv6 settings > DNS address âÂÂSelect Auto matic , Well- known , or User defined . Ad-hoc channel (only for Ad-hoc )âÂÂTo enter a channel number (1-11) manually, select User defined . Proxy server address âÂÂEnter the address f or the proxy server. Proxy port number âÂÂEnter the proxy port number. Packet data The packet data settings affect all access points using a packet data connection. Packet data connection âÂÂIf you select When available and you are in a network that supports packet data, the device r egisters to the packet da ta networ k. Sta rting an active packet data connectio n (for example, to send and receive e-mail) is quicker. If there is no packet data coverage, the device periodically tries to register to the packet data network . If you select When needed , the device uses a packet data connection only if you start an application or action that needs it. Access point âÂÂThe access point name is needed to use your device as a packet data modem to your computer. Wireless LAN Show WLAN availability âÂÂSelect wh ether is displayed when a wireless LAN is avail able. Scan for networ ks âÂÂIf you set Show WLAN availability to Yes , select h ow often the de vice search es for avail able wireless LANs and updates the indicator. To view advanced settings, select Options > Advanced settings . Changing wireless LAN advanced settings is not recommended. Data call Select User defined or Unlimited to defi ne the time-out period after which data call co nnections automatically end
Settings 124 if no data has been transferred. If you select Unlimited , the connection stays active until you disconnect it. SIP settings SIP (Session Initiation Prot ocol) settings are needed for certain network services using SIP, such as video sharing. You may receive the settings in a special text message from your service provider. Yo u can view, delete, or create these setting profiles in SIP settings . Internet telephony To create or edit an internet call profile to make internet calls, select Options > New profile or Edit . Select SIP profiles and the profile you want to use for internet calls. Internet calls are not possible without the SIP profile and SIP settings. Configurations You may receive trusted server settings from your service provider in a configur ation me ssage. You can save, view, or delete these settings in Configurations . Access point name control With access point name control service, you can restrict packet data connectio ns and allow your device t o use only certain packet data access point s. This setting is only available if your SIM card supp orts the access point control service. To set the control servi ce on or off or to change the allowed access points, select Options and the corresponding option. To change the options, you need your PIN2 code. Contact your service provider for the c ode. Applications To edit the settings of some o f the applications in your device, press , and select Tools > Sett ings > Applications . The settings are also available in each application by selecting the settings option.
Troubleshooting: Q&A 125 Troubleshooting: Q&A Access codes Q: What is my password for the lock, PIN, or PUK codes? A: The default lo ck code is 12345 . If you forget or lo se the lock code, contact your device dealer. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network service provider. For information about passwords, contact your acc ess point provider, for example , a commercial internet service provider (ISP) or network service provider. Application not re sponding Q: How do I close an application that is not responding? A: Press and hold . Scroll to the application, and press to close the application. Bluetooth connectivity Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs device? A: Check that both devices are compatible, have activated Bluetooth connectivity, and are not in hidden mode. Check also that the distance between the two devices is not over 10 meters (33 feet) and that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a Bluetooth connection? A: If an other device is connect ed to you r device, you can either end the connection using the other device or by deactivating Bluetoot h connectivity. Se lect Tool s > Bluetooth > Bluetooth > Off . Display Q: Why do missing, discolored, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I tu rn on my device? A: This is a characteristic of this type of display. Some displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Home network (UPnP) Q: Why canâÂÂt the other device see the files stored on my device? A: Make sure that you have configured the home network settings, Content sharing is turned on in your device, and the other device is UPnP compatible. Q: What can I do if my home network conne ction stops working? A: Switch off the wireless LAN connection from your compatible PC and your device, and switch it on aga in. If this does not help, restart your compatible PC and your device. If the connection still does not work, reconfigure the WLAN settings in both your compatib le PC and device. See âÂÂWireless LANâÂÂ, p. 70, and âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 120.
Troubleshooting: Q&A 126 Q: Why can't I see my compatible PC in my device in the home network? A: If you are using a firewall application in your compatible PC, check that it allows home media server to use the external connection (you can add Home media server to the firewall applicationâÂÂs exce ptions list). Check from the firewall settings that the fire wall application allows traffic to the following ports: 190 0, 49152, 49153, and 49154. Some WLAN access point devices have a built-in firewall. In such ca ses, check th at the firewal l in the ac cess point device does not block traffic to the following ports: 1900, 49152, 49153, and 49154. Check that the WLAN settings are the same in your device and compatible PC. Memory lo w Q: What can I do if my device memory is low? A: You can delete unused items saved in your device regularly to avoid memory getting low. See âÂÂMemory lowâÂÂfree memoryâÂÂ, p. 68. To delete contact information, calendar notes, call timers, call cost timers, game scores, or any other data, go to the respective application to remove the data. If you are deleting multiple items and one of the following notes are shown: Not enough memory to perform operation. Delete some data fi rst. or Memory l ow. Delete som e data from phone memory. , try deleting items one by one (starting from the smallest item). T o v i e w w h a t k i n d o f d a t a y o u h a v e a n d h o w m u c h m e m o r y the different data groups consume, press , and select Tools > File manager > Options > Memory details . Q: How can I save my data before de leting it? A: Save your data using o ne of the following methods: ⢠Use Nokia Nseries PC Suite to make a backup copy of all data to a compatible computer. ⢠Send images to your e-mail a ddress, then save the images to your computer. ⢠Send data using Bluetooth connectivit y to a compatible device. Messaging Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a contact? A: The contact card does not have a phone number or an e-mail address. Add the miss ing information to the contact card in Contacts . Multimedia me ssaging Q: The note Retrieving message is shown briefly. What is happening? A: The device is trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia messaging center. Check that t he settings for multimedia messaging are defined correctly and that ther e are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia msg . . Q: How can I end the data connection when the device starts a data connection again and again?
Troubleshooting: Q&A 127 A: To stop the device from making a data connection, press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia messag e > Multimed ia retrieval and one of the following: Manual âÂÂto have the multimedia messaging center save messages to be retrieved later. You receive a notification when there is a new multimedia message t hat you can retrieve in the multimedia message center. Off âÂÂto ignore all incoming multimedia messages. After this change, the device does not make any network connections related to multimedia messaging. PC connectivity Q: Why do I have problems in connecting the device to my PC? A: Make sure that Nokia Nseries PC Suite is installed and running on your PC. See the user guide for Nokia Nseries PC Suite on the DVD-ROM. Fo r further information on how to use Nokia Nseries PC Suite, see the help function on Nokia Nseries PC Suite or visit the support pages at www.nokia.com. Q: Can I use my device as a fax modem wit h a compatible PC? A: You cannot use your device as a fax modem. However, with call diverting (network servi c e), you can divert incoming fax calls to another phone number. Wireless LAN Q: Why can't I see a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point even though I know I'm within its range? A: The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You can only access ne tworks that use a hidden SSID if you know the co rrect SSID, and have created a WLAN internet access point for the network on your Nokia device. Q: How do I switch wireless LAN (WLAN) off on my Nokia device? A: The WLAN on your Nokia device will switch off when you are not trying to connect, or are not connected to another access point, or scanning for available networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can specify that your Nokia device does not scan, or scans less often, for available networks in the ba ckground. WLAN will switch off in between background scans. To change the background scan settings: 1 Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Wireless LAN . 2 Change the value of Show WLAN availability to Never to stop background scans, or in crease the background scan time interval in Scan for netw orks . 3 To save your changes, select Back . When Scan for networks is set to Never , the WLAN availability icon will not be shown in the standby mode. However, you can still manua lly scan for available WLAN networks, and connect to WLAN networks as usual.
Battery information 128 Battery information Charging and discharging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The battery can be charged and discharged hu ndreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When the talk and standby times are noticeably shorter than normal, replace the ba ttery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and rech arge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. If a replacement battery is being used for the first time or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged period, it may be necessary to conn ect the ch arger, then disconnect and reconnect it to begin charging the battery. Unplug the charger from the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not lea ve a fully charged battery connected to a charger, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take several minutes before the charging indicator appears on the display or before any calls can be made. Use the battery only for its in tended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit th e battery. Accidental short- circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of th e positive ( ) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the conne cting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditio ns, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the b attery. Always try to keep the b attery between 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). A device with a hot or cold battery may not wo rk temporaril y, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Do not dismantle or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a battery leak, do not allow the liquid to come in contact with the skin or eyes. In the event of such a leak, flush your skin or eyes immediately with wate r, or seek medical help. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batter ies for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia battery, purchase it from
Battery information 129 an authorize d Nokia deale r, an d inspect the hologram label using the following steps: Successful completion of the steps is not a total assurance of the authenticity of the battery. I f you have any re ason to believe that your battery is not an authentic, original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it, and take it to the nearest authorized Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. Your authorized Nokia service point or dealer will inspect the battery for authenticity. If authenticit y cannot be verified, return the battery to the place of purchase. Authenticate hologram 1 When you look at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhancements logo when looking from another angle. 2 When you angle the hologram left, right, down, and up, you should see 1, 2, 3, and 4 dots on each side respectively. What if your b attery is not authentic? If you cannot confirm that your Nokia bat tery with the hologram on the label is an authentic Nokia battery, please do not use the battery. Take it to the nearest authorized Nokia service point or dealer for assist ance. The use of a battery that is not approved by the manufa cturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device and its enhancements. It may also invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the device. To find out more about original Nokia batteries, visit www.nokia.com/battery.
Care and maintenance 130 Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with ca re. The following suggestions will help you protect yo ur warranty coverage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your d evice does get w et, remove the battery, and allow the device to dry completely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the de vice in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of elec tronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temper ature, moisture can form inside the device and damage e lectronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the device oth er than as instructe d in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine me chanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, c leaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device. ⢠Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use a soft, clean, dry clot h to clean any lenses, such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses. ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replac ement antenna. Unauthorized ante nnas, modifications, or attachments could damage th e device a nd may violate regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Always create a backup of data you want to keep, such as contacts and calendar notes. ⢠To reset the device from ti me to time for optimum performance, power off the device and remove the battery. These suggestions apply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facility for service. Disposal The crossed-out wheeled-bin symbol on your product, literature, or packaging reminds you that in the European Union all electrical and electronic products, batteries, and accumulators must be taken to separate collection at the end of their working life. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. Return the products to collection to prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from un controlled waste disposal and to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Collection information is available from the product retailer, local waste authorities, national producer responsibility organizations, or your local Nokia representative. For more information, see product Eco-Declaration or country-specific information at www.nokia.c om.
Additional safety information 131 Additional safety information Small children Your device and its enhancemen ts may contain sm all parts. Keep them out of the re ach of small chil dren. Operating environment This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 2.2 centimeters (7/8 inch es) away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip, or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not contai n metal and should position the device the above-stated distance from your body. To transmit data files or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, t ransmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is av ailable. Ensure the abov e separation distance instructions are followed until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to th e device. Do not place credit cards or ot her magnetic storage media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of any radio transm itti ng equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your de vice in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or heal th care fa cilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacturers of medical devices recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 cent imeters (6 inches) should be maintained between a wirele ss device and an implanted medical device, such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the medical device. Persons who have such devices should: ⢠Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) from the medical device w hen the wireless device is turned on. ⢠Not carry the wireless device in a breast pocket. ⢠Hold the wireless device to the ear opposite the medical device to minimize the potential for interference. ⢠Turn the wireless device off immediate ly if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place.
Additional safety information 132 ⢠Read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of their implanted medical device. If you have any questions about using your wireless device with an implanted medical devi ce, consult your health care provider. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperl y installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, and air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer, or its representative, of your ve hicle or any eq uipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remembe r that air bags inflate with great force. D o not place objects, including installed or portable wi reless eq uipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly insta lle d and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the w ireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environm ents Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere, and ob ey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive at mospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refueling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the us e of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and dis tribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmos phere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include b elow deck on b oats, chemical transfer or storage facilities , an d areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders . You should check with the manu facturers of vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) to determine if th is device can be safely used in their vicinity.
Additional safety information 133 Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this device, operate using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for es sential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1 If the devi ce is not on, swit ch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the device. 2 Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready th e device for calls . 3 Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numb ers vary by location. 4 Press the call key. If certain features are in us e, you may first need to t urn those features off before you can ma ke an emergency call. If the device is in the offline or flight profile mode, you may need to change the profile to act ivate the phone function before you can make an emergency call. Cons ult this guide or your service provider for more information. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of comm unication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call un til given permission to do so. Certification information (S AR) This mobile device me ets guid elines fo r exposure to radio waves. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limit s for exposure to radio waves recommended by international guidelines . These guidelines were developed by the indepe ndent scientific organization ICNIRP and include safety marg ins designed to assure the protection of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mobile devices e mploy a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/ kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operating device can be belo w the maximum value because the device is designed to use on ly the power required to reach the network. That amount changes depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a ne twork ba se statio n. The highest SAR value under the ICNIRP guidelines for use of the device at the ear is 0.96 W/kg. Use of device accessories and enhancements ma y result in different SAR values. SAR valu es may vary depending on national reporting and testing requirements and the network band. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia.com.
134 Index A access point name control 124 access points 120 activation keys See digital rights management active standby mode 84 Adobe reader 110 alarm clock 98 application manager 99 applications installing 99 Java 99 removing 100 B batteries authenticating 128 charging 128 intend ed for use 10 prolonging life 17 Bluetooth 72 device address 74 pairing 74 security 73 sending data 73 switching off 73 bookmarks 65 C cache, clearing 66 calculator 98 calendar creating entries 101 synchronizing Nseries PC Suite 101 call log See log calls answering 95 barring 119 declining 95 diverting 119 duration 96 international 86 making 86 missed 96 received 96 settings 118 sharing video 92 transferring 95 waiting 95 camera active toolbar 54 adjusting lighting and color 56 editing videos 47 flash 56 image setup settings 56 saving video clips 59 scenes 57 self-timer 58 sequence mode 58 shooting video 59 still image camera settings 55 taking pictures 53 video recorder settings 61 cell broadcast 43 certificates 116 chargers 10 chat See instant me ssaging clock 98 codes 115 computer connections 76 conference call 90 configurations 124 connection settings 120
135 contact c ards 31 inserting pictures 31 sending 31 contact information 11 converter 111 copying contacts between the SIM card and device memory 32 copyright protection See digital rights manageme nt 109 D data cable 76 data calls 123 data connections details 75 ending 75 establishing 120 indicators 14 network 9 , 119 settings date 98 delivery reports 41 device manager 76 dictionary 35 digital rights management 109 Download! 17 DRM See digital rights manageme nt 109 E editing images 46 e-mail automatic retrievin g 38 deleting mailbox 41 deleting messages 38 opening 38 remote mailbox 37 retrieving from mailbox 38 saving 43 sending 35 settings 41 viewing attachments 38 writing 35 F factory settings 117 file formats .jad 99 .jar 99 .sis 99 music player 19 RealPlayer 102 file manager 68 fixed dialing 32 FM radio 24 G gallery active toolbar 45 editing images 46 images and videos 44 ordering files in albums 46 , 51 presentations 49 print basket 45 printing images 49 slide show 49 gameplay 30 games 30 GPRS See data conn ections GPS maps 17 settings 117 H hands-free operation See loudspeake r headset 16 help application 11 home network 21 , 51 , 77 I idle sceen See standby mode images See gallery indicators 14
136 installing applications 99 instant messaging blocki ng 105 connecting to a server 104 recording messages 105 sending instant messages 105 internet See web internet access points (IAP) See access points internet calls 124 J Java 99 K keyguard 114 keypad lock 114 L language settings 113 LED 16 lock code 115 log durat ion 97 erasing contents 97 filtering 96 loudspeaker 16 M mailbox 37 maps 17 mass memory tool 68 memory freeing memory 68 viewing memory consumption 68 menu, rearranging 82 messaging cell broadcast 43 e-mail 35 inbox 36 , 39 mailbox 37 multimedia messages 35 settings 39 text messages 35 missed calls 96 MMS See multimedia messages multimedia menu 15 multimedia messages creating 35 receiving 36 retrieving 36 saving 43 sendin g 35 settings 40 music See music player music player downloading music 23 file formats 19 music shop 23 playing songs 19 playlists 20 transferring music 21 N Navi wheel 15 , 117 N-Gage 30 Nokia wireless keyboard 80 notes 99 O original settings 117 P packet data settings 123 PC connections 76 pdf files 110 personalization 84 phone language 113 phonebook See contact cards PIN codes 115 podcasts 21 , 25 positioning 117 power saver 112 power saver LED 16 , 114 printing
137 contact cards 31 images 49 profiles 82 PUK codes 115 R radio 24 RealPlayer 102 recent calls 96 recorder 102 remote mailbox 37 , 38 remote SIM mode 75 resolution video quality settings 61 ringing tones 3-D 83 personal ringing tone 33 See also profiles S safety additional information 131 emergency calls 133 guidelines 8 scenes image scenes 57 video scenes 57 scroll key 15 , 117 security code See lock code sending contact cards, busine ss cards 31 messages 35 video clips 48 service commands 34 settings access points 121 application 112 applications 124 Bluetooth connectivit y 73 call barring 119 call diverting 119 certificates 116 configurations 124 data calls 123 data connections 120 defining 12 display 112 e-mail 37 , 41 IM 104 , 106 internet calls 124 keypad lock 114 language 113 lock code 115 messaging 39 multimedia messages 40 original settings 117 personalizing the phone 82 PIN code 115 positioning 117 power saver 112 sensor 117 SIP 124 slide handling 113 text messages 39 UPIN code 115 UPUK code 116 SIM card copying names and numbers to your device 32 messages 39 names and numb ers 32 using device without a SIM card 83 sis file 99 sleep mode 16 , 114 slide 113 SMS See text messages snooze 98 software installing applications 99 removing applications 100 transferring a file to your device 99 software update 18 , 76 songs
138 file formats 19 transferring 21 sound clips 44 sounds adjusting volume 16 muting a ringing ton e 95 recording sounds 102 speaker phone See loudspeake r speed dialing 90 standby mode 82 , 113 support information 11 svg files 49 switch 12 synchroni zation 80 T text messages inbox 34 receiving 36 saving 43 sending 35 , 36 settin gs 39 writing 35 themes 84 time 98 tones See ringing tones transfer conflicts 14 transferring content from another device 12 transferring music 21 troubleshooting 125 U UMTS See data connections Universal Plug and Play 78 unsupported file format 48 updating software 76 UPIN code 115 UPUK code 116 USB data cable 76 USSD commands 34 V video call answering 95 making 91 rejecting 95 video clips 44 video player See RealPlayer videos See gallery voice commands 69 voice dialing 90 voice mailbox 90 changing the phone number 90
139 diverting calls to voice mailbox 119 voice me ssages 90 voice t ags 69 making calls 91 volume co ntrol adjusting volume 16 during a call 86 loudspeaker 16 W wallpapers changing 84 using pictures 45 , 55 web access points, See access points blogs 64 browser 62 feeds 64 service messages 37 welcome application 12 wireless LAN 70 access poi nt settin gs 122 creating IAP 71 , 75 scanning 123 security 78 See also Universal Plug and Play settings 123 wizard 71 writing language 113
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION declares that this RM-179 product is in compliance with the essential requirements and ot her relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://www.nokia.com/phones /d eclaration_of_conformity/. é 2007 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, N-Gage, Nser ies, N81, Navi, and Visual Radio are trademarks or registered tradema rks of Nokia Corporation. Noki a tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. Other produc t and compa ny names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tra denames of their respective ow ners. Reproduction, transfer, distribution, or storage of part or all of the cont ents in this document in any form without the prior wr itten permission of Nokia is prohibited. This product includes software licensed from Symbian Software Ltd (c) 1998-2007. Symbian and Symbian OS are trademarks of S ymbian Ltd. Java⢠and all Java-based mar ks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 text input software Copyright (C) 1997-2007. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. Portions of the Maps softwa re are copyright é 2007 The Fr eeType Project. All rights reserved. This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Por tfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in connection with informat ion which has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a consumer engaged in a personal and noncommercial acti vity and (ii) for use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a lice nsed video pr ovider. No lice nse is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional inf ormation, including that related to promotional, internal, and commercia l uses, may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See <http://www.mpegla.com>. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing development. Nokia re serves the right to make changes and improvements to any of th e products described in this document without prior notice. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NO KIA OR ANY OF ITS LICE NSORS BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INC OME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDE NTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSO EVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PRO VIDED âÂÂAS ISâÂÂ. EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLIC ABLE LAW, N O WARRANTI ES OF ANY KI ND, EITHER EXPRESS O R IMPLIED , INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIE D WARRANTIES OF MERCHAN TABILITY AN D FITNESS FOR A PART ICULAR PU RPOSE, ARE MA DE IN RELATION TO THE A CCURACY, RELIABIL ITY OR CONTENTS OF T HIS DOCUMENT. NOKIA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DO CUMENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIOR NO TICE. The availability of particular products and applications and servi ces for these products may vary by region. Please che ck with your Nokia dealer for details, a nd availability of language options. Export controls This device may contai n commodities, tec hnology or software subje ct to export laws and regulations from the US a nd other countries. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANAD A NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interfere nce (for example, when using a telephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your te lephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contac t your local service facility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operatio n is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) th is device must accept any interfe rence receive d , including interference t hat may cause undesired operation. Any changes or modific a tions not expressly approved by Nokia could void the user's authority to operat e this equipment. The third-party applications provided with yo ur device may have been cre ated and may be owned by persons or entitie s not affiliated with or related to Nokia . Nokia does not own the copyrights or intellect ual property rights to the third-par ty applications. As such, Nokia does not take any responsibility for end-user support, functionality of the applicat ions, or the information in the applicat ions or these materials. Nokia does not provide any wa rranty for the thir d-party applications. BY USING THE APPLICATIONS YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE APPLICATIONS ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARR ANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITT ED BY APPLICABLE LAW . YOU FURTHER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT NEITHER NOKIA NOR ITS AFFILIATES MA KE ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WA RRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPL IED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WAR RANTIES OF TIT LE, MERCHANTABILIT Y OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE , OR THAT THE APPLICA TIONS WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY THIRD-PA RTY PATE NTS, COPY RIGHTS, TR ADEMARKS , OR OTHER RIG HTS. Issue 1 EN
Hello 4 Hello Model number: Nokia N81-1. Hereinafter referre d to as Nokia N81. The Nokia N81 8GB device is entertainment on the go! Enjoy high-quality music and gaming wrapped in a sleek and st ylish package, complete with a brilliant 2.4-in ch dis play, dedicated media and game keys, outstanding audio quality, and 8 GB of memory. With your Nokia N81 8GB you can enjoy your favorite music on the go. The Nokia Mu sic Store* offers you over one million songs to browse and purchaseâÂÂover the air using you r N81 8G B and at home with your compatible PC. If you are tired of struggling with wires, connect to compatible stereo headphones with Bluetooth connectivity. Experience high quality mobile gaming with dedicated game keys and enjoy stellar graphics that give you a new way to have fun. The multimedia menu offers you direct access and he lps to exp lore your content quickly and easily. Experience intelligent key illumi nation, whic h keeps ke ys hidden until you need them. Let the fun begin! *To check the Nokia Music Store availability in your country, visit music.nokia.co m.
Contents Hello ...................................... ...................... 4 For your safety .................................... ....... 8 Support ................................. ................... 11 Help ........ ......... ............ ........... ........... ......... ............ ........... ..... 11 Get started.. ........... ......... ............ ........... ......... ........... ............11 Additional applications ...... ........... ..................... ......... ....... 11 Nokia support and contact info rmation ......... ......... ..... 11 Your Nokia N81 .................................. .... 12 Welcome ......... ............ ........... ......... ........... ............ ........... ..... 12 Settings .................. ......... ............ ........... ........... ......... ............12 Transfer content from an other device ............... ............ 12 Essential indicators ........ ............ ........... ........... ............ ....... 14 Navi⢠scroll key ..... ............ .................................. ......... ....... 15 Multimedia menu ......... ............ ........... ........... ............ .........15 Power saver LED............ ............ ........... ........... ............ ......... 16 Volume and louds peaker control ...................... ........... ... 16 Headset. ........... ......... ............ ......... ........... ......... ............ .........16 Prolong battery life ........ ............ .................................. ....... 17 Maps ...... ............ ......... ........... ........... ......... ............ ......... ....... 17 Download! ... ........... ............ ........... ......... ........... ............ ....... 17 Software updates .............. ........... ........... ............ ........... ..... 18 Music .................................... .................... 19 Music player .......... ............ ........... ........... ......... ............ ....... 19 Nokia Music Store .................. ........... ........... ............ ......... 23 Radio ........... ...................... ....................... ........... ............ ....... 24 Nokia Podcasting .......... ............ .................................. ....... 25 Games ........................... ............................ 30 Contacts (phonebook) ............................31 Save and edit names and numbers ............. ............ ....... 31 Copy contacts......... ............ ......... ........... ........... ............ ....... 32 Add ringing tones for contacts .............. ........... .............. 33 Create contact groups ................ ........... .............. ........... ... 33 Messaging .................................. .............34 Write text ................... ........... ........... ......... ............ ........... ..... 35 Write and send messa ges .......... ........... ............ ........... ..... 35 InboxâÂÂreceive me ssages ........... ........... ............ ........... ..... 36 Mailbox .......... ............ ...................... .............................. ....... 37 Listen to messag es ..................... ........... ........... .......... ......... 39 View messages on a SIM card .................. ........... ............ 39 Messagin g settings ........ ............ ........... ......... ............ ......... 39
Gallery ....................................... .............. 44 View and browse files ............ ........... ........... ............ .......... 44 Print Basket ........ ........... ............ ......... ........... ......... ............ ... 4 5 Albums................... ......... ............ ........... ......... ............ ........... . 46 Edit images ........... ............ ........... ........... ............ ......... .......... 46 Edit video clips ............. ............ ...................................... ...... 47 Slide show ............ ............ .................................. ........... ........ 49 Presentations ....... ............ ........... ........... ............ ......... .......... 49 Image print ......... ........... ............ ........... ......... ............ ........... . 49 Print online................ ......... ........... ............ ........... ......... ........ 50 Share online ............ ......... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........ 51 Home network with Ga llery .......... ........... ............ ........... . 51 Camera . ....................................... .............. 53 Take pictures.................... ........... ......... ........... .......... ........... . 53 Take pictures in a sequence ............ ........... ............ .......... 57 You in the pictureâÂÂs elf-timer ................... ............ .......... 58 Tips on taking good photographs .. ........................... ...... 58 Record videos .................... ........... ......... ............ ........... ........ 59 Web .................................... ...................... 62 Browse the web ................ ......... ........... ............ ......... .......... 62 Connection security ................ ........... ........... ............ .......... 65 Bookmarks view ......... ............ ........... ........... ............ ........... . 65 End connection ................. ........... ............ ......... ........... ........ 66 Settings .................... ......... ........... ........... ......... ............ .......... 66 Tools ........................................... ............... 68 File manager .............. ............ ........... ......... ........... ............ ... 68 Mass memory tool ..... ............ ......... ........... ............ ........... . 68 Voice commands ...... ............ ........................................ ...... 69 Connections ........................ ...................... 70 Wireless LAN ................... ........... ......... ........... ............ ......... . 70 Bluetooth connectivity ........... ........... ............ ........... ........ 72 Connection man ager ...... ........... ......... ............ ........... ........ 75 USB ........ ......... ........... ........... ......... ............ ........... ......... ........ 76 PC connections ................. ........... ............ ........... ........... ...... 76 Device manager ................. ............ ......... ........... ........... ...... 76 Home network ................. ......... ........... ............ ........... ........ 77 Wireless Keyboa rd ............... ........... ........... ............ ......... ... 80 Synchronization ....... ......... ............ ........... ........... ............ ... 80 Personalize your device ..... ...................... 82 ProfilesâÂÂset tones ............... ......... ........... ........... ............ ... 82 3-D tones .......... ......... ............ ........... ......... ........... ............ ... 83 Change the look of your device .. ........... ......... ......... ...... 84 Active standby ................ ........... ......... ........... ............ .......... 84 Make calls ................................. ............... 86 Voice calls ................. ........... ......... ............ ........... ........... ...... 86 Video calls ................... ......... ............ ........... ........... ......... ...... 91 Video sharing.......... ........... ........... ............ ........... ......... ........ 92
Answer or decline a call ............... ............ ......... ........... ..... 95 Log .......... ......... ............ ........... ........... ......... ............ ........... ..... 96 Applications .......................... ................... 98 Clock ......... ........... ......... ........... ............ ......... ........... ........... ... 98 Calculator .... ......... ........... ............ ......... ........... ............ .........98 Notes .... ........... ............ ......... ........... ........... ......... ............ ....... 99 Application manager ....... ...................... ..................... ....... 99 Calendar ... ........... ........... ......... ............ ........... ......... ........... 101 Recorder ... ........... ........... ......... ............ ........... ........... ......... 102 RealPlayer ........... ........... ....................... ........... .................. 102 Adobe Flash Player ...... ............ ...................... .................. 103 IMâÂÂinstant mess aging ............ ........... ........... ............ ...... 103 Nokia Lifeblog .............. ............ .................................. ...... 106 Digital rights management ...... ........... ......... ................ 109 Adobe Reader ...... ........... .................................. ................ 110 Converter . ........... ........... ............ ........... ......... ........... ......... 111 Settings ...................................... .......... 112 General ......... ........... ......... ............ ........... ........... .......... .......112 Phone .......... ........... ......... ............ ........... ......... ........... ..........117 Connection ......... ........... ............ ......... ........... ........... ..........120 Applications ........... ............ ...................... ..................... .....124 Troubleshooting: Q&A .......................... 125 Battery information ........................... .. 128 Charging and discharging............... ........... .............. .......128 Nokia battery authentication guide lines............. .......128 Care and maintenance ............... .......... 130 Additional safety information ............. 131 Index ...... ...................................... .......... 134
8 For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAFEL Y Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be susceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device o ff near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Follow any restrictions. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELING Do not use the device at a refueling point. Do not use near fuel or chem icals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTI NG Follow an y restrictions. Do not use the device where blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBLY Us e only in the positions as explained in the product documentation. Do not touch the antenna areas unnecessarily. QUALIFIE D SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMEN TS AND BATTE RIES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RES ISTANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACK-UP COPIES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device.
9 CONNECTING TO OTHER DE VICES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructio ns. Do not connect incompatible products. EMERGENC Y CALLS Ensure the phone function of the device is switched on and in service. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and return to the standby mode. Enter the emergency number, then press the call key. Give your location. Do not end the call until given permis sion to do so. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the (E)GSM 850, 900, 1800, a nd 1900 and UMTS 2100 networks. Contact your ser vice provider for more information about networks. When using the features in th is device, obey all laws and respect local customs, priva cy and legitimate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright protections may pr event some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Your device supports intern et connections and other methods of connectivity. Like comp uters, your device may be exposed to viruses, malicious messages and applications, and other harmful content. Exercise caution and open messages, accept connectivity requests, download content, and accept installations only from trustworth y sources. To increas e the secur ity of y our device, consider installing, us ing, and regularly updating antivirus software, firewall, and other related software on your device and any connected computer. Warning: To use any features in this devic e, other than the alarm clock, the device must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. The office applications support common features of Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Microsoft Office 2000, XP, and 2003). Not all file formats can be viewed or modified. During extended operation, such as an active video sharing session or high-speed data connection, the device may feel warm. In most cases, this condition is normal. If you suspect the device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facility. Your device may have preins talled bookmarks and links for third-party internet sites. You may also access other third- party sites through your device. Third-party sites are not affiliated with Nokia, and Nokia does n ot endors e or
10 assume liability for them. If you choose to access such sites, you should take precautions for security or content. The images in this guide ma y dif fer from your devi ce display. Network services To use the phone you must have service from a network service provider. Many of the features require special network features. These featur es are not available on all networks; other networks ma y require that you make specific arrangements with yo ur service provider before you can use the network services . Your ser vice provider can give you instructions and explain what charges will apply. Some networks may have limitations that af fect how you can use network services. For instance, some networks may not support all language-dependent charac ters and services. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have a s pec ial configuration such as changes in menu names, menu order, and icons. Contact your service provider for more information. This device supports WAP 2.0 pr otocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, such as MMS, browsing, and e-mail require network support for these technologies. Enhancements, batteries, and chargers Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from an AC-3, AC-4 , or AC-5 charger and from an AC-1, ACP-8, ACP-9, ACP-12, or LCH-12 charger when used with the CA-44 charger adapter. The battery intended for use with this device is BP-6MT. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous . For availability of approved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you di sconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord.
Support 11 Support Help When an application is open, select Options > Help to access help for the current view. When you are re ading the instr uctions, to swit ch between help and the application that is open in the background, press and hold . To open help from the main menu, select Tools > Utilities > He lp . Select the desired application to view its help topics. Get started See the get started guide for keys and parts information, instructions for setting up the device and for other essential information. Additional applications There are various applications provided by Nokia and different th ird-party softwa re developers that help you do more with your Nokia N81. These applications are explained in the guides that are available on the Nokia N81 product support pages on www.nseries.com/support or your local Nokia website. Nokia support and contact information Check www.nseries.com/support or your local Nokia website for the latest guides , additional information, downloads, and services rela ted to your Nokia product. If you need to contact customer serv ice, check the list of local Nokia contact centers at www.nokia.com/customerser vice. For ma intenance services, check your near est Nokia service center at www.nokia.com/repair.
Your Nokia N81 12 Your Nokia N81 Welcome When you switch on your devic e for the firs t time, Welcome is displayed. Select from the following: Settings wizard âÂÂto conf igure various settings, such as e-mail Switch âÂÂto transfer content, such as contacts and cal endar entries, from a compati ble Nokia device. See âÂÂTransfer content from another deviceâÂÂ, p. 12. Demo âÂÂto view a demonstration about your device To access Welcome later, press , and select Tools > Utilities > Welcome . You can also access the individual applications from their menu locations. Settings Your device normally has MMS, GPRS, streaming, and mobile internet settings auto matically c onfigured in the device, based upon your network service provider information. You may have settings from your service providers already installed in your device, or you may receive or request the setting s from the network service providers as a special message. To change the general settings in your device, such as language, standby mode, and display settings, see âÂÂPhoneâÂÂ, p. 117. Transfer content from another device With the Switch application, you can transfer content, such as contacts and c ale ndar entries, between two compatible Nokia devices us ing Bluetooth connec tivity. When using the application for the first time, you can transfer content from a compat ible N okia devic e to your Nokia N81. The type of content that can be transferred depends on the model of the device from which you want to transfer content. Your device notifies you if the other device is not compatible. The Switch application can be used without the SIM card, too. If the other device cannot be powered on without a SIM card, you can insert yo ur SIM card in it . When the Nokia N81 is switched on without a SIM card, the offline profile is automatically activated.
Your Nokia N81 13 Transfer content 1 To retrieve data from your other de vice for the firs t time, on your Nokia N81, select Phone switch in the Welcome application, or press , and select Tools > Utilities > Switch . 2 To have the Nokia N81 se arch for de vices with Bluetooth connectivity, select Continue . If you have not already defined a name fo r your Nokia N81, you are prompted for one. Accept the default name, or define a name of your own. 3 For some device models, the Switch application is sent to the other device as a message. To install Switch on the other device, open the message, and follow the instructions on the display. 4 Select the device from which you want to transfer content from the list. You are asked to enter a code on your Nokia N81. Enter a code of your choosing (1-16 digits), and select OK . Enter the same code on the other device, and select OK . The devices are now paired. See âÂÂPair devicesâÂÂ, p. 74. 5 Select the content you want to transfer. Once the transfer has starte d, you can cancel it and continue later. Synchronize, retrieve, or send content After the first transfer, you ma y select from the following to start a new transfer, depending on the model of the other devi ce: to synchronize content between your Nokia N81 and the other device, if the other device supports synchronization. The synchr on ization is two-way. If an item is deleted in one device, it is deleted in both. You cannot restore deleted items with synchroniza tion. to retrieve data from the other device to your Nokia N81. With retrieval, da ta is transferred from t he other device to your Nokia N 81. You may be asked to keep or delete the original data in the other device, depending on the device model. to send data from your Nokia N81 to your other device If Phone switch cannot transfer an item, depending on the type of the other device, you can add the item to the Nokia folder to C:\Data\Nokia or E:\Data\Nokia and transfer it from there. When you select the f older to transfer, the items are synchronized in the corresponding folder in the other device, and vice versa. Use shortcuts to repeat a transfer After a data transfer, you can save a shortcut with the transfer settings to the main view to repeat the same transfer late r.
Your Nokia N81 14 To edit the shortcut, scroll to it, and select Options > Shortcut sett ings . You can, f or example, create or change the name of the shortcut. A transfer log is shown after every transfer. To view the log of a previous transfer, scroll to a shortcut in the main vi ew, and select Options > View log . Handle transfer conflicts If an item to be transferred has been edited in both devices, the device attempts to merge the changes automatically. If this is not possible, there is a transfer conflict. Select Check one by one , Pri ority to this phone , or Priority to other phone to solve the conflict. For further instructions, select Op tions > Help . Essential indicators The device is being used in a GSM network. The device is being used in a UMTS network (network service). You have one or more unread messages in the Inbox folder in Messaging . You have received new e-ma il in the remote mailbox. There are messages waitin g to be sent in the Outbox folder. You have missed calls. Shown if Ringing type is set to Silent , and Message alert tone and E-mail alert tone are set to Off . The device keypad is locked. A clock alarm is active. The second phone line is being used (ne twork service). All calls to the device are diverted to another number. If you have two phone lines (network service), a number indicates the active line. A compatible headset is connected to the device. indicates the connection has been lost. A compatible loopset is connected to the device. A compatible Text phone is connected to the device. A data call is active. A GPRS packet d ata connectio n is active. i ndicates the connection is on hold and that a conn ection is available. A packet data connection is active in a part of the network that supports EDGE. indicates the connection is on hold and that a conne ction is available. The icons indicate that E DGE is avail a ble in the network, but your device is not necessarily using EDGE in the data transfer. A UMTS packet data connection is active. indica tes the connection is on hold and that a conn ection is available.
Your Nokia N81 15 You have set the device to scan for wireless LANs, and a wireless LAN is available. See âÂÂWireless LANâÂÂ, p. 70. A wireless LAN connection is active in a network that has encryption. A wireless LAN connection is active in a net work that does not have encryption. Bluetooth connectivity is on. Data is being transm itted using Bluetooth connectivity. When the indica tor is blinking, your device is trying to connect with another device. A USB conne ction is act ive. Navi⢠scroll key Hereinafter referred to as the scroll key. Use the scroll key to move around the menus ( , , , ) , and to select items ( ). To activate the additional Navi⢠wheel functionality, press , and select Tools > Sett ings > General > Navi wheel > Navi wheel > On . Use Navi wheel to quickly browse through lists in the gallery and music player, and to navigate in the multimedia menu. Just slide your finger around the rim of the scroll key clockwise or counterclockwise. Tip! When in the menus, instead of using the scroll key, you can use the number keys, , and to quickly access the applications. For example, in the main menu, press to open Messaging . Multimedia menu With the multimedia menu, you have quick and easy access to multimedia content, games, your most important contacts, and most recent internet bookmarks and landmarks. Try it, for example, for images and music. To open or close the multimedia menu, press . To browse the tiles, either use the scroll key or the Navi wheel functionality. To return to the multimedia me nu from an open application, press . To change the order of the tiles, select Options > Arrange tiles .
Your Nokia N81 16 Power saver LED The display is switched off to save battery power after the screen saver is activated. A LED blinks to indicate that the device is powered on, but in the sleep mode. To switch off the LED, see âÂÂSleep modeâÂÂ, p. 114. Volume and loudspeaker control To increase or decrease the vo lume level when you have an active call or are listening t o a sound, press the volume k ey. The built-in loudspeaker allows you to speak and listen from a short distance without ha ving to hold the device to your ear. Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To use the loudspeaker during a call, select Options > Activate loudspea ker . To turn off the lo udspeaker, sele ct Options > Activate handset . Headset You can connect a compatible headset or compatible headphones to the Nokia AV Connector (3.5 mm) of your device. You may need to select the cable mode. Do not connect products that create an output signal as this may cause damage to the device. Do not connect any voltage source to the Nokia AV Connector. When connecting any external device or any headset, other than those approved by Nokia for use with this device, to the Nokia AV Connector, pay speci al attention to volume levels. Warning: When you use the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be af fected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. To optimize audio performa nce, attach the supplied earpads to the headset. To use a headset or headphones with a compatible remote control unit, for example, the Nokia Audio Adapter AD-54, connect the unit to the connector in the device, then connect the headset or headphones to the unit.
Your Nokia N81 17 Some headsets do not include a microphone. For phone calls, use such a headset with a remote control unit or the microphone of the device. The Nokia Audio Adapter AD-54 ha s multimedia volume controls that are used to adjust the volume only for music or video playback. When using certain headset enhancements, for example, the Nokia Audio Adapter AD-54, to adjust the volume during a call, use the vo lume key in the device. Prolong battery life Features using Blue tooth connectivity, wireless LAN, and packet data connections, or a llo wi ng s uc h fe atu re s to ru n in the background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. To prolong the operating time of your device, switch Bluetooth connectivity off when you do not need it. Also set Packet data connection to When needed for the device to use a packet data conn ection only if you start an application or action that needs it. See âÂÂPacket dataâÂÂ, p. 123. To close the applications r unning in th e background that you do not use, press and hold , select the app lications from the list, and press . Maps Press , and select Maps . With an external Bluetooth GPS receiver and Maps , you can see your current location on the map, browse maps for di fferent cities and countries, search fo r addresses a nd diff erent points of interest, and plan rout es from on e location to another. You can also purchase extra se rvices, such as cit y guides and a navigation service with voice guidance. For more information on the a pplication, see www.nseries.com/support or your local Nokia website. Download! Download! (network service) is a mobile content shop available on your device. You can browse, download, and install items, such as applicat ions and media files, to your device from the internet. Press , and select Download! . The items are categorized under catalogs and folders provided by different service providers. Some items may be chargeable, but you can usually preview them free of charge.
Your Nokia N81 18 Software updates Nokia may produce software updates that may offer new features, enhanced functions, or improved performance. You may be able to reques t these updates through the Nokia Software Updater PC appli cation. To update the device software, you need the Nokia Software Updater application and a comp atible PC with Microsoft Wind ows 2000 or XP operating system, broadba nd internet access, and a compatible data cable to connect your d evice to the PC. To get more information and to download the Nokia Software Updater applicat ion, visit www.nokia.com/ softwareupdate or your local Nokia website. If software updates over the air are supported by your network, you may also be ab le to request updates through the device. See âÂÂDevice manage râ and âÂÂSoftware updatesâÂÂ, p. 76. Tip! To check the software version in your device, enter *#0000# in the standby mode.
Music 19 Music Music player Music player supports files formats such as .aac, .aac , .eaac , .mp3, .wav, and .wma. Musi c player does not necessarily support all features of a file format or all the variations o f file for mats. You can also use Music player to lis ten to podcast episodes. Podcasting is the method for delivering audio or video content over the internet using either RSS or ATOM technologies for playback on mobile devices and PCs. Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To add songs to your device, see âÂÂTransfer musicâÂÂ, p. 21. For more information about copyright protection, see âÂÂDigital rights managementâÂÂ, p. 109. Play a song or a podcast episode Tip! To open the music player tile of the multimedia menu, press . See âÂÂMultimedia menuâÂÂ, p. 15. 1 Press , and select Music > Music player . 2 Select Music or Podcasts . 3 Select categories to navigate to the song or podcast episode you want to hear. 4 To play the selected file or list of files, press . To pause playback, press , and to resume, press again. To stop playback, press . To fast forward or rewind, press and hold or . To go to the next item, press . To return to the beginning of the item, press . To skip to the previous item, press again within 2 seconds a fter a song or podc ast has sta rted. To switch random play ( ) on or off, select Options > Shuffle . To repeat the current item ( ), all items ( ), or to switch repeat off, select Options > Repeat .
Music 20 If you play podcasts, shuffle and re peat are automatically switched off. To adjust the volume, use the volume key. To modify the tone of the music playback, sel ect Options > Equaliser . To modify the balance and stereo image or to enhance bass, select Options > Audio settings . To view a visualiza tion during playb ack, select Options > Show visualisation . To return to the standby mode and leave the player playing in the background, press the end key, or to switch to another open application, press and hold . Music menu To select more music to play in the Now playing view, select Music . The music menu shows the music available in the device. All songs lists a ll music. To view sorte d songs, select Albums , Artists , Genres , or Composers . To view playlists, select Pl aylists . To refresh the library afte r you have updated your device outside Music player, select Options > Refresh . Playlists To view and manage playlists, in the music menu, select Playlists . The following playlists appear automatically: Most played , Recentl y played , and Recently added . To view details of the playlist, select Options > Playlist details . Create a playlist 1 Select Options > Create playlist . 2 Enter a name for the play list, and select OK . 3 Select Yes to add songs now or No to add the songs later. 4 If you selected Yes, select artists to find the songs you want to include in the playlist. Press to ad d items. To show the song list under an arti st title, press . To hide the song list, press . 5 When you have made your selections, select Done . To add more s ongs later, when viewing the playlist, select Options > Add so ngs . To add songs, albums, artists, genres, and composers to a playlist from the different views of the music menu, select an item and Option s > Add to a playlist > Saved playlist or New playlist . T o r e m o v e a s o n g f r o m a p l a y l i s t , s e l e c t Options > Remove . This does not delete the song from the device; it only removes it from the playlist.
Music 21 To reorder songs in a playlist, scroll to the song you want to move, and select Options > Reorder list . To grab song s and drop them to a new pos ition, use the scroll key. Podcasts The Podcast menu shows the podcasts available in the device. To refresh the collection after you have updated your device outside Music player, select Options > Refresh . Podcast episodes have three stat es: Never played, Partially played, and Completely played. If an episode is partially played, it plays from the last playback position the next time it is played. If an episode is never played or completely played, it plays from the beginning. Home network with music player With UPnP architecture and a wireless local area network (WLAN), you can create a home network of compatible devices. Home network enables you to play content s tored in your Nokia N81 remote ly on a compatible device. You can also copy files from your Nokia N81 to a compatible UPnP enabled device. For more information, see âÂÂHome networkâÂÂ, p. 77 and âÂÂHome network wi th GalleryâÂÂ, p. 51. Play a song or a p odcast remotely 1 Press , and select Music > Music player . 2 Select music or podcasts. 3 Select categories in the following menus to navigate to the song or podcast episode you want to hear. 4 Select the song or podcast yo u want to hear, and select Options > Play > Play via home network . 5 Select the device in whic h the file is played. Copy songs or podcasts wirelessly To copy or transfer media file s from your device to another compatible device, such as a UPnP compatible PC, select a file and Options > Copy to home network or Move to home net. . Content sharing does not have to be switched on. Transfer music You can transfer music from a compatible PC or other compatible devices using a compatib le USB cable or Bluetooth connectivity. For details, see âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 72. PC requirements for music transfer: ⢠Microsoft Windows XP operating system (or later) ⢠A compatible version of the Windows Media Player application. You can get more detailed information
Music 22 about Windows Media Player compatibility from the Nokia N81 section of the Nokia website. ⢠Nokia Nseries PC Suite 1.6 or later Transfer music from PC You can use three different methods to transfer music: ⢠To view your device on a PC as an external mass memory where you can transfer any data files, make the connection with a compatible USB cable or Bluetooth connectivity. If yo u are using the USB cable, select Data transfer as the connection mode. ⢠To synchronize music with Windows Media Player, connect the compatible USB cable and select Media player as the connection mode. ⢠To use Nokia Musi c Manager in Nokia Ns eries PC Suite, connect the compatible USB cable and select PC Suite as the connection mode. Mass storage and media player modes can only be used with files placed in the mass memory of your device. To change the default USB connection mode, press , and select Tools > Connectivity > USB > USB mode . If you transfer music using Data transfer or PC Suite transfer mode, you must refresh the library in your device after you have updated the song selection in your device. To refresh th e library, in th e Music menu , select Opt ions > Refresh . Both Windows Media Player and Nokia Music Manager in Nokia Nseries PC Suite have been optimized for transferring music files. For information about transfer ring music with Nokia Mu sic Mana ger, see the Nokia Nseries PC Suite user guide. Music transfer with Windows Media Player Music synchronization f unc tions ma y vary bet ween different versions of the Windows Media Player application. For more information, see the corresponding Windows Media Player guides and help. Manual synchronization After connecting your device with a compatible PC, Windows Media Player selects manual synchronizat ion if there is not enough free memory in your device. With manual synchronization, you can select the songs and playlists that you want to move, copy, or remove. The first time you connect your device you must enter a nam e th at is u sed as t he n am e of you r d evi ce i n Wi ndo ws Media Player. To transfer manual s elections: 1 After your device is connected with Windows Media Player, select your device in the navigation pane, if more than one device is connected.
Music 23 2 Drag the songs or albums to the lis t pane for synchronization. To remove songs or albums, select an item in the list, and click Remove from list . 3 Check that the list pane contains the files you want to synchronize and that there is enough f ree memory on the device. Click Start S ync. to start the synchronization. Automatic synchronization To change the default file transfer option in Windows Media Player, click the arrow under Sync , select your device, and click Set u p Sync. Clear or select the Sync this device automatically check box. If the Sync this device automatically check box is selected and you co nnect your devi ce, the music libra ry in your device is automatically updated b ased on playlists you have selected in Windows Media Player. If no playlists ha ve been selected, the whole PC music library is selected for synchron ization. Note that your PC library may contain more files that can fit to the device. See the Windows Media Player help for more information. The playlists on your device are not synchronized with the Windows Media Player playlists. Nokia Music Store In the Nokia Music Store ( netwo rk service) you can search, browse, and purchase music to download to your device. To purchase m usic, you firs t need to register fo r the service . To check the Nokia Music Store availability in your co untry, visit music.nokia.com. To access the Nokia Music Store, you must have a valid internet access point in the device. For more details, see âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 121. To open the Nokia Music St ore, press , and select Music > Music store . In the main page, select Help for further instructi ons. Tip! To find more m usic in diffe rent categori es of the music menu, select Options > Find in Music store in the music player. Music store settings You may be asked to ente r the following settings: Default acc. pt. âÂÂSelect the access point to use when connecting to the music st ore. In the music store, you may be able to edit the settings by selecting Options > Settings .
Music 24 You can also access the Nokia Music Store from your compatible PC at music.nokia.com. In the main page, select Help for further instructions. Radio Press , and select Music > Radio . When you open Visual Radio for the first time, a wizard helps you to save loca l stations. You can use the application as a traditional FM radio with automatic tuning and saved st ations, or with parallel visual information related to the radio program on the display, if you tune to stations that offer Visual Radio service. The Visual Radio s ervic e uses packet data (network service). You can listen to the FM radio while using other applications. You can see the latest list of all the stations that offer Visual Radio service at http://www.visualradio.com. If you do not have access to the Visual Radio service, the operators and radio stations in your a rea may not support Visual Radio. To check availability and costs, and to subscribe to the service, contact your service provider. You can normally make a call or answer an incoming call while listening to the radio. The radio is muted when there is an active call. Listen to the radio Note that the quality of the radio broadcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wireless device antenna. A compatible headset or enhancement needs to be attached to the device f or the FM radio to function properly. Press , and select Music > Radio . To start a station search, select or , or press and hold the media keys or . To change the frequency manually, select Options > Manual tuning . If you have previously saved radio stations, to go to the next or previo us saved st ation, select or , or press the media keys or . To adjust the volume, press the volume keys. To listen to the radio using the loudspeaker, select Options > Activate lou dspeaker . Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuo us exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the device nea r your ear when the
Music 25 loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To view available stations based on location, select Options > Station directory (network service). To save the current tuned station to your station list, select Options > Save station . To open the list of your saved stations, select Options > Stations . To return to the standby m ode and leave the FM radio playing in the background, select Options > Play in background . View visual content To view available visual content for a tuned station, select or Options > Start visual service . If the visual service ID has not been saved for th e station, enter it, or select Retrieve to searc h for it in the station directory (network service). When the connection to the visu al service is established, the display shows the current visual content . Saved stations To open the list of your saved stations, select Options > Stations . To listen to a saved station, select Options > Station > Listen . To view available visual content for a s tation with Visual Radio service, select Options > St ation > Start visual service . To change station details, select Options > Station > Edit . Settings Select Options > Settings and from the following: Start-up tone âÂÂSelect whether a tone is played when the application is starte d. Auto-start service âÂÂSelect Yes to have the Visual Ra dio service start automatically when you select a saved station that offers Visual Radio service. Access point âÂÂSelect the access point used for the Visual Radio data connection. You do not need an access poi nt to use the application as an ordinary FM radio. Current region âÂÂSelect the region you are curren tly located in. This setting is di splayed only if there was no network coverage when the application was started. Nokia Podcasting With the Nokia Podcasting application, you can search, discover, subscribe to, and download podcasts over the air, and play, manage, an d share audio and video podcasts with your device.
Music 26 To open Nokia Podcasting, press , and select Music > Podcasting . Settings Before using Nokia Podcasting, set your connectio n and download settings. The recommended connection method is wireless LAN (WLAN). Check with your service provider for terms and data service fees before using other connections. For example, a flat rate data plan can allow large data transfers for one monthly fee. To search for wireless LANs availa ble within range, press and select Tools > Connectivity > Conn. m gr. > Available WLAN networks . To create an internet access point in a network, select Options > Define access point . Connection settings To edit the connection settings, press and select Music > Podcasting > Options > Settings > Conne ction . Define the following: Default access point âÂÂSelect the access point to define your connection to the internet. Search service URL âÂÂDefine the podcast search service to be used in Search . Download settings To edit the download settings, press , and select Music > Podcasting > Options > Settin gs > Download . Define the following: Save to âÂÂDefine the lo cation where you want to save your podcasts. For optimal use of storage space, mass memory is recommended. Update interval âÂÂDefine how often podcasts are updated. Next update date âÂÂDefine the date of the next automatic update. Next update time âÂÂDefine the time of next automatic update. Automatic updates only occur if a specific default access point is selected and Nokia Podcasting is running. If Nokia Podcasting is not runni ng, the automatic updates are not activated. Download limit (%) âÂÂDefine the size of the memory that is used for podcast downloads. If limit exceeds âÂÂDefine what to do if the downloads exceed the download limit. Setting the application to retriev e podcasts automati cally may invol ve the transmi ssion of large amounts of data through yo ur service pr ovider âÂÂs network. Contact your
Music 27 service provid er for inform at ion about data tr ansmissi on charges. To restore the default settings, select Options > Restore default in the Settin gs view. Search Search helps you to find po dcasts by keyword or title. The search engine uses the podcast search service you set up in Podcasting > Options > Settin gs > Connection > Search service URL . To search for podcasts, press ,select Music > Podcasting > Se arch , and enter the desired keywords. Tip! Search looks for podcast titles and keywords in descriptions, not specific ep isodes. General topics, such as football or hip-hop, usua lly give better results than a specific team or ar tist. To subscribe to a marked channel or channels and add it to your Podcasts , select Options > Subscribe . You can also add a podcast to your Podcasts by selecting one. To start a new search, selec t Options > New search . To go the website of the podcast select Options > Ope n web page (network service). To see the details of a podcast, select Options > Description . To send a selected podcast or podcasts to another compatible device, se lect Options > Send . The available options may vary. Directories Directories help you to find new podcast episodes to whi ch to subscrib e. To open Directories, press , and selec t Music > Podcasting > Directories . Contents of the Directories change. Select the desired directory folder to update it (network serv ice). When the color of the folder changes, press the scroll key again to open it . Directories can include top podc asts listed by popularity or themed folders. To open the desired folder topic, press the scroll key. A list of podcasts is displayed. To subscribe to a podcast, sele ct the title, and press the scroll key. After you have subscribed to episodes of a podcast, you can download, manage, and play them in Podcasts. To add a new directory or folder, select Options > New > Web directory or Folder . Enter a title, URL of the .opml (Outline Processor Markup Language), a nd select Done .
Music 28 To edit the selected folder, web link, or web directory, select Op tions > Edit . To import an .opml file stored on your device, select Options > Import OPML file . Select the location of the file, and import it. To send a directory folder as a multimedia message or by Bluetooth connectivity, select the folder and Option s > Send . When you receive a message with an .opml file sent by Bluetooth connectivity, open the file to save the file into Received in Directori es . Open Received to subscribe to any of the links to add to your Podcasts . Download After you have subscribed to a podcast, from Directories , Search , or by entering a URL, you can manage, download, and play episodes in Podcasts . To see the podcasts you have subscribed to, select Podcasting > Podcasts . To see individual episode titles (an episode is a particular media file of a podcast), select the podcast title. To start a download, select the episode title. To download, or continue downloading selected or marked episodes, select Op tions > Download or Continue download . You can download multiple episodes at the same time. To play a portion o f a podca st during download or after partial downloading, select Podcasts > Options > Play preview . Fully downloaded podcasts can be found in Podcasts folder, but will not be shown until the music library is refreshed. The available options may vary. Play and manage podcasts To display the available episodes from the selected podcast, select Options > Open . Under each episode, you will see the file format, the size of the file, and time of the upload. When the podcast is fully downloaded, to play the full episode, select Podcasts > Options > Play , or press and select Music > Mu sic player > Podcasts . To update the selected podcast, or marked podcasts, for a new episode, select Options > Update . To stop the updating of the selected podcast or marked podcasts, select Options > Stop update . To add a new podcast by entering the URL of the podcast, select Options > New podcast .
Music 29 If you do not have an access point defined or if during packet data connection you are asked to e nter a user name and password, contact your service provider. To edit the URL of the selected podcast, select Options > Edit . To delete a downloaded podc as t or marked podcasts from your device, select Options > Delete . To send the selected podcast or marked podcasts to another compatible device as .opml files as a multimedia message or by Bluetooth connectivity, select Options > Send . To update, delete, and send a group of selected podcasts at once, select Options > Mark/Unmark mark the desired podcasts, and select Options to choose the desired action. To open the website of the podcast (network service), select Options > Open web page . Some podcasts provide the opportunity to interact with the creators by commenting and voting. To connect to the internet to do this, select Options > View comments .
Games 30 Games Your Nokia N81 is c ompatible with the N-Gage⢠gaming experience. With N-Gage, you can download and play high-quality multiplayer games. Your device includes either one of the following applications: ⢠Discover N-Gage applicationâÂÂWith th is prev iew application you can get in formation about the upcoming N-Gage gameplay experience, try out game demos, and download an d install the full N-Gage application when it becomes available ⢠N-Gage application-The full featured a pplication gives you access to the comp lete N-Gage experience replacing the Discover N-Gage application in the menu. You can find new games, try and buy games, find other players, and access scores, events, chat, and more. Some features may not be available at the time of software installation on your device, check www.n-gage.com for software updates. Press , and select Games to get started. For the full N-Gage experience, you need internet access on your device, either through the cellular network or wireless LAN. Contact your service provider for more informat ion on data services. For more information, visit www.n-gage.com.
Contacts (phonebook) 31 Contacts (phonebook) Press , and select Contacts . In Contacts you can save and update contact informatio n. You can add a personal ringing tone or a thumbnail image to a contac t card. You can also create contact groups, w hich allow you to send text messages or e-mail to ma ny recipients at the same time. You can add received co ntact information (business cards) to contact s. Contact info rmation can only be sent to or received from compatible devices. To view the amount of contac ts, groups, and the available memory in Contacts , select Options > Contacts info . Save and edit names and numbers 1 Select Options > New contact . 2 Fill in the fields that you want, and select Done . To edit contact ca rds in Contacts , scr oll to the cont act card you want to edit, and s elect Option s > Edit . You can also search for the desired contact by entering the first letters of the name to the search field. A list of the contacts starting with the letters appear on the display. Tip! To add and edit contact cards, you can also use Nokia Contacts Editor available in Nokia N series PC Suite. To attach a small thumbnail imag e to a contac t card, open the contact card, and select Opt ions > Edit > Options > Add thumbnail . The thumbnail im age is shown when the contact calls. To listen to the voice tag assigned to the contact, select a contact car d and Option s > Play voice tag . See âÂÂVoice dialin gâÂÂ, p. 90 . To send contact information, select th e card you want to send and Option s > Se nd business card > Via text message , Via mu ltimedi a , Via e-mail , or Via Bluetooth . See âÂÂMessagingâÂÂ, p. 34 and âÂÂSend data using Bluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 73. Tip! To print contact cards on a compatible Basic Print Profile (BPP) equipped printer with Bluetooth connectivity (such as HP De skjet 450 Mobile Printer or HP Photosmart 8150), select Options > Print . To add a contact to a group, select Options > Add to group (shown only if you have created a group). See âÂÂCreate contact groupsâÂÂ, p. 33. To check to which groups a contact belongs, select the contact and Options > Belongs to groups . To delete a contact card in Contacts , select a card, and press .
Contacts (phonebook) 32 Default numbers and addresses You can assign default numbers or addresses to a contact card. In this way if a conta ct has sever al numbers or addresses, you ca n easily call or send a message to the contact to a certain number or address. The default number is also used in voi ce dialing. 1 In Contacts , select a contact. 2 Select Options > Defaults . 3 Select a default to which you want to add a number or an address, and select Assign . 4 Select a number or an addr ess you want to set as a default. The default number or address is underlined in the contact card. Copy contacts To copy names and numbers from a SIM card to your device, press , and select Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > SIM directory , the names you want to copy and Options > Copy to Contacts . To copy contacts to your SIM card, in Contac ts , select the names you want to copy and Op tions > Copy to SIM directory , or Options > Copy > To SIM directory . Only the contact card fields supported by your SIM card are copied. Tip! You can synchronize your contacts to a compatible PC with Nokia Nseries PC Suite. SIM directory and other SIM services For availability and information on using SIM card serv ices, contact your SIM card vendor. This may be the service provider or other vendor. Press , and select Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > SIM directory to see the names and numbers stored on the SIM card. In the SIM directory you can add, edit, or copy numbers to contacts, and you can make calls. To view the list of fixed dialing numbers, select Options > SIM contacts > Fixed dial contacts . This setting is only shown if supported by your SIM card. To restrict calls f rom your de vice to s elected phone numbers, select Op tions > Activate fixed dialling . You need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivate fixed dialing or edit your fixed dialing contacts. Contact your service provider if you do not have the code. To add new numbers to the fixed dialing list, select Options > Ne w SIM contact . You need the PIN2 code for these functions. When you use Fixed dialling , packet data connections are not possible, except when sending text messages over a packet data connection. In th is case, the message center number and the recipientâÂÂs phone number must be included on the fixed dialing list.
Contacts (phonebook) 33 When fixed dialing is activated, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Add ringing tones for contacts To define a ringing tone for a contact or a contact group, do the following: 1 Press to open a contact card or go to the groups list, and select a contact group. 2 Select Options > Ringing tone . A list of ringing tones opens. 3 Select the ringing tone you want to use for the individual contact or the me mbers of selected group. You can also use a video clip as a ringing tone. When a contact or group member calls you, the device plays the chosen ringing tone (if the caller âÂÂs telephone number is sent with the call an d your device recognizes it). To remove the ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing to nes. Create contact groups 1 In Contacts , press to open the groups list. 2 Select Options > New group . 3 Write a name for the group or use the default name an d select OK . 4 Select the group and Options > Add membe rs . 5 Scroll to a contact, and press to mark it. To add multiple members at a time, repeat this action on all the contacts you want to add. 6 Select OK to add the contacts to the group. To rename a gr oup, se lect Options > Rename , enter the new name, and select OK . Remove members from a group 1 In the groups list, select the group you want to modify. 2 Scroll to the contact, and select Options > Remove from g roup . 3 Select Yes to remove the contact from the group.
Messaging 34 Messaging Press , and select Messaging (network service). Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. E-mail messages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harm ful to your device or PC. Only devices that have compatible features can receive and display multimedia messa ges. The appearance of a message may vary depending on the receiving device. To create a new message, select New me ssage . Messaging contains the following f olders: Inbox âÂÂReceived messages, except e-mail and cell broadcast messages, are stored here. E-mail messages are stored in the Mailbox . My folders âÂÂOrganize your messages into folders. Tip! To avoid rewriting messages that you send often, use texts in the templates folder. You can also cr eate and save your own templates. Mailbox âÂÂConnect to your remot e mailbox to retrieve your new e-mail messages or view your previous ly retrieved e-mail messages of fline. See âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 41. Drafts âÂÂDraft messages that have not been sent are stored here. Sent âÂÂThe last messages that ha ve been sent, excluding messages sent using Bluetooth connectivity are stored here. To change the number of messages to be saved, see âÂÂOther settingsâÂÂ, p. 43. Outbox âÂÂMessages waiting to be sent are temporarily stored in the outbox, for example, when your device is outside network coverage. Reports âÂÂYou can request the network to send you a delivery report of the text messages and multimedia messages you have sent (network service). To enter and send service requests (also known as USSD commands), such as activation commands for network services, to your serv ice provider, select Options > Service command in the main v iew of Messaging . Cell broadcast (network service) allows you to receive messages on various topics, such as weather or traffic conditions, from your service provider. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service prov ider. In the main view of Messaging , select Options > Cell broadcas t . Cell broadcast messages canno t be received in UMTS networks. A packet data connection may prevent cell broadcast reception.
Messaging 35 Write text ABC , abc , and Abc indicate the selected character mode. 123 indicates the number mode. To switch between the letter and number mode, press and hold . To switch between the different character modes, press . To insert a number in the le tter mode, press and hold the desired number key. is disp layed when yo u write text us ing tradit ional text input and when using predictive text input. With predictive text, you can enter any letter with a single keypress. Predictive text input is based on a built-in dictionary to which you can add new words. To turn predictive text inpu t on or off, quickly press twice. Write and send messages Before you can create a multimedia message or write an e-mail, you must have the correct connection settin gs in place. See âÂÂE-mail settingsâÂÂ, p. 37 and âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 41. The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exceeds this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. 1 Select New message and from the following: Text message âÂÂto send a text message Multim edia mes sage âÂÂto send a multimedia message (MMS) Audio message âÂÂto send an audio message (a multimedia message that includes one sound clip) E-mail âÂÂto send an e-mail 2 In the To field, press to select recipients or groups from contacts, or enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e-mail address. To add a semicolon ( ; ) that sepa rates the recipients, press . You can also copy and paste the number or address from the clipboard. 3 In the Subject field, enter the subject of the multimedia message or e-ma il. To change the fields that are visible, select Opt ions > Address fields . 4 In the message field, write the message. To insert a template, select Options > Insert or Insert object > Template . 5 To add a media object to a multimedia message, select Option s > Insert object > Image , Sound clip , or Video clip . 6 To take a new picture or record sound or video for a multimedia message,
Messaging 36 select Options > Insert new > Image , Sound clip , or Video clip . To insert a new slide to the message, select Slide . To see what the multimedia message looks like, select Options > Preview . 7 To add an attachment to an e-mail, select Options > Insert > Image , Sound clip , Video clip , Note , or Othe r for other file types. E-mail attachments are indicated by . 8 To send the message, select Option s > Se nd , or press the call key. Note: Your device may i ndicate th at your message was sent to the message center number programmed into your devi ce. Your device may not indicat e whether the message is received at the intended destination. For more details about messaging services, contact your service provider. Your device supports the sending of text messages beyond the character limit for a sing le message. Longer messages are sent as a series of t wo or more messages . Your service provider may charge accordin gly. Characters that use accents or other marks, and characters fr om some language options, take up mo re space, limiting the number of characters that can be sent in a single message. You may not be able to send video clips that are saved in the .mp4 format or that exceed the size limit of the wireless network in a multimedia message. Tip! You can combine images, video, sound, and text to a presentation and send it in a multimedia message. Start to create a multimedia message, and select Options > Create pr esentation . The o ption is shown only if MMS creation mode is set to Guided or Free . See âÂÂMultimedia messagesâÂÂ, p. 40. InboxâÂÂreceive messages In the Inbox folder, indicates an unread text message, an unread multimedia message, an unread audio message, and data received through Bluetooth connectivity. When you receive a message, and 1 new message are shown in the standby m ode. To open the message, select Show . To open a message in Inbox , scroll to it, and press .To reply to a received message, select Options > Reply . Multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Multimedia message objects may contain malicious software or otherwis e be harmful to your device or PC. You may receive a notification that a multimedia message is waiting in the multimedia message center. To start a
Messaging 37 packet data connection to re trieve the message to y our device, s elect Options > Retr ieve . When you open a multimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a message. is shown if sound is included, or if video is included. To play the sound or the video, select the indicator. To see the media objects that have been included in the multimedia message, select Options > Objects . If the message includes a multimedia presentation, is displayed. To play the presen tation, select the indicator. Data and settings Your device can receiv e many kinds of messages that contain data, such as business cards, ringi ng tones, operator logos, calendar entrie s, and e-mail notifications. You may also receive s ettings from your service provider or company information management department in a configuration message. To save the data from the message, sele ct Options and the corresponding option. Web service messages Web service messages are noti fications (for example, news headlines) and may contain a text message or a link. For availability and subscription, contact your s ervice provider. Mailbox E-mail settings Tip! Use Settings wizard to define your mailbox settings. Press , and select Tools > Utilities > Sett. wizard . To use e-mail, you must have a valid internet access point (IAP) in the device and define your e-mail settings correctly. See âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 121. If you select Mailbox in the Messagin g main view and have not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. To start creating the e-mail settings with the mailbox guide, select Start . See also âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 41. You must have a separate e-mail account. Follow the instructi ons given b y your remote mailbox and internet service provider (ISP). When you create a new mailbox, the name you giv e to the mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailboxes. Open the mailbox When you open the mailbox, the device asks if you want to connect to the mailbox ( Connec t to mailbox? ).
Messaging 38 To connect to your mailbox and retrieve new e-mail headings or messages, select Yes . When you view messages online, you are continuously connected to a remote mailbox using a data connection. To view previously retrieved e- mail messages offline, select No . To create a new e-mail message, select New message > E- mail in the messaging main view or Options > Create message > E-mail in your mailbox. See âÂÂWrite and send messagesâÂÂ, p. 35. Retrieve e-mail messages If you are offline, select Options > Connec t to start a connection to the remote mailbox. Select Options > Retrieve e-mail and one of the options. To close the connection, select Options > Disconnect . To open an e-mail message, press the scroll key . 1 When you have an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Options > Retrieve e-mail and one of the following: New âÂÂto retrieve all new messages Selected âÂÂto r etrieve only the messages that have been marked All âÂÂto retrieve all messages from th e mailbox To stop retrieving messages, select Cancel . 2 If you want to close the connection and view the e-mail messages offline, select Options > Disconnect . 3 To open an e-mail messag e, press . If the e-mail message has not been retrieved and you are offline, you are asked if you want to retrieve this message from the mailbox. To view e-mail attachments, open the message, and sele ct the attachment field indicate d by . If the attachment has a dimmed indicator, it has not been retrieved to the device; s elect Options > Retr ieve . Retrieve e-mail messages automaticall y To retrieve messages automatica lly, select Options > E- mail settings > Automatic retrieval . For more information, see âÂÂAutomatic retrievalâÂÂ, p. 42. Setting the device to retrie ve e-mail automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data t hrough your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transmission charges. Delete e-mail messages To delete the contents of an e-mail message from the device while still retaining it in the remote mailbox, select Options > Delete . In Delete mess age from: , select Phone only .
Messaging 39 The device mirrors th e e-mail headings in the remote mailbox. Although you delete the message c ontent, the e-mail heading stays in your device. If you want to remov e the heading as well, you must first delete the e-mail message from your remote mailbox, and then make a connection from your device to the remote mailbox again to update the status. To delete an e-mail from the device and the remote mailbox, select Options > Delete . In Delete me ssage from: , select Phone and server . To cancel deleting an e-mail from the server, scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the ne xt connection ( ), and select Options > Restore . Disconnect from the mailbox When you are online, to end the data connection to the remote mailbox, select Options > Disconnect . Listen to messages You can listen to audio, mail, multimedia, and text messages in the Inbox . To listen to a message, select it and select Options > Listen . View messages on a SIM card Before you can view SIM messages, you must copy them to a folder in your device. 1 In the Messaging main view, select Options > SIM messages . 2 Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 3 Select Options > Copy . A list of folders opens. 4 To start copying, select a folder and OK . To view the messages, open the folder. Messaging settings Fill in all fields marked with Must be define d or with a red asterisk. Follow the instructions given by your service provider. You may also obtain settings from your service provider in a configuration message. Some or all message centers or access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Text messages Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Text message and from the following:
Messaging 40 Message centres âÂÂView a list of all text message centers that have been defined. Character encoding â To use char acter convers ion to another encoding system when available, select Re duced support . Message centre i n use âÂÂSelect which message center is used to deliver text messages. Receive report âÂÂSelect whether the network se nds delivery reports on your messages (network service). Message validity âÂÂSelect how long the message center resends your message if the firs t attempt fails (network service). If the message cannot be sent within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message center. Message sent as âÂÂContact your service provider to learn if your message center is able to convert text messages into these other formats. Preferred connection âÂÂSelect the connection to be used. Reply via same centre âÂÂSelect whether yo u want the reply message to be sent using th e same text message center number (ne twork serv ice). Multimedia messages Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message and from the following: Image size âÂÂDefine the size of the image in a multimedia message. MMS creation mode âÂÂIf you select Guide d , the device informs you if you try to send a message tha t may not be supported by the recipient. If you select Restricted , the device prevents you from sending messages that may not be supported. To include conten t in your messages without notifications, select Free . Access point in use âÂÂSelect which acc ess point is used as the preferred connection. Multimedia retrieval âÂÂSelect how you want to rece ive messages. To receive messages automatically in your home cellular network, select A u t o i n h o m e n e t w . . Outside your home cellular network, you re ceive a notifi cation that there is a message to retrieve in the multimedia message center. Outside your home cellular ne tw ork, sending and receiving multimedia messages may cost you more. If you select Multime dia retr ieval > Always automatic , your device automatically makes an ac tive packet data connection to retrieve the message both in and outside your home cellular network. Allow anon. msgs. âÂÂSelect whether you want to reject messages from an anonymous sender.
Messaging 41 Receive adverts âÂÂDefine whether you want to receive multimedia message advertisements. Receive report âÂÂSelect whether you want the status of the sent message to be shown in the log (network service). Deny report sending âÂÂS elect wh ether you w ant to deny your device sending delivery reports of received messages. Message validity âÂÂSelect how long the message center resends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the message cannot be sent within the validity period, the message is delete d from the message center. E-mail Press , and select Messaging > Option s > Se ttings > E-mail . To select which mailbox you want to use for sending e-mail, select Mailbox in use and a mailbox. To remove a mailbox and its messages from your device, scroll to it, and press . To create a new mailbox, select Options > New mailbox . Select Mailboxes and a mailbox to change the following settings: Connection settings , User settin gs, Retrieval settings , and Automatic ret rieval . Connection settings To edit the settings for the e-mail you receive, select Incoming e-mai l and from the following: User name âÂÂEnter your user name, given to you by your service provider. Password âÂÂEnter your password. If you leave this field blank, you are prompted for th e password when you try to connect to your remote mailbox. Incoming mail server âÂÂEnter the IP address or host name of the mail server that receives your e-mail. Access point in use âÂÂSelect an internet access point (IAP). See âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 121. Mailbox name âÂÂEnter a name for the mailbox. Mailbox type âÂÂDefines the e-mail pr otocol that your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4 . This setting cannot be changed. Security (ports ) âÂÂSelect the security option used to secure the connection to th e remote mailbox. Port âÂÂDefine a port for the connection. APOP secure login (for POP3 only)âÂÂUse with the POP3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to the remote e-mail server while connecting to th e mailbox. To edit the settings for the e-mail you send, select Outgoing e-mail and from the following:
Messaging 42 My e-mail address âÂÂEnter the e-mail address given to you by your service provider. Outgoing mail server âÂÂEnter the IP addr ess or hos t name of the mail server that sends your e-mail. You may only be able to use the outgoing server of your service provider. Contact your service provid er for more information . The settings for User name , Password, Access point i n use , Security (ports) , and Port are similar to the ones in Incoming e-mail . User settings My name âÂÂEnter your own name. Your name replaces your e-mail address in the recipientâÂÂs device when the recipientâÂÂs device supports this function. Send message âÂÂDefine how e-mail is sent from your device. Select Immediately for the device to connect to the mailbox when you select Send message . If you select During next conn. , e-mail is sent when the connection to the remote mailbox is available. Send copy to self âÂÂSelect wh ether you want to send a copy of the e-mail to your own mailbox. Include signature âÂÂSelect whether you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messages. New e-mail al erts âÂÂSelect whether you want to receive the new e-mail indications (a tone, a note, and a mail indicator) when new mail is received. Retrieval settings E-mail to retrieve âÂÂDefine which parts of the e-mail are retrieved: Headers only , Size limit (POP3), or Msgs. & attachs. (POP3). Retrieval amount âÂÂDefine how many new e-mail messages are retrieved to the mailbox. IMAP4 folder pa th (for IMAP4 only)âÂÂDefine the folder path for folders to be subscribed. Folder subscriptions (for IMAP4 only)âÂÂSubscribe to other folders in the remote mailbox and retrieve content from those folders. Automatic retrieval E-mail notifi cations âÂÂTo aut omatically retrieve the headings to your device when you receive ne w e-mail in your remote mailbox, select Auto-update or Only in home netw. . E-mail r etriev al âÂÂTo automatically retrieve t he headings of new e-mail messages from your remote mailbox at defined times, selec t Enabled or Only in home netw. . Define when and how often the messages are retrieved. E-mail notifi cations and E-mail retrieval cannot be active at the same time. Setting the device to retrie ve e-mail automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data t hrough
Messaging 43 your service provider's netw ork. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transmission charges. Web service messages Press , and select Messaging > Option s > Se ttings > Service message . Select whether you want to receive service messages. If you want to set the device to automatically activate the browser and start a network connection to retrieve content when you receive a service message, select Download messages > Automatically . Cell broadcast Check the available topics and related topic numbers with your service provider. Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Cell b roadcast and from the following: Recept ion âÂÂSelect whether you want to receive cell broadcast messages. Language âÂÂSelect the languages in which you want to receive messages: All , Selec ted , or Other . Topic detection âÂÂSelect whether the device automatically searches for new topic numbers, and saves the new numbers without a name to the topic list. Other settings Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Other and from the following: Save sent messages âÂÂSelect wh ether you want to save a copy of the text messages, mu ltimedia messages, or e-mail that you send to the Sent folder. Number o f saved ms gs. âÂÂDefine how many sent messages are saved to the Sent folder at a time. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. Memory in use âÂÂSelect the memory where you want to save your messages: Phone memory or Mass memory .
Gallery 44 Gallery To store and organize your images, video c lips, sound clips, playlists, and streaming links, or share your files with other compatible UPnP devices thro ugh wireless LAN, press , and select Gallery . Tip! To open the image tile of the multimedia menu, press . See âÂÂMultimedia menuâÂÂ, p. 15. View and browse files Select Images & videos , Tracks , , Lifeblog , Sound clips , St reaming links , Presentations , or All files , and press to open it. The content in the Images & videos folder is shown in the landscape mode. You can browse and open folders; and mark, copy, and move items to folders. You ca n also create albums; and mark, copy, and add items to albums. To open a file, press . Video clips, .ram files, and streaming links are opened and played in RealPlayer , and music and sound clips in Music player . See âÂÂRealPlayerâÂÂ, p. 102, and âÂÂMusic playerâÂÂ, p. 19. To download images or videos, in the Images & vi deos folder, select the download ic on. The browser opens, and you can select a bookmark you want to use to downl oad items. Images and video clips Pictures taken and video clips recorded with the camera are stored in the Images & videos folder in Gallery . Images and video clips can also be sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail atta chment, or through Bluetooth connectivity. To be able to view a rec eived image or video clip in Gallery or in the Real player, you must first save it. Select Gallery > Images & videos . The images and video clip files are in a loop, and ordered by date. The number of files is displayed. When the image is opened, to zoom in an image, press the game keys next to the display. The zooming ratio is not stored permanently. To rotate the selected image left or right, selec t Options > Rotate > Left or Right . To edit a video clip o r a photo, select Options > Edit . An image editor or a video editor opens. See âÂÂEdit video clipsâÂÂ, p. 47. See âÂÂEdit imagesâÂÂ, p. 46.
Gallery 45 To creat e custo m video clips, select a video clip in the gallery, and select Options > Ed it . See âÂÂEdit video clipsâÂÂ, p. 47. To print your images on a comp atible printer, or to store them for printing, select Options > Print . See âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 49. You can also tag images for later printing to the Print Bas ket in Gallery . See âÂÂPr int BasketâÂÂ, p. 45. To add an image or a video clip to an album in the gallery, select Options > Albums > Add to album . To use the picture as a background image, select the picture and Options > Use image > Set as wallpaper. To delete an image or video clip, from the active toolbar, select Delete . See âÂÂActive toolbarâÂÂ, p. 45. To switch from Ga llery to the camera, press the capture key. Active toolbar In the Images & videos folder, you can use the active toolbar as a shortcut to select different tasks. The active toolbar is available only when you have selected an image or a video clip. In the active toolbar, scroll up or down to different items, and select them by pressing the scroll key. The available options vary depending on the view you are in and whether you have selected an image or a video clip. Yo u can also define whether the active tool bar is always visible on the display or activated by a keypress. If you want the active toolbar to be visible on t he display, select Option s > Show icons . If you want the active toolbar to be visible only when you need it, select Options > Hide icons . To activate the active toolbar, press . Select from the following: to play the selected video clip to send the selected image or video clip / to add or remove an image from the Print Basket. See âÂÂPrint BasketâÂÂ, p. 45. to view the images in the Print Basket to start a slide show of your images to delete the selected image or video clip to print the viewed image The available options may vary depending on the view you are in. Print Basket You can tag images to the Print Basket, and print them later with a compatible printer or in a compatible printing
Gallery 46 kiosk, if available. See âÂÂIma ge printâÂÂ, p. 49. The tagged images are indicated with in the Images & videos folder and albums. To tag an image for later printing, select an image and Add to Print Basket from the active toolbar. To view the images in the Print Basket, select View Print Basket from the active toolbar, or select from the Images & videos folder (available only when you have added pictures to the Print Basket). To remove an image from the Print Basket, select an image in the Images & videos f o l d er o r i n a n a l bu m , a n d Remove from Print Basket from the active toolbar. Albums With albums you can convenie ntly manage your images and video clips. To view the albums list, select Images & videos > Options > Albums > View albums . To add a picture or a video clip to an album in the gallery, scroll to a picture or video clip, and select Options > Albums > Add to album . A list of albums opens. Select the album to which you want to add the picture or v ideo clip. You can also create a n ew album. To remove a file from an al bum, press . The file is not deleted from the Images & videos folder in Gallery . To create a new album, in the albums list view, select Options > New albu m . Edit images To edit the pictures after taking them, or the ones already saved in Gallery , select Options > Edit . Select Options > Apply effect to open a grid where you can select different edit optio ns indicated by smal l icons. You can crop and rotate the image; adjust the brightness, color, contrast, and resolution ; and add effects, text, clip art, or a frame to the picture. Crop image To crop an image, se lect Options > Appl y effect > Crop . To crop the image size manually, s elect Manual or a predefined aspect ratio from the list. If you select Man ual , a cross is displayed in the uppe r left corner of the image. Use the scroll key to select the area to crop, and select Set . Another cross is displayed in the lower right corner. Again select the area to be cropped. To adjust the first selected area, select Back . The selecte d areas for m a rectang le that forms the cropped image. If you selected a predefined aspect ratio, select the upper left corner of the area to be cropped. To resize the highlighted area, use the scroll key. To freeze the selected
Gallery 47 area, press . To move the area within the picture, use the scroll key. To select the area to be cropped, press . Reduce redness To reduce redness of the eyes in an image, select Options > Apply effect > Red eye reduction . Move the cross onto the eye, and press . A loop is displayed on the display. To resize the loop to fit the size of the eye, use the scroll key. To reduce the redness, press . Useful shortcuts Shortcuts in the image editor: ⢠To view an image in the full screen, press . To return to the normal view, press ag ain. ⢠To rotate an image clockwise or counterclockwise, press or . ⢠To zoom in or out, press or . ⢠To move on a zoomed image, scroll up, down, left, or right. Edit video clips To edit video clips in Gallery and create custom video clips, scroll to a video clip, and select Options > Edit > Merge , Change sou nd , Add text , or Cut . See âÂÂGalleryâÂÂ, p. 44. The video editor supports video file formats 3gp and .mp4, and sound file forma ts .aac, .amr, .mp3 and .wav. It does not necessarily support all featur es of a file format or all the variations of file f ormats. The custom video clips are automatically saved in the Images & videos in Gallery . The clips are saved in the mass memory. Add images, video, sound, and text You can add images, video clips, and text to a video clip selected in Gallery to create custom video clips. To combine an image or a video clip with the selected video clip, in the Images & videos folder, select Opti ons > Edit > Merge > Image or Video clip . Select the desired file. To add a new sound clip and replac e the original sound clip in the video clip, select Options > Ed it > Change sound and a sound clip. To add text to the beginning or the end of the video clip, select Options > Edit > Add text , enter the text you want to add, and select OK . Then select where you want to add the text: Beginning or End .
Gallery 48 Cut video clip You can trim the video clip, and add start and end marks to exclude parts from the video clip. In the Images & videos folder, select Optio ns > Edit > Cu t . To play the selected video clip from the start, select Options > Play . To select which parts of the vi deo clip are included in the custom video clip, and define the start and end points for them, scroll to the desired point on the video, and select Options > Start mark or En d mark . To edit the start or end point of the selected part, sc roll to the des ired mark, a nd press the scroll key. You can then move the selected mark forwards or backwards on the timeline. To remove all the marks, select Options > Remove > All marks . To preview the video clip, select Options > Play marked section . To move on the timeline, scroll left or right. To stop playing the video clip, select Pause . To continue playing the clip, select Options > Play . To return back to the cut video view, select Back . To save the changes, and return to Gallery , select Done . Edit video clips to send To send a video cli p, select Options > Send > Via multimedia , Via e-mail , Via Bluetooth , or Post to w eb . Contact your network service provider for details of the maximum multimedia message size that you can send. If yo u wa nt t o s e nd a v i de o cl ip t ha t i s o v er th e ma x im u m multimedia message size allowed by your service provider, you can send the clip using Bluetooth wireless technology. See âÂÂSend data using Bluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 73. Y ou can also transfer your videos to a compatible PC using Bluetooth connectivity, or a compatible USB data cabl e. You can also cut the video clip for sending it in a multimedia message. In the video editor main view, select Options > Movie > Edit for MM S . The duration and size of the video clip is shown on the display. To edit the size of the clip, scroll left or right. When the clip is the proper size to send, select Options > Send via MMS . If your video clip is in .mp 4 format, you may not be able to send it in a multimedia message. To change the file format of the clip, scroll to it in Gallery , and select Options > Edit > Options > Settings > Resolution > MMS compatible . Return to the video editor main view, select Options > Movie > Save , and enter a name for the clip. The video clip is saved in .3g pp format and can be sent in a multimedia message. The file format of the original video clip does no t change.
Gallery 49 Slide show In the active toolbar, select Start s lide show ( ) t o v i ew a slide show of images in full screen. The slide show starts from the selected file. Select from the following: Pause âÂÂto pause the slide show Continue âÂÂto resume the slide show, if paused End âÂÂto close the slide show To browse the images, pres s ( previous) or (next) (available only when Zoom and pan is off). To adjust the tempo of the s lide show, before starting the slide sh ow, sele ct Options > Slide show > Settings > Delay between sli des . To make the slide show move smoothly from one slide to another, and let the gallery ra ndomly zoom in and out in the images, select Zoom and pan . To add sound to the slide show, select Options > Slide show > Settings and from the following: Music âÂÂSelect On or Off . Song âÂÂSelect a music file from the list. To decrease or increase the volume, use the volume key in your device. Presentations With presentations, you can view SVG (scalab le vector graphics) f iles, such a s ca rtoons and maps. SVG images maintain their appearance when printed or viewed with different screen sizes and re solutions. To view scalable vector graphics, select Presenta tions , scroll to an image, and select Options > Play . To pause playing, select Options > Pause . To zoom in, press . To zoom out, press . To rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise or counter-clockwise, press or . To rotate the image 45 degrees, press or . To switch between full screen and normal screen, press . Image print To print images with Image print , select the image you want to print, and the print option in the gallery, camera, image editor, or image viewer. Use Image print to print your images usin g a compatible USB data cable, wireless LAN , or Bluetooth conn ectivity.
Gallery 50 You can only print images th at are in .jpeg format. The pictures ta ken with the c amera are automatically saved in .jpeg format. To print to a printer compatib le with PictBridge, connect the data cable before you se lect the print option, and check that the data cable mode is set to Image print or Ask on connection . See âÂÂUSBâÂÂ, p. 76. Printer selection When you use Image print for the first time, a list of available compatible printers is displayed after you select the image. Select a printer. Th e printer is set as the default printer. If you have connected a printer compatible wi th PictBridge using a comp atible Nokia connect ivity cable, the printer is automatically displayed. If the default printer is not av ailable, a list of available printing devices is displayed. To change the default printer, select Opt ions > Se ttings > Default printer . Print preview After you select the printer, the selected images are displayed using predefined layouts. To change the layout, press or to browse through the available layouts for the selected printer. If the images do not fit on a single page, press or to disp lay the additional pages. Print settings The available options vary depe nding on the capabilities of the printing device you selected. To set a default printer, select Options > Default printer . To select the paper size, select Paper size , the size of paper from the list, and OK . Select Cancel to return to the previous view. Print online With Print online , you can order prints of i mages online directly to your home, or to a store where you can pick them up. You can also order diffe rent products with the selected image, such as mugs or mouse pads. The available products depend on the service provider. To use Print online , you must have at least one printing service configuration file installed. The files can be obtained from printing service providers that suppo rt Print online . For more information on the application, see www.nseries.com/support or your local Nokia website.
Gallery 51 Share online With Share online , you can share images and video clips in compatible online albums, weblogs, or in other compatible online sharing services on the web. You can upload content, save unfinished posts as drafts and continue later, and view the content of the albums. The supported content types may vary depending on the service provider. To use Share online , you must subscribe to the service with an online image sharing service provider, and create a new account. You can usually subscribe to the service on the web page of the service pr ovider. Contact your service provider for details on subsc ribing to the service. For more information on compatible service providers, see the product support pages at www.nseries.com/support or your local Nokia website. For more information on the application, see www.nseries.com/support or your local Nokia website. Home network with Gallery With UPnP architecture and wireless local area network (WLAN) you can create a home network of compatible devices. Home network enables you to view content st ored in your Nokia N81 remote ly on a compatible device. You can also copy files between your Nokia N81 and a compatible UPnP enabled device. For more information, see âÂÂHome networkâÂÂ, p.77 and âÂÂHome network with music playerâÂÂ, p. 21. Show media files stored in your device To select images, videos, and sound clips stored in your device, and show them in an other home network device, such as a compatible TV, do the following: 1 In Ga llery , select an image, a video c lip, or a sound clip. 2 Select Options > Show via home network . 3 Select a compatible device in which the media file is shown. The images are shown both in th e other home network device and your devic e, and the video clips and sound clips are played only in the other device. To print images saved in Gallery through Ho me media with a UPnP compatible printer, select the print option in Gallery . See âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 49. Content sharin g does not have to be switched on. To search files with different criteria, select Options > Find . To sort the found files, select Options > So rt by . Copy media files To copy or transfer media file s from your device to another compatible device, such as a UPnP compatible PC, select a file in Gallery and Options > Move and copy > Copy to
Gallery 52 home network or Move to home net. . Content sharing does not have to be switched on. To copy or transfer files from the other device to your device, select a file in the other device and Options > Copy to > Phone me mory or Mass memory . Content sharing does not have to be switched on.
Camera 53 Camera Your Nokia N81 has two cameras, a high r esolution camera on the back of the device (the main camera in landscape mode) and a lower resolution camera on the front (the secondary camera in portrait mode). You can use both cameras to take still pict ures and record videos. Your device supports an image capture resolution of 1600x1200 pixels using the main camera. The ima ge resolution in this guid e may appear different. The images and video clips ar e automatically saved in the Images & v ids. folder in Gallery . The cameras produc e .jpeg images. Video clips are re corded in the MPEG-4 file format with the .mp4 file extension, or in the 3GPP file format with the .3gp file extension ( sharing quality). See âÂÂVideo settingsâÂÂ, p. 61. You can send images and video clips in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachme nt, or by using Bluetooth connectivity or wireless LAN connection. You can also upload them to your compatible online album. See âÂÂShare onlineâÂÂ, p. 51. Take pictures When taking a picture, note the following: ⢠Use both hands to keep the camera still. ⢠The quality of a digitally z oomed picture is lower than that of a nonzoomed picture. ⢠The camera goes into the batte ry sa ving mode if ther e are no keypresses for a mo ment. To continue taking pictures, press . To take a picture, do the following: 1 To activate the main camera, press and hold . If the camera is in Video mode , select Switch to image mode from the active toolbar. 2 To take a picture, in the main camera, press . Do not move the devic e before the image is saved. To zoom in or out, use the volume key in your device. To make lighting and color adjustments before taking a picture, use the scroll key to scroll through the active toolbar. See âÂÂAdjust color and lightingâÂÂ, p. 56. Saving the captured image may take longer if you change the zoom, lighting, or color settings.
Camera 54 To activate the front camera, select Options > Use secondary camera . To take a picture, press . To zoom in or out, press or . To leave the camera open in the background, and use other applications, press . To return to the camera, press and hold . Still image camera indicators The still image camera viewfinder d isplays the following: 1 The current capture mode indicator. 2 The active toolbar, .See âÂÂActive toolbarâÂÂ, p. 54. 3 Battery charge level indicator. 4 The image resolution indicator indicates whether the quality of the image is Print 2M - Large , Print 1M - Medium , or MMS 0.3M - S mall . 5 The image counter displays the estimated number of images you can capture using the current image quality setting and memory in use (the counter is not displayed during image capture). 6 The device memory ( ) and mass memor y ( ) indicators shows where images are saved. Active toolbar The active toolbar provides yo u with shortcuts to different items and settings before and after taking a picture or recording a video. Scroll to items, and select them by pressing . You c an also defi ne when the activ e toolbar is visible on the display. If you want the active toolbar to be visible before and after taking a picture or recording a video, select Options > Show icons . To view the active toolbar only when you need it, select Options > Hide icons . Only the capture mode and battery level indicators are shown on the display. To activate the active toolbar, press . The toolbar is visible for 5 seconds. Before taking a pic ture or reco rding a video, in the active toolbar, select from the following: to select the scene to select the flash mode (images only) to activate the self-timer (i mages only). See âÂÂYou in the pictureâÂÂself-timerâÂÂ, p. 58.
Camera 55 to activate the sequence m ode (images only). See âÂÂTake pictures in a sequenceâÂÂ, p. 57. to select a color effect to show or hide the viewfinder grid (images only) to adjust white balance to adjust the exposure co mpensation (images only) to adjust light se nsitivity (images o nly) to switch between the video and image modes The icons change to reflect the current status of th e setting. The available options vary de pending o n the capture mode and view you are in. See also active toolbar opt ions in âÂÂAfter taking a pictureâÂÂ, p. 55, âÂÂAfter recording a vid eoâ , p. 60, and âÂÂActive to olbarâÂÂ, p. 45 in Gallery . After taking a picture After you take the picture, se lect the following from the active toolbar (available only if Show ca ptured image is set to On in still image camera settings): ⢠If you do not want to keep the image, select Delete . ⢠To send the image, press the call key, or select Send . For more information, see âÂÂMessagingâÂÂ, p. 34, âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 72, and âÂÂShare onlineâÂÂ, p. 5 1. This option is not available duri ng an active call. You can also send the image to a call recipient during an active call. Select Send to caller (only available during an active call). ⢠To tag images to the Print Basket for later printing, select Add to Print Basket . ⢠To send the picture to a compatible online album, select Post to (available only if you have set up an account for a compatible online album. See âÂÂShare onlineâÂÂ, p. 51). To use the picture as wallpaper in the active standby, select Options > Set as wallpaper . To set the image as a call image for a contact, select Options > Set as contact call img. . Still image camera settings There are two kinds of settings for the still image camera: active toolbar settings and main settings. To use active toolbar settings, see âÂÂAdjust color and lightingâÂÂ, p. 56. The active to olbar se ttings r eturn to th e default settings after you close the camera, but the main settings remain the same until you change them again. To change the main settings, select Options > Settin gs and from the following:
Camera 56 Image quality â Print 2M - Large (1600x1200 resolution), Print 1M - Medium (1152x864 resolution) or MMS 0.3M - Small (640 x480 resolution). If you want to print the image, select Print 2M - Large or Print 1 M - Medium . To se nd the image through MMS, select MMS 0.3M - Small . These resolutions are only av ailable in the main camera. Add to album âÂÂSelect whethe r you want to save the image to a certain album in the gallery. If you select Yes , a list of available albums opens. Show captured image âÂÂSelect On if you want to see the captured image after it is taken, or Off if you want to continue taking pi ctures immediately. Default image name âÂÂDefine the default name for the captured images. Extended digital zoom (main camera only)â On (continuous) allows the zoom incr ements to be smooth and continuous between digital and extend ed digital zoom, On (paused) allows the zoom increments to pause at the digital and extended digital step point, and Off allows a limited amount of zoom while retaining the image resolution. Capture tone âÂÂSelect the tone you want to hear when you take a picture. Memory in use âÂÂSelect where to store your images. Restore camera se ttings âÂÂSelect Yes to return the defaul t values to the camera settings. Flash The flash is available on ly in the main camera. Keep a safe distance when using the flash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a pict ure. The camera ha s an LED flash fo r low light condition s. The following flash modes are available for the s till image camera: Automatic () , R. eye redu. () , On () , a n d Off () . To change the flash mode, in th e active toolbar, select the desired flash mode. Adjust color and lighting To enable the camera to reproduce colors and lighting more accurately, or to add ef fects to your pictures or videos, use the scroll key to scroll through the active toolbar, and select from the following options: White balance âÂÂSelect the current lighting condition from the list. This allows the camera to reproduce co lors more accurately. Exposure compe nsation (images only)âÂÂIf you are shooting a dark subject against very light background such
Camera 57 as snow, adjust the exposure to 1 or even 2 to compensate the background brightness. For light subjects against dark background, use -1 or -2. Flash mode âÂÂSelect the desired flash mode. See âÂÂFlashâÂÂ, p. 56. Colour ton e âÂÂSelect a color effect from the list. Light sens itivity (images only)âÂÂIn crease the light sensitivity in low light to decrease the risk of getting unsharp or too dark images . Higher sensitivity may increase the graininess of the images. The screen display changes to match any setti ngs you make, so that you see how the change affects the pictures or videos. The available settings va ry dependin g on t he sele cted camera. The setup settings return to the default settings when you close the camera. If you select a new scene, the color and lighting settings are replaced by the selected scene. See âÂÂScenesâÂÂ, p. 57. You can change the setup settings after select ing a scene if needed. Scenes A scene helps you to find the right color and lighting settings for the current environment. The settings of each scene have been set according to a certain style or environment. Scenes are only availabl e in the main camera. In the active toolbar, selec t from the following options: Video scenes Auto ( ) (default) and Night () Image scen es Auto ( ) (default ), User defined () , Portrait () , Landscape () , Night () , a n d Night portrait () . When you take pictures, the default scene is Auto . To make your own scene suitable for a certain environment, scroll to User defined , and select Options > Change . In the user defined scene you can adjust different lighting and color settings. To copy the settings o f another scene, select Based on scene mode and the desired scene. Take pictures in a sequence The sequence mode is availabl e only in the main camera.
Camera 58 To set the camera to take six pictures or more in a sequence (if enough memory is available), in the active toolbar, select Sequence mode > Burst to take six pictures, or the time interv al for taking pictures. The number of pictures taken depends on the available memory. To take six pictures, press . To stop taking pictures, press Cancel . To take more than six pictures, press and hold . To stop taking pictures, release it. The number of pictures taken depends on the available memory. To use a time interval between taking pictures, select Sequence mode and a time interval. To start taking pictures, press . To stop taking pictures before the time ends, press again. After you take the pictures, they are shown in a grid on the display. To view a picture, press t o open it. If you used a time period for taking pictur es, the last ta ken picture is shown o n the di splay. You can also use the sequence mode with the self-timer. When using the self-timer, the maximum number of pictures is six pictures. To return to the sequence mode viewfinder , press . To switch off the sequence mode, in the active toolbar, select Sequence mode > Si ngle shot . You in the pictureâÂÂself-timer The self-timer is available only in the main camera. Use the self-timer to delay the capture so that you can include yourself in the picture. To set the self-timer delay, in the active toolbar, select Self timer > 2 seconds , 10 seconds , or 20 seconds . To ac tivate th e self-timer , select Activate . The de vice beeps when the timer is running. The camera takes the picture after the selected delay elapses. To switch off Self timer , in the active toolbar, select Self timer > Off . Tip! In the active toolbar, select Self timer > 2 seconds to keep your han d steady when taking a picture. Tips on taking good photographs Picture quality Use the appropriate picture quali ty. The camera has three picture quality modes ( Print 2M - Large , Print 1M - Mediu m , or MMS 0.3M - Small ). Use th e High setting to make sure that the camera produc es the best picture quality available. Note howeve r, that better picture quality requires more storage space. For MMS and e-mail attachments it may be necessary to use MM S 0.3M -
Camera 59 Small setting. You can define the quality in Op tions > Settings . Background Use a simple background. For portraits and other pictures with people, avoid having yo ur subject in front of a cluttered, complex background that may distract attention from the subject. Move the camera, or the subject, when these conditions cannot be met. Move the camera closer to the object to take clearer po rtraits. Depth When shooting landscapes and sceneries, add depth to your pictures by placing objects in the foreground. If the foreground object is too close to the camera, it may be blurred. Lighting conditions Changing the source, amount, and direction of light can change photographs dramatica lly. Here are some typical lighting conditions: ⢠Light source behind the subject. Avoid placing y our subject in front of a strong light source. If the light source is behind the subject or visible in the display, the resulting picture may have weak contrast, may be too dark, and may contain unwanted light effects. ⢠Sidelit su bject. Strong side light gives a dramatic effect but may be too harsh, resulting in too much contrast. ⢠Light source in front of the subject. Harsh sunlight may cause the subjects to squint the ir eyes. The contrast may also be too high. ⢠Optima l lightin g is found in situations where ther e is plenty of diffused, soft light available, for example, on a bright, partially cloudy da y or on a sunny day in the shadow of trees. Record videos 1 To activate the main came ra, press and hold . If the camera is in the Image mode , select Switch to video mode from the active toolbar. 2 Press to start recording. In the p ortrait mode, use the scroll ke y for record ing. The record icon is shown and a tone sounds, indicating that recording has started. 3 Select Stop to stop recording. The vi deo clip is automatically saved to the Images & vids. folder of Gallery . See âÂÂGalleryâÂÂ, p. 44. The maximum length of the video clip depends on the available memory. To pause recording at any time, select Pause . The pause icon ( ) blinks on the display. Video recording automatically stops if recordi ng is set to pause and t here
Camera 60 are no keypresses within a minute. Select C ontinue to resume reco rding. To zoom in or out of the subject, press the volume key on the side of the device. In the po rtrait mode, to zoom in or out, press or . To make lighting and color adjustments before recording a video, use the scroll key to scroll through the active toolbar. See âÂÂAdjust color and lightingâÂÂ, p. 56 and âÂÂScenesâÂÂ, p. 57. To activate the front camera, select Options > Use secondary camera . Video capture indicators The video viewfinder displays the following: 1 The current capture mode indicator. 2 The audio mute on indicator. 3 The active toolbar, which you can sc roll through before recording to select different items and se ttings (the toolbar is not displayed during recording). See âÂÂActive toolbarâÂÂ, p. 54. 4 Battery charge level indicator. 5 The video quality indicator indicates whether the quality of the video is High , Normal , or Sharing . 6 The video clip file type. 7 The total available video re cording time. When you are recording, the current vide o length indicator also shows the elapsed time and time remaining. 8 The device memory ( ) and mass memor y ( ) indicators show where videos are saved. To display all viewfinder indicators, select Options > Show icons . Select Hide icons to display only the video status indicators, and during the reco rding, the available record time, zo om bar when z ooming, and the s electio n keys. After recording a video After you record a video clip, select the following from the active toolbar (available only if Sh ow captured video is set to On in Video settings): ⢠To immediat ely play th e video clip you just recorde d, select Play . ⢠If you do not want to keep the video, select Delete . ⢠To send the video clip using multimedia message, e-mail, or Bluetooth connecti vity, press the call key, or select Send . For more information, see âÂÂMessagingâÂÂ, p. 34, âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 72, and âÂÂShare onlineâÂÂ, p. 51. This option is not available during an active call. You may not be able to send video clips
Camera 61 saved in the .mp4 file format in a multimedia message. You can also send the video clip to a call recipient during an active cal l. Select Send t o caller . ⢠To upload the video clip to a compat ible online album, select Post to (available only if you have set up an account for a compatib le online album. See âÂÂShare onlineâÂÂ, p. 51). Video settings There are two kinds of settings for the video recorder: Video setup and main settings. To adjust Video setup settings, see âÂÂAdjust color and lightingâÂÂ, p. 56. The setup settings return to the default settings after you c lose the camera, but the main settings remain the same u ntil you change them again. To cha nge the main settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: Video quality âÂÂSet the quality of the video clip to High (best quality for long term usage and playback on a compatible TV or PC and handset), Normal (standard quality for playback through your handset), or Sharing (limited video clip size to send using a multimedia message). If you want to view the video on a compatible TV or PC, select High , which has QVGA resolution (320x240) and the .mp4 file format. To send the video clip through MMS, select Sharing (QCIF resolution, .3gp file format). The size of the video clip recorded with Sharing is limited to 300 KB (about 20 seconds in dura tion) so that it can be conveniently sent as a multimedia message to a compatible device. Audio recording âÂÂSelect Mute if you do not want to record sound. Add to album âÂÂSelect whether you want to add the recorded video clip to a certain album in Gallery . Select Yes to open a list of available albums. Show captured video âÂÂSelect whether you want the first frame of the recorded video clip to be shown on the display after the recording stops. Select Play from the active toolbar (main camera) or Options > Play (secondary camera) to view the vid eo clip. Default video name âÂÂDefine the default name for the captured video clips. Memory in use âÂÂDefine the default memory store. Restore camera settings âÂÂSelect Yes to return the default values to the camera settings .
Web 62 Web Press , and select Web (net work se rvice). Shortcut: To star t the Web browser, press and hold in the standby mode. With the Web browser, you can view hypertext markup language (HTML) web pages on the internet as originally designed. You can also br owse web pages that use extensible hypertext markup language (XHTML), or the wireless markup language (W ML), and that are designed specifically for mobile devices. With Web , you can zoom in and out on a page, use Min i Map and Page Overview to navi gate on pages, read web feeds and blogs, bookmark web pages, and download content. Check the availability of services, pricing, and fees with your service provider. Service providers will also giv e you instructions on how to use their services. To use the Web browser, you need an a ccess point to connect to th e internet. See âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 121. Browse the web To browse a web page, in the bookmarks v iew, select a bookmark, or enter the address in the field ( ). Then press . To open links and make selections, press . To enter a new web page address you want to visit, select Options > Go to web address . Tip! To visit a web page saved as a bookmark in the bookmarks view, while browsing, press and select a bookmark. To retrieve the latest content of the page from the server, select Options > Navigation options > Rel oad . To save the web address of th e current page as a bookmark, select Options > Save as bookmark . To use visual history to view snapshots of the p ages you have visited during the current browsing session, select Back (avail able if History list is set on in the browser settings and the current page is not the first page you visit). To go to a previously visited page, select the page. To save a page while browsing, select Options > Tools > Save page .
Web 63 You can save pages and browse them later, when offline. You can also group these saved pages into folders. To access the pages you have saved, sele ct Options > Bookmarks > Saved pages . To open a sublist of commands or actions for the currently open page, select Options > Service options (if supported by the web page). Shortcuts while browsing ⢠Press to open your bookmarks. ⢠Press to search for keyw ords in the current page. ⢠Press to return to the previous pag e. ⢠Press to list all open windows. ⢠Press to close the current window if two or more windows are open. ⢠Press to show the page overview of the current page. Press again to zoom in and view the desired section of the page. ⢠Press to enter a new web address. ⢠Press to go to the start page. ⢠Press or to zoom the page in or out. Text search To search for keywords within the current web pag e, select Options > Find > Text , and enter a keyword. To go to the previous match, press . To go to the next match, press . Tip! You ca n also search for ke ywords within the page by pressing .. Toolbar in the browser With the toolbar, you can sele ct the most frequently used features in the browser. To ope n the toolbar, press and hold on an empty spot on a we b page. To move within the toolbar, press or , To select a feature, press . In the toolbar, select from the following: ⢠Frequently u sed links to view a list of the web addresses you visi t frequently ⢠Page overview to vie w the overview of the current web page ⢠Find to search for keywords within the current page ⢠Reload to refresh the page ⢠Subscribe to web f eeds (if av ailable) to view a list of available web feeds on the current web page, and subscribe to a web feed Download and purchase items You can download items such a s ringing tones, images, operator logos, themes, and vide o clips. These items can be provided free of charge, or you can purchase them. Downloaded items are handled by the respective applications in your device; for example, a downloaded photo can be saved in Gallery .
Web 64 Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sour ces, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or ha ve passed the Java Verified TM testing. 1 To download the item, select the link. 2 Select the appropriate option to purchase the item (for example, âÂÂBuyâÂÂ). 3 Carefully read all the information provided. To continue the download, select Accept . To cancel the download, select Cancel . When you start a download, a list of ongoing and completed downloads from the cu rrent browsing session is displayed. To view the list, select Options > Downloads . In the list, scroll to an item, and select Options to cancel ongoing downloads, o r open, save, or delete completed downloads. Mini Map Mini Map helps you to navigate on web pages that contain a large amount of informa tion. When Min i Map is set on in the browser settings and you scroll through a large web page, Mini Map opens and shows an overview of the web page you browse. To move on Mi ni Map , press , , , or . When you find the desired location, stop scrolling; Mini Map disappears, leaving you to t he selected spot. To set Mini Map on, select Options > Settings > General > Mini Map > On . Page overview When you are browsing a web page that contains a large amount of information, you ca n use Page Overview to view what kind of information the page contains. To show the page overview of the current page, press . To find the desired spot on the page, press , , , or . Press again to zoom in and view the desired section of the page. Web feeds and blogs Web feeds are xml files on web pages that are used by the weblog community and news organizations to share the latest headlines or text, for example , news feeds. Blogs or weblogs are web diaries. Most of the web feeds use RSS and ATOM technologies. It is common to find web feeds on web, blog, and wiki pages. The Web browser automatically detects if a web page contains web feeds. To subscribe to a web f eed, select Options > Subscribe . To view the web feeds you have subscribed to, in the bookmarks view, select Web feeds . To update a web feed, select it, and select Options > Refresh .
Web 65 To define how the web feeds are updated, select Options > Settings > Web feeds . See âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p. 66. Connection security If the security indicator is displayed during a connection, the data transmis sion between the device and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does no t indicate that the d ata transmission between the gate way and the content server (or place where the reque sted re source is stored) is secure. The service provider secures the data transmission between the gateway and the content server. Security certificates may be required for some services, such as banking services. You ar e notified if the identity o f the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. See also âÂÂCertificate managementâÂÂ, p. 116 for more information on the certificates and certificate details. Bookmarks view The bookmarks view allows yo u to select web addresses from a list, or from a coll ection of bookmarks in the Auto. Bookmarks folder. You can also enter the URL address of the web page you want to visit directly into the field ( ). indicates the starting page defined for the default access point . You can save URL addresses as bookmarks while browsing on the internet. You can also save addresses received in messages to your bookmarks, and send saved bookmarks. To open the bookmarks view while browsing, press , or select Option s > Bookmarks . To edit the details of a bookmark, such as the title, select Options > Bookmark manager > Edit . In the bookmarks view, you can also enter other browser folders. The Web browser allows y ou to save web pages during browsing. In the Saved pages folder, you can view the content of the pages you have saved offline. The Web browser also keeps track of the web pages you visit during browsing. In the Auto. Bookmarks folder, you can view the list of visited web pages. In Web Feeds , you can view saved links to web feeds and blogs you have subscribed to. Web feeds are commonly found on major news organiza tion web pag es, personal weblogs, online communities that offer latest headlines, and article summaries. Web feeds use RSS and ATOM technologies.
Web 66 End connection To end the connection and view the browser page offline, select Op tions > Tools > Disconnect , or to end the connection and close the browser, select Options > Exit . Pressing the end key does not end the connection but takes the browser to the background. To delete the information th e network server coll ects about your visits to various web pages, select Options > Clear privacy data > Delete cookies . Empty the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the device. A cache is a memory location that is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information re quiring passwords, empty t he cache after each use. The info rmation or services you have accessed are stored in the cache. To empty the cache, select Op tions > Clear privacy data > Clear cache . Settings Select Options > Settings and from the following: General settings Access point âÂÂChange the default access point. See âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 120. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Homepage âÂÂDefine the home page. Mini Map âÂÂS et Mini Map on or off. See âÂÂMini MapâÂÂ, p. 64. History list âÂÂWhile browsing, to select Back to see a list of the pages you have visited during the current browsing session, set History list on. Security warnings âÂÂHide or show sec urity notific ations. Java/ECMA script âÂÂEnable or disable the use of script s. Page settings Load content âÂÂS elect whether you want to load images and other objects while browsing. If you select Text only , to load images or objects la ter during browsing, select Options > Tools > Load im ages . Screen size âÂÂSelect between the Full screen view and the normal view with the Options list. Default encodin g âÂÂIf text charac ters are not s hown correctly, you can select another encoding according to language for the current page. Font size âÂÂDefine the font size that is used fo r web pages. Block pop-ups âÂÂAllow or block automatic opening of different pop-ups while browsing.
Web 67 Automatic reload âÂÂIf you want the web pages to be refreshed automatically while browsing, select On . Privacy settings Auto. bookmarks âÂÂEnable or disable automatic bookmark collecting. If you want to cont inue saving the add resses of the visited web pages into the Auto. Bookmarks folder, but hide the folder from the bookmarks view, select Hide folder . Form data saving âÂÂIf you do not want the data you enter into different forms on a web page to be saved and used the next time you open the page, select Off . Cookies âÂÂEnable or disable the re ceiving and s ending of cookies. Web feeds settings Automatic updates âÂÂDefine whether you want the web feeds to be updated automatically or not, how often you want to update them and whic h connection to use. Settin g the application to retrieve web feeds automatically may involve the transmission of la rge amounts of data through your service provider's netw ork. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transmission charges. Acc. point fo r auto-update (only av ailable when Automatic updates is on)âÂÂChange the access point for auto-update.
Tools 68 Tools File manager To browse file s and folders, press , and sele ct Tools > File mgr. . The device memory view ( ) opens. Press to open the mass memory view ( ). To find a file, select Optio ns > Find and the memory from which to search. En ter a search text that matches the file name. To view what types of data yo u have in the device and how much memory the different da ta types consume, select Options > Memory details . The amount of available free memory is shown in Free memory . Memory lowâÂÂfree memory Many features of the device use memory to store data. The device notifies you if the memory is low. To free device memory, tr ansfer data to a compatible PC. To remove data to free memory, use File manager to delete files you no longer need, or go to the respective application. For exampl e, you can remove the following: ⢠Messages in the folders in Messagin g and retrieved e-mail messages from the mailbox ⢠Saved web pages ⢠Contact informa tion ⢠Calendar notes ⢠Applications shown in App. manager that you do not need Mass memory tool To monitor the amount of used and free space in the device mass memory, press , and select Tools > Utilities > Memory . To see how much disc space the different applications and data types us e, select Options > Memory details . To change the name of the mass memory, select Options > Mass memory name . To back up information from the device memory to the mass memory, select Options > Back up phone memory . To restore info rmation from th e mass memory to th e device memory, select Options > Rest. from mass mem. . Format mass memory When mass memory is reforma tted, all data in the memory is permanently lost. Ba ck up data you want to keep before
Tools 69 formatting the mass memory. You ca n use Nokia Nseries PC Suite to back up data to a compatible PC. Digital rights management technologies (D RM) may prevent some back- up data from being restored. Contact your service provider for more information about DRM use d for your content. See also âÂÂDigital rights mana gementâÂÂ, p. 109. To format mass memory, select Options > Format mass memory . Select Yes to confirm. Formatting does not guar antee that all confidential data stored in the device mass memor y is permanently destroyed. Standard formatti ng only marks the formatted area as available space and deletes the address to find the files again. The recove ry of formatted or even overwritten data may still be possible with special recovery tools and software. Voice commands You can use voice comman ds to control yo ur device. Fo r more information about the enhanced voice comman ds supported by your device, see âÂÂVoice dialingâÂÂ, p. 90. To activate enhanced vo ice commands for sta rting applications and profiles, you must open the Voice comm. application and its Profiles folder. Press , and select Tools > Utilities > Voice comm. > Profiles ; the device creates voice tags for the applications and profiles. To use enhanced voice commands, press and hold the right selection key in the standby mode, and say a voice command. The voice command is the nam e of the application or profile displayed in the list. To add more applications t o the list, select Options > New application . To add a second voice command that can be used to start the application, select Options > Change command , and enter the new voice command as text. Avoid very short names, abbreviations, and acronyms. To listen to the synthesized v oice tag, select Options > Playback . To change voice c ommand settings, select Op tions > Settings . To switch off the synthesizer that play s recognized voice tags and commands in th e selected device lang uage, select Synthesiser > Off . To reset voice recognition learning, for example, when the main user of the device has changed, select Remove voice adapts. .
Connections 70 Connections Wireless LAN Your device supports wireless local area network (wireless LAN). With wireless LAN, you can connect your device to the internet and compatible devices that have wireless LAN. For information about usin g your device with other compatible UPnP devices through wireless LAN, see âÂÂHome network with GalleryâÂÂ, p. 51 and âÂÂHome network with music playerâÂÂ, p. 21. To use wireless LAN, a wireless LAN must be available in the location and your device must be co nnected to the wireless LAN. Some places, like France, have re strictions on the use of wireless LAN. Check with your local authorities for more information. Features using wireless LAN, or allowing such featur es to run in the background while us ing other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. Your device supports the follo wing wireless LAN features: ⢠IEEE 802.11b/g sta ndard ⢠Operation at a frequency of 2.4 GHz ⢠Wired equivalent privacy (WEP) with keys up to 128 bits, Wi-Fi protected access (WPA), and 802.1x encryption methods. These functions can be used only if they are supported by the network. Wireless LAN connections To use wireless LAN, you must create an internet access point (IAP) in a wireless LAN . Use the access point for applications that need to connect to the internet . See âÂÂWireless LAN access pointsâÂÂ, p. 71. Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increa se the security of your wireless LAN connection. Using encryp tion reduces the risk of unaut horized ac ce ss to y our data. A wireless LAN connection is established when you cr eate a data connection using a wi reless LAN internet access point. The active wireless LAN connection ends when you close the last application usin g the connection. To end all the connections simultaneously, see âÂÂConnection managerâÂÂ, p. 75. You can use wireless LA N duri ng a voice call or when packet data is active. Yo u ca n only be connected to one wireless LAN a ccess point devi ce at a time, but severa l applications can use the sa me internet access point.
Connections 71 When the device is in the Offline profile, you can still use wireless LAN (if available). Re member to comply with any applicable safety requiremen ts when establishing and using a wireless LAN connection. Tip! To check the unique media access control (M AC) address that identifies your device, enter *#62209526# in the standby mode. WLAN wizard The WLAN wizard helps you to c onnect to a wireless LAN and manage your wireless LAN connections. The WLAN wizard s hows the status of your wir eless LAN connections in the active standby mode. To view the available options, scroll to the row showing the status, and press . If the search finds wire less LANs, and for example, WLAN network found is displayed, to auto mat ically create an IAP and start the web browser using this IAP, select the status, Start Web browsing , and the network. If you select a secured wireless LAN network, you are asked to enter the relevant passcodes. To connect to a hidden network, you must enter the correct network name (service set identifier, SSID). To create a new access point for a hidden WLAN, select New WLAN . After entering the required data, the connection is automatically tested. If you are connected to a wireless LAN, the IAP name is displayed. To start the web br owser using this IAP, select the status and Continue Web browsing . T o end the connection in the wireless LAN, select the status and Disconnect WLAN . If wireless LAN scanning is of f and you are not connected to any wireless LAN, WLAN scanning off is displayed. To set scanning o n and search for avail able wireless LANs, scroll to the row showing the status, and press . To start a search for available wireless LANs , select a status and Search for WLAN . To set wireless LAN scanning off, select a sta tus and WLAN scanning off . To access the WLAN wizard in the men u, press , and select To ols > WLAN wiz. . Wireless LAN access points To search for wireless LANs available within range, press , and selec t Tools > WLAN wiz. . Select Options and from the fol lowing: Filter WLAN networks âÂÂto filter out wireless LANs in the list of found networks. The selected networks are filtered out the next time the application searches for wireless LANs. Details âÂÂto view the details of a network shown in the list. If you selec t an active connection, t he connecti on detai ls are displayed.
Connections 72 Define access point âÂÂto create an IAP in a wireless LAN Edit access point âÂÂto edit the details of an existing IAP You can also use Conn. mgr. to create IAPs. Operating modes There are two operating modes in wireless LAN: infrastruc ture and ad hoc. The infrastructure operating mode allows two kinds of communication: wireless devices are connected to each other through a wireless LAN access point d evice, or wireless devices are connected to a wired LAN through a wireless LAN access p oint device. In the ad hoc operating mode, devices can send and receive data directly with each other. To create an internet access point for an ad hoc network, see âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 121. Bluetooth connectivity You can connect wirelessly to other compatible devices with Bluetooth connectivity. Compat ible devices may include mobile phones, computers, and enhancements such as head sets and ca r kits. You can use Bluetooth connectivity to send images, video clips, music and sound clips, and notes; connect wirelessly to your compatible PC (for example, to transfer files); con nect to a compatible printer to print images with Image print . See âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 49. The two devices need to be within 10 meters (33 feet) of each other, but the connecti on may be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant w ith Bluetooth Specification 2.0 supporting the following profiles: Advanced Audio Distribution Profile, Basic Imaging Profile, Dial-up Networking Profile, File Transfer Profile, Generic Object Exchange Profile, Gen eric Access Profile, Hands-Free Profile, Headset Profile, Object Push Profile, and Serial Port Profile. To ensure interope rability between other devices supporting Bluetooth connectivit y, use Nokia approved enhancements for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other de vices to determine their compatibility with this device. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth connectivity in some locations. Check with your local authorities or service provider. Features using Bluetooth conne ctivity, or allowing such features to run in the background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life.
Connections 73 When the device is locked, you cannot use Bluetooth connectivity. See âÂÂPhone and SIM cardâÂÂ, p. 114 for more information on locking the device. Settings Press , and select Tools > Bluetooth . When you open the application for the firs t time, you are asked to define a name for your device. Select from the following: Blueto oth âÂÂTo connect wirelessly to another compatible device, first set Bluetooth connectivity On , then establish a connection. To switch off Bl uetooth connectivity, select Off . My phone's vi sibility âÂÂTo allow your device to be found by other devices with Bluet ooth connectivity, select Shown to all . To set a time after which the visibility is set from shown to hidden, select Define period . To hide your device from other devices, select Hidden . My phone's name âÂÂEdit the name shown to other devices using Bluetooth wireless technology. Remote SIM mode âÂÂTo enable another device, such as a compatible car kit enhancemen t, to use the SIM card in your device to connect to the network, select On . For more information, see âÂÂRemote SIM modeâÂÂ, p. 75. Security tips When you are not using Bluetooth connectivity, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visibility > Hidden . In this way, you can better control who can find your device with Bluetooth connectivity, and connect to it. Do not pair with or accept connect ion requests from an unknown device. In this way, you can better protect your device from harmful conten t. Send data using Bluetooth connectivity Several Bluetooth conne ctions ca n be active at a time. For example, if you are connected to a compatible headse t, you can also transf er files to another compatible device at the same time. For Bluetooth connectivity indicators, see âÂÂEssential indicato rsâÂÂ, p. 72. Tip! To send text using Bluetooth connectivity, open Notes , write the text, and select Opti ons > Send > Via Bluetooth . 1 Open the application where the item you want to send is stored. For example, to send an image to another compatible device, open Gallery . 2 Select the item and Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . Devices with Blueto oth connectivity within range s tart to appear on the display.
Connections 74 Device icons: computer, phone, audio or video device, and other device. To interrupt the search, select Stop . 3 Select the device with which you want to connect. 4 If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds, and you are asked to enter a passco de. See â Pair dev icesâÂÂ, p. 74. 5 When the connection has been established, Sending data is shown. Tip! When searching for devices, some devices may show only the uniq ue address (device address). To find the unique address of your device, enter the code *#2820# in the standby mode. Pair devices To pair with compatible devices and view your paired devices, in the Bluetooth application main view, press . Before pairing, create your ow n passcode (1-16 digits), and agree with the owner of the other device to use the same code. Devices that do not have a user interface have a factory-set passcode. The passcode is used only once. 1 To pair with a device, select Options > New paired device . Devices with Bluetoot h connectivity within range start to appear on the display. 2 Select the device, and enter the passcode. The same passcode must be entered on the other device as well. Some audio enhancements connect automatically to your device after pairing. Otherwise, scroll to the enh ancement, and select Opt ions > Connect to audio device . Paired devices are indicated by in the device se arch. To set a device as authorized or unauthorized, scroll to a device, and select from the following options: Set as authorised âÂÂConnections between your device and this device can be made without your knowledge. No separate acceptance or author ization is needed. Use this status for your own devices, such as your compatible headset or PC, or devices that belong to someone you trust. indicates authorized devices in the paired devices view. Set as unauthorised âÂÂConnection requests from this device must be accept ed separately every time. To cancel a pairing, scroll to the device, and select Options > Delete . If you want to cancel all pairings , select Options > Delete all . Receive data using Bluetooth connectivity When you receive data throug h Bluetooth connectivity, a tone sounds, and you are asked if you wa nt to accept the message. If you accept, is shown , and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging . Messages
Connections 75 received through Bluetooth co nnectivity are indicated by . See âÂÂInboxâÂÂreceive messagesâÂÂ, p. 36. Remote SIM mode To use the remote SIM mode with a compatible car kit enhancement, set Bluetooth connectivity on, and enable the use of the remote SIM mode with your device. See âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p. 73. Before the mode can be act ivated, the two devices must be paired and th e pairing initiated from the other device. When pairing, use a 16-digit passcode, and set the other device as authorized. See âÂÂPair devicesâÂÂ, p. 74. Activate the remote SIM mode from the other device. When remote SIM mode is on in your device, Remote SIM is displayed in the standby mode. The connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indica tor ar ea, and you cannot use SIM card services or features requiring cellular network coverage. When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only use a compatible connected enha ncement, such as a car kit, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not make any calls, excep t to the emergency numbers programmed into your device, while in this mode. To make calls from your device, you mu st firs t leave the remote SIM mode. If the device has been locked, enter the lock code to unlock it first. To leave the remote SIM mode, press the power key, and select Exi t remote SIM mode . Connection manager Data connections Press , and select Tools > Connectivi ty > Conn. mgr. > Active data connections . In the active connectio ns view, you can see the open data co nnections: data calls ( ), high-speed data calls ( ), packet data connections ( ) , and wireless LAN connections ( ). Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary , depending on network features, roundin g off for billing, and so fo rth. To end a connection, select Options > Disconnect . To close all open connections, select Options > Disconnect all . To view the details of a connection, select Options > Details . The details shown depend on the connection type. Wireless LAN To search for wireless LANs available within range, press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Conn. m gr. > Available WLAN networks .
Connections 76 The available wireless LAN vi ew shows a list of wireless LANs within range, their network mode ( Infrastructure or Ad-hoc ), and signal strength indicator. is shown for networks with encryption, an d if your device has an active connection in the network. To view the details of a network, select Options > Details . To create an internet access point in a network, select Options > Define access point . USB Press , and select Tools > Conne ctivity > USB . To have the device ask the purpose of the USB cable connection each time the cable is connected, select Ask on connection > Yes . If Ask on connection is set to off or you want to ch ange the mode during an active connection, select USB mode and from the following: Media player âÂÂto synchronize music with Windows Media Player. See âÂÂMusic transfer with Windows Media PlayerâÂÂ, p. 22. PC Suite âÂÂto use Nokia PC applications such as Nokia Nseries PC Suite, Nokia Lifeblog, and Nokia Sof tware Up dater Data transfer â to transfer data between your device and a compatible PC Image print âÂÂto print images on a compatible printer. See âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 49. PC connections You can use your device with a varie ty of compatible PC connectivity and data communications app lications. With Nokia Nseries PC Suite you can, for e xample, transfer images between your device and a compatible PC. Always create the connection from the PC to synchronize with your device. Device manager Software updates You may view and update the current software ver sion of your device, and check the date of a possible previous update (n etwork s ervice). Press , and select Tools > Utilities > Device mgr. . To check whether softwar e u pdates are available, select Options > Check for updates . Select an internet access point when asked.
Connections 77 If an update is available, info rmation ab out it is displayed. Select Accept to accept to download the updat e or Cancel to cancel the download. The download may take several minutes. You can use your device during the down load. Downloading software updates may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Co ntact your servic e provider for information about data transmission charges. Make sure that the device ba ttery has enough power, or connect the charger before starting the update. Warning: If you install a software update, you cannot use the device, even to make emergency calls, until the installation is completed and the device is restarted. Be sure t o back up data before accepting installation of an update. When the download is complete, select Yes and then Accept to install the update, or No to install it later by using Options > Install update . The installation may take several minutes. The device updates the software and restarts. To complete the update, select OK . When asked, select an internet access point. Y our device sen ds the software updat e status to the server. To view the server profile settings used for softwar e updates, select Option s > Settings . Server profiles Press , selec t Tools > Utilities > Device mgr. , and press . You may receive server profiles and different configuration settings from your service pr oviders and company information management department. These configuration settings may in clude connection and other settings used by different a pplicatio ns in your device. Scroll to a server profile, and select Optio ns and from the following: Start configuration âÂÂto connect to the server and receive configuration settings for your device New server profil e âÂÂto create a server profile To delete a server profile, scroll to it, and press . Home network Your device is compatible with UPnP architecture. Using a wireless LAN acc ess point device or a wirele ss LAN router, you can create a home network and connect compa tible UPnP devices that support wire less LAN to the network, such as your Noki a N81, a compatible PC, a com patible printer, and a compatible sound system or TV, or a sound system or TV equipped with a compatible wireless multimedia receiver.
Connections 78 Using the wireless LAN function of the No kia N81 in a home network requires a working wireless LAN home connection setup and the other target home devices to be UPnP enabled and to be connected to the same home network. The home network uses the security settings of the wireless LAN connection. Use the home network feature in a wireless LAN infrastructure network with a wireless LAN access point device and encryption enabled. You can share medi a files saved i n Gallery with othe r compatible UPnP devices using the home network. To manage your Home network settings, press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Settings . You can also use the home network to view, play, copy, or print compatible media files from Gallery . See âÂÂView and share media filesâÂÂ, p. 79. Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increa se the security of your wireless LAN connection. Using encryption reduces the risk of unauthorized access to your data. Your device is connected to the home network only if you accept a connection request from another compatible device, or in Gallery , select the option to view, play, print, or copy media files on your Nokia N81. Important security information When you co nfigure your wir eless LAN ho me network, enable an encryption method on your access point device, then on the other devices you intend to connect to your home network. Refer to the documentation of the devices. Keep any passcodes secret and in a safe place separate from the devices. To view or change the settings of the wireless LAN in ternet access point in your device , see âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 121. If you use the ad hoc operating mode to create a home network with a compatible device, enable one of the encryption methods in WLAN security mode when you configure the internet access point. This step reduce s the risk of an unwanted party joinin g the ad hoc network. Your device notifies you if an other device attempts to connect to it and the home network. Do not accept connection requests from an unknown device. If you use wireless LAN in a network that does not have encryption, switch off sharing Nokia N81 files with other devices, or do not share any priv ate media files. To change sharing settings, see âÂÂHom e media settingsâ , p. 78. Home media settings To share media files with other compatible UPnP devi ces through wir eless LAN, you m ust create and configure your
Connections 79 wireless LAN home interne t access point, then configure the Home me dia application. See âÂÂWireless LANâÂÂ, p. 70 and the wireless LAN settings in âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 121. The options related to Home network in applications are not available before the Home network settings have been configured. When you access the home media application for the first time, the setup wizard opens, and helps y ou to define the home media settings for your device. To use the setup wizard later, in the home network main view, select Options > Run wizard , and follow the instructions on the display. To connect a compatible PC to the home network, on the PC, you must install the related software from the DVD-ROM supplied with your device. Configure settings To configure the home media application, select Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Settings and from the following: Home access point âÂÂSelec t Always ask if you want the device to as k for the home access point ev ery time you connect to the home network, Create new to define a new access point that is used automatically when you use Home media , or None . If your home network does not have wireless LAN security settings enabled, you get a security warning. You can continue, and switch the wireless LAN security on later; or ca ncel defining the access point, and first switch on the wireless LAN security. See Wireless LAN in âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 121. Device name â Enter a name for your device that is shown to the other compatible devices in the home network. Set sharing on and define content Select Tools > Connectivity > Home me dia > Share content . Content sharing âÂÂAllow or deny sharing media files with compatible devices. Do not set Content sharing on before you have configured all the other settings. If you set Content sharing on, the other UPnP compatible devices in the home network ca n view and copy your files you have selected for sharing in the Images & vid eo and Music folders. Images & video and Music âÂÂSelect media files for sharing with other devices, or vi ew the sharing status of Images & video and Music . To update the content of the folders, select Option s > Refresh content . View and share media files If Content sh aring is on in your device, the other UPnP compatible devices in the home network can view and copy the media files you have selected to share in Share content . If you do not want the other devices to access
Connections 80 your files, set Content sharing off. Even if Content sharing is off in your device, you can still view and copy the media files stored in another home network device if it is allowed by the other device. For more information, see âÂÂHome network with GalleryâÂÂ, p. 51 and âÂÂHome network with music playerâÂÂ, p. 21. Wireless Keyboard To set up a Nokia Wireless Keyboard or other compatible wireless keyboard supporting the Bluetooth Human Interface Devices (HID ) profile for use with your device, use the Wireless keyb d. application. The keyboard enables you to enter text in comfort, us ing the full QWER TY layout, for text messages, e-mail, and calendar entries. 1 Activate Bluetooth c onnectivity on your device. 2 Switch on the keyboard. 3 Press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Wireless keybd. . 4 Select Optio ns > Find keyboard to start searching for devices with Bluetooth connectivity. 5 Select the keyboard from th e list, and press to start the connection. 6 To pair the keyboard with yo ur device , enter a passcode of your choice (1 to 9 digits) o n the device and the same passcode on your keyboard. To enter the digits of the passcode, you may need to press the Fn key first. 7 If you are asked for a keyboard layout, select it fro m a list on your device. 8 When the name of the keyboard appears, its status changes to Keyboard connected , and the green indicator of your keyboard blinks slowly; the keyboard is ready for use. For details on the operation and maintenance of your keyboard, see its user guide. Synchronization Sync enables you to synchronize your notes, calendar, text messages, or contacts with v arious compatible applications on a compatible computer or on the internet. You may receive synchronization settings in a special message. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 37. In the Sync main view, you can see the different synchronization profiles. A sy nchronization profile contains the necessary settings to synchronize data in your device with a remote database on a server or compatible device. 1 Press , and select Tools > Sync .
Connections 81 2 Select a synchronization profile and Options > Synchronise . To cancel synchronization before it finishes, select Cancel .
Personalize your device 82 Personalize your device To personalize your device, select from the following: ⢠To use the standby display for fast access to your most frequently used applications, see âÂÂActive standbyâÂÂ, p. 84. ⢠To change the standby mode background image, see âÂÂChange the look of your deviceâÂÂ, p. 84. ⢠To customize the ringing tones, see âÂÂProfilesâÂÂset tonesâÂÂ, p. 82 and âÂÂAdd ringing tones for contactsâÂÂ, p. 33. ⢠To change the shortcuts assigned for the different presses of the scroll key and left and right selection keys in the standby mode, see âÂÂStandby modeâÂÂ, p. 113. ⢠To change the clock shown in the standby mode, press , and select Applications > Cl ock > Options > Settings > Clock type > An alogue or Digital . ⢠To change the welcome note to an image or animation, press , and sel ect T ools > Se ttings > General > Personalisation > Display > Welcome note / logo . ⢠To change the look of the menu display, in the main menu, select Options > Change Menu view . ⢠To rearrange the main menu, in the main menu, select Options > Move , M ove to folder , or New fo lder . You can move less used applications into folders and place applications that yo u use more often into the main menu. ⢠To arrange the tiles in the multimedia menu, press , and select Options > Arrange tiles . ProfilesâÂÂset tones To set and customize the ringing tones, message alert tones, and other tones for different events, environments, or caller groups, press , and select Tools > Profiles . To change the profile, select Tools > Profiles , a profile, and Options > Activate . You can also change the profile by pressing in the standby mode. Scroll to the profil e you want to activate, and select OK . Tip! To switch between th e ge neral and silent profiles, press an d hold . To modify a profile, press , and select Tools > Profiles . Scroll to the profile, and select Options > Personalise . Scroll to the setting you want to change, and press to open the choices. Tones stored on the mass memory are indicated with . When you choose a tone from a list, the Download sounds link (network service) opens a list of bookmarks. You can select a bookmark and start connection to a web page to download tones.
Personalize your device 83 If you want the callerâÂÂs name to be spoken w hen your device rings, select Options > Perso nalise , and set Say caller's name to On . The callerâÂÂs name must be saved in Contacts . To create a new profile, select Options > Create new . Offline profile The Offline profile lets you use the device without connecting to the wireless netw ork. When you activate the Offline profile, the connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator area. All wireless RF signals to and from the device are prevente d. If you try to send messages, they are placed in the outbox to be sent later. When the Offline profile is active, you can us e your device without a (U)SIM card. Important : In the offline profile you cannot make or receive any ca lls, or use other features that require cellular network coverage. Cal ls may still be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To make calls, you must first activa te the phone function by changing profiles. If the devi ce has been locked, enter the lock code. When you have activated the Offline profile, you can still use the wireless LAN, for example, to r ead your e-mail or browse on the internet. Remember to comply with any applicable safety requiremen ts when establishing and using a wireless LAN connection. See âÂÂWireless LANâÂÂ, p. 70. You can also use Bluetooth connectivity while in the Offline profile. See âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 72. To leave the Offline profile, press the power key, and select another profile. The device re-enables wireless transmissions (providing there is sufficient signal strength). 3-D tones Press , and select Tools > Utilities > 3-D tones . With 3- D tones you can enable three-dimensional sound effects for ringing tones. Not all ringing tones suppor t 3-D effects. To enable the 3-D effects, select 3-D ring ing tone effects > On . To change the 3âÂÂD effect that is applied to the ri nging tone, sel ect Sound trajectory and the desired effect. To modify the ef fect, sele ct from the follow ing settings: Trajectory speed âÂÂScroll left or right to adjust the speed at which sound moves from one direction to another. This setting is not available for all ringing tones . Reverberatio n âÂÂSelect the type of echo.
Personalize your device 84 Doppler effect âÂÂSelect On to have the ringing tone sound higher when you are closer to your device, and lower when you are farther away. When you get clos er to the devi ce, the ringing tone seems to become higher, and lower when you move away from it. The Doppler effect is not available for all sound trajectories. To listen to the ringing tone with the 3âÂÂD effect, select Options > Play tone . If you enable the 3-D tones but do not select any 3-D effect, stereo widening is applied to the r inging tone. To adjust the ringing tone volume, select Tools > Profiles > Options > Personalise > Ringing volume . Change the look of your device To change the look of the di splay, such as the wallpaper and icons, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Themes . To change the theme that is us ed for all the applications in your device, select Themes > Ge neral . To preview a theme before activating it, select Options > Preview . To activate the theme, select Options > Set . The active theme is indicated by . The themes on the mass memory are indicated by . To change the layout of the main menu, select Themes > Menu view . To open a browser connection and download more themes, in General or Menu view , select Download themes (network service). Important: Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. To edit the wallpaper, select Them es > Wallpaper to change the background image on the display for the activ e standby mode. Active standby The active standby display shows status indicators, widgets, the now playing view, and search. To switch the active standby on or off, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Standby mode > Active standby .
Personalize your device 85 Scroll to an application or event, and press . The standard scroll ke y shortcuts available in the standby mode cannot be used when active standby is on. To change the default applicationsâ shortcuts, pres s , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Standby mode > Active standby apps. . Some shortcuts may be fixed , and you cannot change them.
Make calls 86 Make calls Voice calls 1 In the standby mode, enter the phone number, including the area code. To remove a number, press . For international calls, press twice fo r the character (replaces th e international access code), and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. 2 Press the call key to call the number. 3 Press the end key to end the call (or to can cel the call attempt). Pressing the end ke y always ends a call, even if another a pplication is active. To adjust the volume during a call, use the volume key on the side of your device. You ca n also use the scroll key. If you have set the volume to Mute , select Unmute first. To make a ca ll from Contact s , press , and select Contacts . Scroll to the desired name, or enter the first letters of the name to the search field. Matching contac ts are listed. To call, press the call key. You must copy the contacts from your SIM card to Contacts before you can make a ca ll from Contact s. See âÂÂCopy contactsâÂÂ, p. 32. To call a recently dialed numb er in the standby mode, press the call key. Scroll to the number, and press the call key. To send an image or a video cli p in a multimedia message to the other participant of the call, select Options > Send MMS (in UMTS networ ks only). You can edit the message and change the recipient before sending. Press the call key to send the file to a compatible device (network service). To send DTMF tone strings (for example, a password), select Options > Send DTMF . Enter the DTM F string or search for it in Contacts . To enter a wait character ( w ) or a pause character ( p ), press repeatedl y. Select OK to send the tone. You can add DTMF ton es to the Phone number or DTMF fields in a contact card. To put an active voice call on hold while answering another incoming call, select Options > Hold . To switch between the active and the held c all, select Optio ns > Swap . To connect the active and held calls and drop yourself from the line, sele ct Options > Tran sfer . Tip! When you have only one active voice c all, to put the call on hold, press the ca ll key. To activate the call, press the call key again. During an active call, to ro ute the sound from the handset to the loudspeaker, select Options > Activate
Make calls 87 loudspea ker . If you have attached a compatible headset with Bluetooth connectivity, to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Activ ate handsfree . To switch back to the handset, select Options > Act ivate handset . Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To end an active call and replace it by answering the waiting call, select Options > Replace . If you have several calls acti ve, to end them all, select Options > End all calls . Many of the options that you can use during a voice call are network services. For information on conference calls and voice dialling, see the extended user guide at www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia web site. Internet calls With the internet call service (network service), you can make and receive calls over the internet. To make or receive an internet call, your device must be connected to an internet call service. Press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Internet tel. . To connect to an i nternet call ser vice, your devic e must be in the coverage of a connection network, such a s a wireless LAN access point. Important: Always enable one of th e available encryption methods to increa se the security of your wireless LAN connection. Us ing encryption reduces the risk of unauthorized access to your data . Some places, like France, have restrictions on the use of wireless LAN. Check with your local authorities for more information. Available access points vary according to the service provid er. To connect to the internet cal l service, select an available connection network from the list, and press . The saved networks, which are marked with , are shown first on the list. To stop making the connection, select Cancel . After you have successfully connected to a service, you can save the used wireless LAN network as a known acc ess point. Select Options and from the fol lowing: Connect to service âÂÂt o establish a connection to a service, when there is an internet call service and suitable connection network available. Disconnect from s erv. âÂÂto end to the connection to the internet call service.
Make calls 88 Change service âÂÂto select the internet call service for outgoing calls, if the device is connected to more than one service. This option is shown only if there is more than one configured service available. Configure service âÂÂto configure new services. This option is shown only if there ar e services that have not been configured. Save network âÂÂto save the network you are currently connected to. The previously saved networks are marked with on the list of networks . This option is shown only if you are connected to an unsa ved wireless LAN network. Use hidden network âÂÂto connect to an internet call service using a hidden wireless LAN network. Refresh âÂÂto manually refresh the list of connectio n networks. Use this option if your wireless LAN network is not shown on the list. The list is also refreshed automatically every 15 seconds. Settings âÂÂto change the settings. Exit âÂÂto close the application. The available options may vary. Your device can be connected only to one wireless LAN access point at a time. If you use two or more internet call services, which use the same ac cess point, your device may be connected to multiple services at the same time. The service used for outgoing inte rnet calls is shown where the connection networks are listed; to c hange it, select Change service . When you are connected to an internet call serv ice, is shown in the standby mode. You may have a shortcut for In ternet tel. in the active standby, or you can add it there. By using t he shortcut, you can register manually, if an in ternet call service and access point are available. If you are already connected to an internet call service, the device asks if you want to disconnect from the service. To make an internet call in the standby mode, enter the phone number or internet address and press the call key. To switch between the number and letter mode, press and hold #. To end the call, press th e end key. You can also make an internet call from Contact s and Log . To make a call from Contacts , press and select Contacts , scroll to the des ired contac t, and sel ect Options > Internet call . To make a call from Log , press and select Tools > Log > Recent calls and Missed calls , Received calls or Dialled numbe rs , scroll to the desired contact and select Option s > Internet call . If Internet call is set as the preferred call type, and your device is connected to an internet call service, calls are made as internet calls as default. Your device supports voice ca lls over the internet (net calls). Your device attempts emergency calls primarily over
Make calls 89 cellular networks. If an emergency call using cellular networks is not successful, your device attempts an emergency call through your internet call provider. Due to the established nature of ce llular telephony, you should use cellular networks for emerge ncy calls, if possible. If yo u have cellular network coverage av ailable, make sure that your cellular phone is switched on and ready to make calls before you attempt an emergency call. The capability for an emergency call using intern et telephony depends on the availability of a WLA N netw ork and your internet call provider's implementation of emergency call capabilities. Contact your internet call prov ider to check the internet telephony emergency call capabili ty. Settings To see the settings for the intern et call services, press , and select Tools > Co nnectiv ity > Internet tel. > Settings . To view or choose the preferred call type for outgoing calls, select Options > Change > Default call t ype > Cellular or Interne t call . To open the service settings view of the selected ser vice, select Options > Open . The available options may vary. Service settings Press and selec t Tools > Connectivity > Internet tel. > Options > Settin gs > Se ttings: . To see the settings of the service, select Login type and from the following: Automatic âÂÂTo automatically log in to the internet call service. When a known network is found, the device connects to the internet call service automatically. Manual âÂÂTo manually log in to the internet call service. If you use the automatic login type for wireless LAN networks, the device period ic ally scans for wireless LAN networks, which increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. Select Saved conn . networks to see the connection networks that are recognized by the internet call service. These networks are used for automatic login and are marked with on the list of connection networks. Select Edit service settings to open service-spec ific settings. This option is only av ailable if a service-spec ific software plug-in has been installed in the device. Saved connection networks To view or remove the connection networks you have saved for an internet call service, press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Internet tel . > Settings > Settings: > Saved conn. networ ks . > Options > Open .
Make calls 90 Select Options > Remove to remove a connection network from the service. Voice and video mailboxes To call your voic e or video mailbox (network servi ces, video mailbox available only in the UMTS network), press and hold in the standby mode, and select Voice mailbox or Vide o mailbox . See also âÂÂCall divertâÂÂ, p. 119, and âÂÂVideo callsâÂÂ, p. 91. To change the phone number of your voice or video mailbox, press , and select Tools > Utilities > Call mailbox , a mailbox, and Options > Change number . Enter the number (obtained from your network service provider), and select OK . Make a conference call 1 Make a call to the first participant. 2 To make a call to another participant, select Optio ns > New call . The first call is automatically put on hold. 3 When the new call is answ ered, to join the first participant in the conference call, select Options > Conference . To add a new person to the call, repeat step 2, and select Options > Conference > Add to conference . Your device supports conf erence c alls between a maximum of six participan ts, including yourself. To have a private conver sation with one of the participants, select Options > Conference > Private . Select a participant and Private . The conference call is put on hold on your device . The other participants can still continue the conference call. After you finish the private conversation, select Options > Add to conference to return to the conference call. To drop a part icipant , select Options > Conferen ce > Drop participant , scroll to the participant, and select Drop . 4 To end the active conferen ce call, press the end key. Speed dial a phone number To activat e speed dia ling, p ress , and select Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Speed dialling > On . To assign a phone number to one of the speed dialing keys ( â ), press , and select Tools > Utilities > Speed dial . Scroll to the key to which you want to assign the phone number, and select Options > Assign . is reserved for the voice or video mailbox. To call in the standby mode, press the speed dial key and the send key. Voice dialing Your device supports enhanced voice commands. Enhanced voice commands are not dependent on the
Make calls 91 speakerâÂÂs voice, so the user does not record voice tags in advance. Instead, the device creates a voice tag for the entries in contacts, and compar es the spoken voice tag to it. The voice recognition in the device adapts to the main userâÂÂs voice to recognize the voice comman ds better. The voice tag for a contact is th e name or nickname that is saved on the contact card. To l isten to th e synthesized voice tag, open a contact ca rd, and select Options > Play voice tag . Make a call with a voice tag Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumstances. When you use vo ice dialing, th e loudspeaker is in use. H old the device at a short distan ce away when you say the v oice tag. 1 To start voice dialing, in the standby mode, press and hold the right selection key. If a compatible headset with the headset key is a ttached, press and hold the headset key to s tart voice dialing. 2 A short to ne is play ed, and Speak now is dis played. Say clearly the name or nickname that is saved on the contact card. 3 The device plays a synthesized voice tag for the recognized contact in the selected device language, and displays the name and number. After a timeout of 2.5 seconds, the device dials the number. If the recognized contact was not correct, s elect Next to view a list of other matches or Quit to cancel voice dialin g. If several numbers are saved under the name, the device selects the default number if it has been set. Otherwise the device selects the fi rst availa ble number of the following: Mobile , Mobile (home) , Mobile (business) , Telephone , Tel. (home) , and Te l. (business) . Video calls When you make a video call (network service), yo u can see a real-time, two-way video between you and the recipient of the call. The live video image, or video image captured by the camera in your device is shown to the video call recipient. T o b e a b l e t o m a k e a v i d e o c a l l , y o u m u s t h a v e a U S I M c a r d and be in the coverage of a UM TS network. For av ailability of and subscription to video call services, contact your network service provider. A video call can only be made between two parties. The video call can be made to a compatible mobile device or an ISDN client. Video calls cannot be made while another voice, video, or data call is active.
Make calls 92 Icons: You are not receiving video (the recipient is not sending video or the network is not transmitt ing it). You have denied video sending from your device. Even if you denied video sending during a video call, the call is still charged as a video call. Check the pricing with your service provider. 1 To start a video call, enter the phone number in the standby mode, or select Contacts and a contact. 2 Select Options > Call > Video call . The secondary camera on the front is used by default for video calls. Starting a video call may take a while. Waiting for video image is sho wn. If the call is not successful (for example, video calls are not supported by the network, or the receiving device is not compatible ), you are aske d if yo u want to try a normal call or send a text or multimedia message instead. The video call is active when you see two video images, and hear the sound through the loudspeaker. The call recipient may deny video sending ( ), in which case you only hear the sound and may see a still image or a grey background graphic. To change between showing video or hearing only sound, select Op tions > Enable or Disable > Sending video , Sending audio , or Sending aud. & video . To zoom in or out your own image, press or . To switch the places of the sent video images on the display, select Options > Change image order . To route the audio to a compatible headset with Bluetooth connectivity attached to your device, select Options > Activate hand sfree . To route the audio back to the loudspeake r of your dev ice, selec t Options > A ctivate handset . To adjust the volume during a video call, use the volume key on the side of the device. To use the main camera for sending video, se lect Options > Use main camera . To switch back to the secondary camera, select Options > Use secondary camera . To end the video call, press the end key. Video sharing Use Video sha ring ( n e t w o r k s er v i c e ) t o se n d l i v e v id e o o r a video clip from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. The loudspeaker is acti ve when you activate Video sharing . If you do not want to use the louds peaker for the voice call while you shar e video, you can also use a compatible headset.
Make calls 93 Video sharing requirements Because Video sharing requires a UMTS connection, your ability to use Video sharing depends on the UMTS network availability. Contact you r service provider for mo re information on the service an d network availability, and fees associated with using this service. To use Video sharing you must do the following: ⢠Ensure that your device is set up for person-to-p erson connections. See âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p. 93. ⢠Ensure you have an active UMTS connection and are within UMTS networ k coverage . See âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p. 93. If you start the sharing session while you are within UMTS network coverage and a handover to GSM occurs, the sharing session is discontinued, but your voice call continues. You cannot start Video sharing if you are not within UMTS network coverage. ⢠Ensure that both the sender and recipient are registered to the UMTS netw ork. If you invite someone to a sharing session and the recipientâÂÂs device is not within UMTS network cove rage, or does not have Video sharing installed o r person-to-person connections set up, the recipient does not know that you are sending an invitation. You receive an error message that the recipient cannot accept the invitation. Settings Person-to-person connection settings A person-to-person connection is also known as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) connection. The SIP profile settings must be configured in your device before you can use Video sharing . Ask your service provider for the SIP profile settings, and save them in y our device. Your service provider may send you the settings over the air or give you a list of the needed parameters. If you know a recipientâÂÂs SIP address, you can enter it on the personâÂÂs contact card. Press , select Contacts , and open the con tact card (or sta rt a new card for that person). Select Options > Add detail > SIP or Share view . Enter the SIP address in the format username@domainname (you can use an IP address instead of a domain name). If you do not kn ow a SIP address for the contact, you can also use the phone number of the recipient includ ing the country code, for example 358, to share video (if supported by the network service provider). UMTS connection settings To set up your UMTS connection, do the following: ⢠Contact your service provider to establish an agreement for you to use the UMTS network.
Make calls 94 ⢠Ensure that your UMTS access point connection settings are configured properly. For help, see âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 120. Share live video or video clip 1 When a voice call is act ive, select Options > Share video > Live video , and open the lens cover in the back. To share a video clip, select Options > Share video > Recorded clip . A list of video c lips saved in the device opens. Select a clip you want to share. To preview the clip, select Options > Play . 2 If you share live video, your device sends the invitation to the SIP address you have added to the contact card of the recipient. If you share a video clip, select Options > Invite . You may need to convert the video clip into a suitable format to be able to sh are it. Clip must be converted for sharing. Conti nue? is displayed. Select OK . If the contact information of the recipient is saved in Contacts , and the cont act has se veral SIP ad dresses or phone numbers including the country code, select the desired address or number. If the SIP address or phone number of the recipient is no t available, enter the SIP address or the phone number of the recipient including the country code, and select OK to send the invitation. 3 Sharing begins automatica lly when the recipient accepts the invitation. 4 Select Pause to pause the sharing session. Select Continue to resume sharing. To fast forward or rewind the video clip, press or . To play the clip again, select Play . 5 To end the sharing sessi on, select Stop . To end the voice call, press the end key. Vide o sharing also ends if the active voice call ends. To save the live video you shared, selec t Save to accept the Save shared video clip? query. T he shared video is saved in the Images & videos folder in Gal lery . If you access other applications while you are shar ing a video cli p, the shari ng is paused . To return to th e video sharing view and continue shar ing, in the active standby mode, select Options > Continue . See âÂÂActive standbyâÂÂ, p. 84. Accept an invitation When someone sends you a shar e invitation, an invitation message is displayed showing the senderâÂÂs name or SIP address. If your device is not set to Silent , it rings when you receive an invitation. If someone sends you a share invitation and you ar e not within UMTS network coverage, you will not know that you received an invitation. When you receive an invitation , select from the following:
Make calls 95 Accept âÂÂto activate the sharing session. Reject âÂÂto decline the invitation. The sender receives a message that you rejected th e invitation. You can also press the end key to decline the sharing session and disconnect the voice call. When you are receiving a video clip, to mute the sound of the clip, select Mute . To end video sharing, select Stop . Video sharing also ends if the active voice call ends. Answer or decline a call To answer the call, press the call key, or open the slide. To mute the ringing tone when a call comes in, select Silence . If you do not want to answer a call, press the end key. If you have activated the Call diver t > If busy function to divert calls, declining an incoming call also diverts the call. See âÂÂCall divertâÂÂ, p. 119. When you select Reject to reject an i ncoming call, yo u can send a text message informing the caller that you cannot answer the call. Select Options > Send text message . To set up this option and write a standard text message, see âÂÂCallâÂÂ, p. 118. Answer or reject a video call When a vide o call arrives, is dis played. Press the call key to answer th e video call. Al low video image to be sent to call er? is displayed. To start sending a live video image, select Yes . If you do not activat e the video call, video sending is not activated, and you only hear th e sound of the caller. A grey screen replaces the video image. To replace the grey screen with a still image captured by the camera in your device, see âÂÂCallâÂÂ, Image in video call , p. 118. To end the video call, press the end key. Call waiting You can answer a call while you have another call in progress if you have activated Call waiting in Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Call waitin g (network service). To answer the waiting call, press the call key. The first call is put on hold. To switch between th e two calls, select Swap . To connect an incoming call or a call on hold with an active call and to disconnect yourself from the calls, select Options > Transfer . To end the active call, press the end key. To end both calls, select Options > End all c alls .
Make calls 96 Log To monitor the phone numbers of missed, received, and dialed voice calls, press , and select Tools > Log > Recent calls . The device regi sters missed and received calls only if the ne twork supports these functions, the device is switched on, and within the network service area. To clear all recent call lists, select Optio ns > Clear recent calls in the recent calls main view. To clear one of the c all registers, open the register yo u want to erase, and select Options > Clear list . To clear an individual event, open a register, scroll to the event, and press . Call duration To monitor the approximate duration of your incoming and outgoing calls, press , and select Tools > Log > Call duration . Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. To clear call duration timers, select Options > Clea r timers . For this you need the lock code. See âÂÂPhone and SIM cardâÂÂ, p. 114. Packet data To check the amount of data sent and received during packet data connections, press , and select Tools > Log > Packet data . For example, you may be charged for your packet data connections by the amount of data sent and received. Monitor all communication events Icons in Log are as follows: Incoming Outgoing Missed communication events To monitor all voice calls, text messages, or data and wireless LAN connections registered by the device, press , select Tools > Lo g , and press to open the general log. Subevents, such as a text messa ge sent in more than one part and packet data conne ctions, are logged as one communication event. Connections to your ma ilbox, multimedia messaging center, or web pages are shown as packet data connections. To add an unknown phone number from Log to your contacts, select Options > Save to Contacts . To filter the log, select Options > Filter and a filter.
Make calls 97 To erase the contents of the log, recent calls register, and messaging delivery reports permanently, select Options > Clear l og . Select Yes to confirm. To remove a single event from the log, press . To set the log duration, select Options > Settings > Log duration . If you select No log, all the log contents, recent calls register, and messaging delivery reports are permanently deleted. Tip! In the details view, you can copy a phone number to the clipboard, and paste it to a text message, for example. Select Options > Copy numb er . To view from the packet d ata counter ho w much data i s transferred and how long a cer tain packet data conn ection lasts, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event indicated by Pack. , and select Options > Vi ew details .
Applications 98 Applications Clock Press , and select Applicat ions > Clock . To view your active and inactive alarms, pr ess . To set a new quick alarm, select Opt ions > New quick alarm . When an alarm is active, is shown. Quick alarms are set for the next 24 hours and they cannot be repeated. To turn off the sou nding alarm, selec t Stop . To stop the alarm for 5 minutes, select Snooze . If the alarm time is reached while the device is switched off, the device swi tches itself on and starts soundi ng the alarm tone. If you select Stop , the device asks whether you want to activate the device for calls. Select No to switch off the device or Yes to make a nd receive calls. Do not select Yes when wire less phone use may cause interference or danger. To cancel the next alarm, select Application s > Clock > Options > Remove alarm . To set a new alarm, selec t Application s > Clock , press , and select Options > New alarm . Def ine th e repetition, if needed. To change clock settings, select Applications > Clock > Options > Sett ings . Set time and date, define time and date formats, clock type, or the alarm tone. In Workdays select weekdays for repetition options. To allow the mobile phone ne twork to update the time, date, and time zone information to your device (network service), select Applications > Clock > Options > Settings > Network operator time > Auto-update . World clock To open the world clock vi ew, select Clock , and press twice. In the world clock view, you can view the time in different cities. To add cities to the list, select Options > Add city . You can add a maximum of 15 cities to the list. To set your current city, scroll to a city, and select Options > Set as current city . The city is displayed in the clock main view, and the time in your device is changed according to the city selected. Check that the time is correct and matches your time zone. Calculator Press , and select Applicati ons > Calc ulator .
Applications 99 Note: This calculator has limited accuracy and is designed for simple calculations. Notes To write notes in .txt format, press , and select Applicatio ns > Notes . Application manager Press , and select Applications > App. mgr. . You can install two types of applicat ions and software to your device: ⢠J2ME TM applications based on Java TM technology with the extension .jad or .jar ( ). ⢠Other applications and software suitable for the Symbian operating system ( ) . The installation files have the .sis extension. Only install software specifically designed for your Nokia N81. Software providers will often refer to the official model number of this product: the Nokia N81-1. Installa tion files may be t ransf erred to your device fr om a compatible computer, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using Bluetoot h connectivity. You can use Nokia Application Installer in Nokia Nseries PC Suite to install an application to your device. Install applications and software i ndicates a .sis application, a Java application, that the application is not fu lly installed, and that the application is installed in the mass memory. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trus ted so urces, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Verified TM testing . Before installation, note the foll owing: ⢠To view the application ty pe, version number, and the supplier or manufacturer of the appli cation, select Options > View details . To display the security cert ificate details of the application, in Cer tificates , select View details . See âÂÂCertificate managementâÂÂ, p. 116. ⢠If you install a file that cont ains an update or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original application if you ha ve the original installation file or a full back-up copy of the removed software package. To restore the original application, remove the application, and install the ap plication again from the original installation fi le or the back-up copy. ⢠The .jar file is required for insta lling Java appl ications. If it is missing, the device may ask you to download it. If there is no access poi nt defined for the applicati on, you are asked to select one. When you are downloading
Applications 100 the .jar file, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the server. You obtain these from the supplier or manufactur er of the application. 1 To locate an installation file, press , and select Applications > App. mgr. . Alternatively, search the device memory or the mass memory in File mgr. , or open a message in Messaging > Inbox that contains an installation file. 2 In App. mgr. , select Options > Install . In other applications, scroll to the in stallation file, and press to start the installation. During installation, the device shows information about the progress of the installation. If you are installing an application without a digital signature or certification, the device displays a warning. Continue installation only if you ar e sure of the origin and contents of the application. To start an installed application, lo cate it in the menu, and press . If the application does not have a default folder defined, it is installed in the Applications folder. To see which softwa re packages are installed or removed and when, select Options > View log . Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one application with antivirus functionali ty could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functioning. After you install applications to mass memory, installation files (.sis) remain in the de vice memory. The files may use large amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To maintain sufficient memory, use Nokia Nseries PC Suite to back up installation files to a compatible PC, then use the file manager to remove the installation files from the device memory. Se e âÂÂFile managerâÂÂ, p. 68. If the . sis file is a message attachment, delete the message from the Messaging inbox. Remove applications and software Scroll to a software package, and select Options > Remove . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove software, you can only reinstall it if you have the original software pack age or a full backup of the removed software package. If you remove a soft ware package, you may no longer be able to open documents created with that so ftware. If another software package depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Settings Select Options > Settings and from the following:
Applications 101 Software installat ion âÂÂSelect whether Symbian software that has no verified digital signature can be installed. Online certificate check âÂÂSelect to check the online certificates before in stalling an application. Default web address âÂÂSet the default address used when checking online certifica tes. Some Java applications may re quire a message to be sent or a network connection to a specific access point for downloading extra data or components. In the App. mgr. main view, scroll to an application, and select Options > Open to change settings related to that spec ific application. Calendar Press , and select Applications > Calendar . To add a new calendar entry, scroll to the desired date, select Options > New entry and one of the following: 1 Meeting âÂÂto remind you of an appointment that has a specific date and time Memo âÂÂto write a general entry for a day Anniversary âÂÂto remind you of birthdays or special dates (en tries are repeated every year) To-do âÂÂto remind you of a task that needs doing by a specific date 2 Fill in the fields. To set an alarm, select Alarm > On , and enter the Alarm ti me and Alarm date . To add a description for an appointment, select Options > Add description . 3 To save the entry, select Done . Shortcut: In the day, week, or month calendar view, press any key ( â ). An appointment entry opens, and the characters yo u enter are added to Subjec t . In the to-do view, a to-do note entry opens. When the calendar a larms for a note, select Silence to turn off the calendar a larm tone. Th e r eminder text stays on the screen. To end the calendar alarm, select Stop . To set the alarm to snooze, select Snooze . You can synchronize your calendar with a compatible PC using Nokia Nseries PC Suite. When creating a calendar entry, set the desired Synchronisation option.
Applications 102 Calendar views Select Options > Settings to change the starting day of the week or the view that is shown when you open the calendar. To go to a certain date, select Options > Go to date . To jump to toda y, press . To switch between the month view, week view, day view, and to-do view, press . To send a calendar note to a compatible device, select Options > Send . If the other device is not compatible with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), the ti me information of received calendar entr ies may not be displayed correctly . To modify the calendar, select Options > Settings > Calendar alarm tone , Default view , Week star ts on , and Week view title . Manage your calendar entries To delete more than one event at a time, go to the month view, and select Optio ns > Delete entry > Befo re date or All entries . To mark a task as completed, scroll to it in the to-do view, and select Options > Mark as done . Recorder To record voice memos, press , and select Applications > Media > Re corder . To record a telephone conversation, open Recorder during a voice call. Both parties hear a tone every 5 seconds during r ecording. RealPlayer Press , and select Applications > Media > RealPlayer . With RealPlayer , you can stream media files over the ai r without saving them to the devi ce first or play video clips saved in the device. RealPlayer supports files with extensions such as .3gp, .mp4, or .rm. However, RealPlayer does not necessarily support all file formats or all the variations of file formats. In the landscape view, use th e media keys to control the player. Play video clips 1 To play a saved media file, select Options > Open and from the following: Most recent clips âÂÂto play one of the last six files played in RealPlayer . Saved clip âÂÂto play a file saved in Gallery 2 Scroll to a file, and press the scroll key to play the file.
Applications 103 To adjust the volume, use the volume key. Stream content over the air Many service providers require you to use an internet access point (IAP) for your default access point. Other service providers allow you to use a WAP access point. In RealPlayer , you can only open an rtsp:// URL address. However, RealPlayer will play a .ram file if you open an http link to it in Browser. To stream content over the air, select a streaming link saved in Gallery , on a web page, or re ceived in a text message or multimedia message. Before live content begins streaming, your device connects to the site and starts loading the content. Only the link to the content is sav ed in your device. RealPlayer settings You may receive RealPlayer settings in a special message from the service provider. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 37. For more information, contact your service provider. Select Options > Settings and from the following: Video âÂÂto adjust the contrast of the video or have RealPlayer automatic ally repeat video clips after they finish play ing. Streaming âÂÂContact your service pr ovider for the correct settings. Adobe Flash Player To view, play, and interact with compatible flash files made for mobile devices, press , and select Applications > Media > Flash Player . Scroll to a flash file, and press . IMâÂÂinstant messaging Press , and select Applications > Media > IM . Instant messaging (network service) allows y ou to converse with other people using instant messages and join discussion forums (IM groups) with specific topics. Various service providers mainta in IM servers that you ca n log in to after you register to an IM service. Service providers may differ in their support of features. Select Conversati ons to start or continue a conversation with an IM user; IM contacts to create, edit, or view the online status of your IM contacts; IM groups to start or continue a group conversation with multiple IM users; or Recorded chats to view a previous instant messaging session that you saved.
Applications 104 Receive IM settings You must save the settings to access the service that you want to use. You may receive the settings in a special text message from the network ope rator or service provider that offers the IM service. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 37. You can also enter the settings manually. See âÂÂChat server settingsâÂÂ, p. 106. Connect to an IM server 1 To connect to the IM server in use, open IM , and se lect Options > Log in . To change the I M server in use and save new IM servers, see âÂÂChat server settingsâÂÂ, p. 106. 2 Enter your user ID and pa ssword, and press to log in. You obtain the user ID and password for the IM server from your service provider. 3 To log out, select Options > Log out . Modify your IM settings Select Options > Settings > Preference s and from the following: Use screen nam e (shown only if IM groups are supported by the server)âÂÂTo enter a nickname, select Yes . Show my av ailabilit y âÂÂTo allow others to see if you are online, select To everyone . Allow messages from âÂÂTo allow messages from all, select All . Allow invitations f rom âÂÂTo allow invitations only from your IM contacts, select IM contacts only . IM invitations are sent by IM contac ts who want you to join th eir groups. Sort IM contacts âÂÂSelect how your IM conta cts are sorted: Alphabetically or By online status . Availability reloading âÂÂTo select how to update information about whet her your IM contacts are online or offline, select Automatic or Manual . Offline contacts âÂÂSelect whether I M contacts with an offline status are shown in the IM contacts lis t. Own message colour âÂÂSelect the color of the instant messages you send. Received msg colour âÂÂSelect the color of th e instant messages you receive. IM alert tone âÂÂChange the tone played when you receive a new instant message. Search for IM groups and users To search for groups, in the IM groups view, select Options > Search . You can search by Gro up name , Topic , and Members (user ID).
Applications 105 To search f or users, in the IM contacts view, selec t Options > New IM contact > Search from server . You can search by User's nam e , User ID, Phone n umber , and E-mail address . Join IM groups The I M groups view shows a list of the IM groups that you have saved or are currently joined to. To join a saved IM group, press . To join an IM group that is not on the list, but for which you know the group ID, select Options > Join new group . To leave the IM group, select Opti ons > Leave IM group . Chat After you join an IM group, you can view the messages that are exchanged there, and send your own messages. To send a message, write the message in the message editor field, and press . To send a private message to a participant, select Options > Send private message . To reply to a private message sent to you, select the message and Options > Reply . To invite IM contacts who are online to join the IM group, select Options > Send invitation . To prevent receiving messages from certain participants, select Option s > Blocking options . Record chats To record the messages th at are exchanged during a conversation or while you are jo ined in a IM group , select Options > Record chat . To stop recording, select Options > Stop recording . To view the recorded chats, in the main view, select Recorded chats . View and start conversations The Conversatio ns view shows a list of the individual conversation participants that you have an ongoing conversation with. Ongoing conversations are automatically closed when you exit IM . To view a conversation, scroll to a participant, and press . To continue the conversation , write your me ssage, and press . To return to the conver sations li st withou t closi ng the conversation, selec t Back . To close the conversation, select Options > End conv ersation . To start a new conversation, select Options > New conversation .
Applications 106 To save a conversation part ic ipant to your IM contacts, select Op tions > Add to IM contacts . To send automatic replies to incoming messages, select Options > Set auto reply on . You can still receive messages. IM contacts In the IM contacts vi ew, you can retr ieve chat cont act lists from the server, or add a new chat contact to a contact list. When you log in to the server , the previously used chat contact list is retrieved fr om the server auto matically. Chat server settings Select Options > Settings . You may receive the settings in a special text message from the network operator or service provider that offers th e chat service. You obtain the user ID and password from yo ur service provider when you register to the service. If you do not know your user ID or password, contact your service provider. Servers âÂÂView a list of all defined IM servers. Default server âÂÂChange the IM server to which you want to connect. IM login type âÂÂTo log in automatically when you start IM , select On app. start-up . To add a new server to your list of IM servers, select Servers > Options > New server . Enter the following settings: Server name âÂÂthe name for the chat server Access point in use âÂÂthe access point you want to use for the server Web address âÂÂthe URL address of the IM server User ID âÂÂyour user ID Password âÂÂyour login password Nokia Lifeblog To start Nokia Lifeblog on your device, press , and select Applications > Media > Li feblog > Options > Open . Lifeblog is a combination of software for mob ile device and PC that keeps a multimedia diary of the items that you collect with your device. Li feblog organizes your photos, videos, sounds, text messages, multimedia messages, and weblog posts into a chronology that you can browse, search, share, publish, and back up. Both Nokia Lifeblog PC and Nokia Lifeblog mobile let you send or blog your items for others to see. Lifeblog mobile automatically keeps track of your multimedia items. Use Lifeblog on your device to browse
Applications 107 your items, send them to others, or publish them on the web. Connect your device to a compatible PC using a compatible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivity to transfer and synchronize the it ems on the device with your compatible PC. Lifeblog PC provides easy browsing and searching of the items that you coll ected with your devi ce. With one-button transfer using a USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivity, your favorite photos, videos, text, and multimedia messages are transf erred back to your device. For safekeeping, you can back up your Nokia Lifeblog database using your hard disk , compatible CDs, compatible DVDs, compatible removable drive, or co mpatible network drive. Additionally, you ca n post items to your weblog (blog). For more inform ation on weblog serv ices and thei r compatibility with Nokia Lifeblog, visit www.nokia.com/lifeblog , or press F1 in the Li feblog PC application to open Nokia Lifeblog Help. Installation on your PC You must install Nokia Lifeblog PC (provided on the DVD-ROM) to a compatible PC before using it. Before you install Nokia Lifeblog on a compatible PC, you need the following: ⢠1 GHz Intel Pentium or equiva lent, 128 MB RAM ⢠400 MB of available hard disk space (if Microsoft DirectX and Nokia Nseries PC Suite must be installed) ⢠Graphics capability of 1024x768 and 24-bit color ⢠32 MB graphics card ⢠Microsoft Windows 2000 or Windows XP To install Lifeblog on your PC: 1 Insert the DVD-ROM supplied with your device. 2 Install Nokia Nseries PC Suite (includes Nok ia Connectivity Cable drivers for USB connection). 3 Install Lifeblog for PC. If Microsoft Dir ectX 9.0 is not already installed on your PC, it is installed at the same time with Lifeblog for PC. Connect your device and PC To connect your device and a compatible PC using a compatible USB data cable: 1 Ensure that you have installed Nokia Nseries PC Suite (available on the DVD-ROM). 2 Connect the USB data cable to the device and the PC. The USB mode should be PC Suite . When you conne ct your device to the PC fo r the firs t time afte r you have installed Nokia Nseries PC Suite, the PC installs the specific driver for your de vice. This may take a while. 3 Start the Lifeblog PC application.
Applications 108 To connect your device and a compatible PC using Bluetooth wireless technology: 1 Ensure that you have ins ta lled Nokia Nseries PC Suite on your PC. 2 Ensure that you have pair ed your device and the PC through Bluetooth wirele ss technology with Get Connected in Nokia Nseries PC Suite (available on the DVD-ROM). For more information on N okia Nseries PC Suite, see the guides av ailable at the Nokia N81 product support pages at www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia websit e. For more information on Bluetooth connectivity, see the user guide for your device. 3 Activate Bluetooth connectivity on your device and on your PC. Copy items To copy new or edited items from your device to your PC, and copy the selected items from your PC to your device: 1 Connect your device to the PC. 2 Start the Lifeblog application on your PC. 3 In the Lifeb log PC appli cation, select File > Copy from phone and to Phone . The new items from your device are copied to your PC. The items on the To phone view on your PC ar e copied to your device. Browse timeline and favorites When you start Lifeblog on your device, the Timeline view opens and shows your multimedia items. To open your saved favorite s, select Opt ions > View favourite s . When you start Lifeblog on your PC, you have several ways to move around in the Ti meline and Favourites views. The fastest way is to move the slider handle forward or backward, fast or slow. Alternatively, click the time ba r to select a date, use the Go to date featu re, or use the arrow keys. Post to the web To share your best Lifeblog items, send them to your weblog on the internet for others to see. You must first create an account with a compatible weblog service, create one or more weblogs that you use as the destination of your posts, and add the weblog account to Lifeblog. The recommended weblog service for Nokia Lifeblog is TypePad from Six Apart, www.typepad.com. On your device, to add the weblog account in Lifeblog, select Options > Settings > Blog . On your PC, edit accounts in the Blog account manager window. To post items to the web from your device, do the following:
Applications 109 1 In Timeline or Favourites , select the items that you want to post to the web. 2 Select Options > Post to Web . 3 If you use the feature for the first time, Lifeblog retrieves a weblog list from the weblog server. 4 The weblog post dialog o pens. Select the weblog you want to use from the Post to: list. If you have created new weblogs, to update the weblog list, select Options > Refresh blog list . 5 Enter a title and a caption for the post. You can also write a longer story or description i n the body text field. 6 When everything is ready, select Optio ns > Send . To post items to the web from your PC, do the following: 1 In Timeline or Favourites , select the items (a maximum of 50) that you want to post to the web. 2 Select File > Post to the Web... . The Post to the Web window opens. 3 Enter a title and a caption for the post. You can also write a longer story or description i n the body text field. 4 Select the weblog that you want to use from the Post to: list. 5 When everything is ready, click the Send button. Import items from other sources In addition to the .jpeg images of your device, you can also import .jpeg images and .3gp and .mp4 vid eo clips, .amr sound files, and .txt text files from other sources (such as a CD, DVD, or folders on your hard disk) into Lifeblog . To import items from a compatible PC to Lifeblog for PC, do the following: 1 In Timeline or Favourites , select File > Import from PC... . The Import window opens. 2 Browse the list to find the image or video file, or sound or text file from the lis t, or navigate to other folders to find the file that you want to import. Use the Look in list to browse other drives or appliances. 3 Select a folder, file, or seve ra l files. You can view their content in the Preview: pane. 4 Click Open to import the folder (including subfolders) or selected files. Digital rights management Content owners may use differ ent types of digital rights management (DRM) technologies to protect their intellectual property, including copyrights. This device uses various types of DRM software to access DRM-protected content. With this device you can access content protected with WMDRM 10, OMA DRM 1.0, and OMA DRM 2.0. If certain D RM softwar e fails to protect the content, content owners may ask that such DRM soft ware's ability to access new DRM-protected content be revoked. Revocation may also prevent renewal of su ch DRM-protected content
Applications 110 already in your device. Revocation of such DRM software does not affect the use of content protected wi th other types of DRM or the use of non-DRM-protected content. Digital rights management (DRM) protected content comes with an associat ed activat ion key th at defin es your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM protected content, to back up both the activation keys and the content, use the backup feature of Nokia Nseries P C Su ite. Other transfer methods may not transfer the activati on keys which need to be restored with the content for you to be able to continue the use of OMA DRM protected content after the device memory is formatted. You may also need to restor e the activatio n keys in c ase th e files on your device get corrupted. If your device has WMDRM protected content, both the activation keys and the content will be lost if the device memory is formatted. You may al so lose the activation keys and the content in case the files on your device get corrupted. Losing the activati on keys or the content may limit your ability to us e the same content on your device again. For more information, contact your service provid er. Some activa tion ke ys may be connected to a specif ic SIM card, and the protected content can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. To view the digital rights activ ation keys stored in your device, press , and select Applications > Media > Actv. keys and from the following: Valid keys âÂÂView keys that are connected to one or more media files and keys whose va lidity period has not started yet. Invalid keys âÂÂView keys that are not valid; the time period for using the media file is exceeded or there is a protected media file in the device but no connected a ctivation key. Not in use âÂÂView keys that have no media files connected to them in the device. To buy more usage time or extend the usage period for a media file, select Options > Get new key . To view detaile d information , such as the validit y status and ability to send the file, scro ll to an activation key, and press . Adobe Reader With Adobe Reader, you can read .pdf documents on the display of your device. This application has been optimized for .pdf document content on handsets and ot her mobile devices, and provides only a limited set of features compared with PC versions.
Applications 111 To open documents, press , and select Applicat ions > Office > Adobe PDF . Your recent files are listed in the file view. To open a document, scroll to it, and press . Use File mgr. to browse and open documents stored in the device. More information For more information, visit www.adobe.com. To share questions, suggestio ns, and information abo ut the application, visit the Adobe Reader for Symbian OS user forum at http://adobe.com /support/forums/main.html. Converter To convert measures from on e unit to another, press , and select Applications > Office > Converter . Convert er has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. 1 In the Type field, select the measure you want to use. 2 In the first Unit field, select the unit from which you want to convert. In the next Un it field, select the unit to which you want to convert. 3 In the first Amount field, enter the value you want to convert. The other Amount field changes automatically to show the converted value. Set base currency an d exchange rates Select Type > Currency > Options > Currency rates . Before you can make cu rrency co nversions, you must select a base currency and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is always 1. Note: When you change base currency, you must enter new exchange rates because all previously set exchange rates are cleared.
Settings 112 Settings To change settings, press , and select Tools > Settings . Scroll to General , Phone, Connection , or Applications, and press . Scroll to a setting or setting group you want to change, and press . Some settings may be preset fo r the device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change them. General To edit the general settings of your device or restore the original default device se ttings, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation , Date and time , Sl ide handling , Sleep mode , Enhancemen t , Security , Factory settin gs , Navi wheel or Positioning . For Date and time , see âÂÂClockâÂÂ, p. 98. Personalisation Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Display to adjust display brightness, select font and icon size, adjust power saver time-out, select the welcome screen and select the backlight time- out. To edit settings related to the display, standby mode, and general functionalit y of your device, p ress , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation . Tones allows you to change the tones of c alendar, clock, and the currently active profile. Themes opens the Themes application. See âÂÂChange the look of your deviceâÂÂ, p. 84. Voice comms. opens the setting s for the Voice comm . application. See âÂÂVoice commandsâÂÂ, p. 69. Display Brightness âÂÂPress or to adjust the brightness of the display. Font size âÂÂAdjust the size of the text and icons on the display. Power saver time-out âÂÂSelect the time-out period after which the power saver is activated. Welcome note / logo âÂÂThe welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time you switch on the device. Select Default to use the default image, Text to write a welcome note, or Image to select an image from Gallery .
Settings 113 Light time-o ut âÂÂSelect a time-out after which the backlight of the display is switched off. Standby mode Active standby âÂÂUse shortcuts to applicat ions in the standby mode. See âÂÂActive standbyâÂÂ, p. 84. Active standby apps. âÂÂSelect the application shortcuts you want to appear in the active standby. This setting is only available if Active stan dby is on. Shortcuts > Le ft selection key and Right selection key â Assign a shortcut to the selection keys in the standby mode. You can also assign keypad shortcuts for th e different presses of the scroll key. The scroll key shortcuts are not available if the active standby is on. Operator logo âÂÂThis setting is only available if you have received and saved an operator logo. Select Off if you do not want the logo to be shown. Language Phone language âÂÂChanging the language of the displa y texts in your device also affects the format used for date and time and the separators used, for example, in calculations. Automatic selects the language accord ing to the information on your SIM card. After you change the display text language, the device restarts. Changing the settings for Phone language or Writing language affects every application in your device, and the change remains effective until you change these settings again. Writing language âÂÂChanging the language affects the characters an d special charac t ers available when writing text and the predictive text dictionary used. Predictive text âÂÂSet the predictive text input On or Off for all editors in the device. The pr edictive text dictionary is not available for all languages. Slide handling Opening the sli de âÂÂTo select whether incoming calls are answered when opening the slide, select Answer incoming call or Call not answered . Closing the slide âÂÂTo select whether active calls are ended when closing the slide, select End active call or Cont inue active call . Keyguard activation âÂÂTo select whether the keypad is locked when closing the slide, sele ct On when closi ng slide or Off when closing slide . To receive a query every time when closing the slide, select Always ask .
Settings 114 Sleep mode Select Off to disable the power saver LED for the sleep mode. Enhancement Enhancement sett. For enhancement indicators, see âÂÂEssential indicatorsâÂÂ, p. 14. The available settings depend on the type of enhancement. Select an enhancement and from the following: Default profile âÂÂSet the profile that you want activated each time you connect a cert ain compatible enhancement to your device. See âÂÂProfilesâÂÂset tonesâÂÂ, p. 82. Automatic answe r âÂÂSet if you want the device to answer an incoming call automatically after 5 seconds. If the ringing type is set to Beep once or Si lent , automa tic answer is disabled. Lights âÂÂSet whether lights remain on, or are switched off after the time-out. This setting is not available for all enhancements. If you are using a Text phone or a Loopset , you must activate it on your device. T o activa te Text phone , select Text phone > Use text phone > Ye s . To activate the loopset, select Loopset > Use loopset > Yes . Security To edit settings related to the sec urity, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Securi ty > Phone and SIM card , Certificate management , or Security module . Phone and SIM card PIN code request âÂÂWhen active, th e code is requested each time the device is switched on. Deactivating the personal identification number (PIN) code request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. PIN code , PIN2 code , and Lock code âÂÂYou can change the lock code, PIN code, and PIN2 code. These codes can only include the numbers from 0 to 9 . If you forget any of these codes, contact your service provider. See âÂÂGlossary of PI N and lock codesâÂÂ, p. 115. Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialing of the emergency number. Keypad autolock period âÂÂSelect whether the keypad is locked when your devi ce has been idle for a certain period of time.
Settings 115 Tip! To lock or unlock the keypad manually, pull the lock switch. Phone autolock period âÂÂTo avoid unauthorized use, you can set a time -out afte r whic h the device automatically locks. A locked device cannot be used until the correct lock code is entered. To turn off the autolock period, select None . See âÂÂGlossary of PIN and lock codesâÂÂ, p. 115. When the device is locked, ca lls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Tip! To lock the device manually, press . A list of commands opens. Select L ock phone . Lock if SIM card changed âÂÂYou can set the device to ask for the lock code when an unknown SIM card is inserted into your device. The device maintains a list of SIM cards that are recognized as the ownerâÂÂs cards. Closed user group âÂÂYou can specify a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you (network s ervice). When calls are limited to clos ed user groups, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Confirm SIM s ervices âÂÂYou can set the device to display confirmation messages when you are using a SIM card service (network service). Glossary of PIN and lock codes If you forget any of these codes, contact your service provid er. Personal identific ation nu mber (PIN) codeâÂÂThis code protects your SIM card agai nst unauthorized use. The PIN code (4 to 8 digits) is usua lly supplied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unblock it. UPIN codeâÂÂThis code may be supplied with the USIM card. The USIM card is an enhanced version of the SIM card and is supported by UMTS mobile phones. PIN2 codeâÂÂThis code (4 to 8 digits) is supplied with some SIM cards, and is required to access some functions in your device . Lock code (also known as security code)âÂÂThis code (5 digits) can be used to lock the device to avoid unauthorized use. The factory se tting for the lock code is 12345 . To avoid unauthorized use of yo ur device , change the lock code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your device. If yo u forget the code, cont act your service provider. Personal unblocking key (PUK) code and PUK2 codeâÂÂThese codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectiv ely. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact th e service provider whose SIM card is in your device.
Settings 116 UPUK codeâÂÂThis code (8 digits ) is required to ch ange a blocked UPIN code. If the code is not supplied with the USIM card, contac t the servic e provider whose USIM c ard is in your device. Certificate management Digital certificat es do not guar antee safety; they are used to verify the origin of software. In the certificate management main view, you can see a list of authority certifi cates th at are stored in your device. Press to see a list of personal certificates, if available. Digital certificates should be used if you want to connect to an online bank or another site or remote server for actions that involve transferring confident ial information. They should also be used if yo u want to reduce the risk of viruses or other malicious software and be sure of the authenticity of software wh en downloading and installing software. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation cons iderably sm aller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; the certificate mana ger must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increased security to be available. Certificates ha ve a restricted lifetime. If âÂÂExpired certificateâ or âÂÂCerti ficate not valid yet" is shown even if the certificate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your device are correct. Before changing any certificate settings, you must ma ke sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belongs to the listed owner. View certificate detailsâÂÂcheck authenticity You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signature and the period of validity of a server certificate have been checked. You are notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. To check certificate details, scroll to a certificate, and select Options > Certificate details . When you open certificate details, the validity of the certificat e is checked, and one of the following notes may be displayed: ⢠Certific ate not tru sted âÂÂYou have not set any application to use the certific ate. See âÂÂChange the trust settingsâÂÂ, p. 117. ⢠Expired c ertific ate âÂÂThe period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. ⢠Certific ate not val id yet âÂÂThe period of validity has not yet begun for the selected certificate. ⢠Certific ate corrup ted âÂÂThe certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issuer.
Settings 117 Change the trust settings Before changing any certificat e settings, you must make sure that you really trust th e owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belongs to the listed owner. Scroll to an authority certificat e, and select Options > Trust settin gs . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications that can use the selected certificate is shown. For example: ⢠Symbian in stallation : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. ⢠Interne t : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify servers. ⢠App. instal lation : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Java application. Select Options > Edit trust setting to change the value. Security module To view or edit a secu rity module (if available) in Security module , scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view detailed information about a securit y module, scroll to it, and select Options > Security details . Factory settings To reset some of the settings to their original values, s elect Factory settings . To do this, you need the lock code. See âÂÂPhone and SIM cardâÂÂ, p. 114. After resetting, the device may take a longer time to power on. Documents and files are unaffected. Navi wheel Select On to perform certain actions (for example, browse through lists in some appli cations) by sliding yo ur finger around the rim of the scroll key. Positioning Positioning met hods âÂÂSelect the positioning methods used to detect the loca tion of your device: Bluetoot h GPS to use a compatible external GPS receiver with Bluetooth connectiv ity, and Network based to use information from the cellular network (network service). The location information can be used by compatible applications in your device. Positioning ser ver âÂÂDefine an access point and a positioning server for sec ure positioning. The positioning server may be preset by your service provider, and you may not be able to edit the settings . Phone To edit the settings related to making an d receiving calls, press , and se lect Tools > Se ttings > Phone > Call , Call divert , Call barring , or Network .
Settings 118 Call Send my caller ID âÂÂYou can set your phone number to be displayed to ( Yes ) or hidden from ( No ) the person to whom you are calling, or the value may be set by your service provider when you ma ke a subscription ( Set by network ) (netwo rk service ). Send my internet call ID âÂÂYou can set your internet call ID to be displayed to ( Yes ) or hidden from ( No ) the person to whom you are calling. Call wa iting âÂÂIf you hav e activated call waiting (network service), the network notifies you of a new incoming call while you have a call in progress. Set the function on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the function is activated ( Check status ). Intern et call waiti ng âÂÂSelect Activated t o b e n o t i f i e d o f a new incoming internet call while you have a call in progress. Internet call alert âÂÂSelect On to be al erted for incoming internet calls. If you select Off , you are not alerted, but a notification about missed calls appears. Default call type âÂÂTo set internet calls as default calls when starting the call wi th the call key, select Internet call . If internet telephone service is not available, a regular voice call is started instead. Reject call with SMS âÂÂSelect Yes to send a text message to a caller informing why you could not answer the call. See âÂÂAnswer or decline a callâÂÂ, p. 95. Message text âÂÂWrite a text to be sent in a te xt message when you reject a call. Image in video call âÂÂIf video is not sent during a video call, you can select a still image to be displayed instead. Automatic redial âÂÂSelect On , and your device makes a maximum of 10 attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful call attempt. To stop automatic redialing, press the end key. Show call duration âÂÂActivate this setting if you want the length of a call to be displayed during the call. Summary after call âÂÂActivate this setting if you want the duration of the call briefl y displayed after the call. Speed dialling âÂÂSelect On , and the numbers assigned to the speed dialing keys ( - ) can be dialed by pressing and holding the key. See al so âÂÂSpeed dial a phone numberâÂÂ, p. 90. Anykey answer âÂÂSelect On , and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pressing any keypad key, except the left selection key, right selection key, power key, a nd end key. Line in use âÂÂThis setting (network service) is shown only if the SIM card supports two subs criber numbers, that is, two
Settings 119 phone lines. Select which phone line you want to use f or making calls and sending text messages. Calls on both lines can be answered irrespective of the selected line. If you select Line 2 and have no t subscribed to this network service, you will not be able to make calls. When line 2 is selected, is shown in the standb y mode. Tip! To switch between the phone lines, press and hold in the standby mode. Line change âÂÂTo prevent line selection (network service), select Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Call divert Call div ert a l l o w s y o u t o d i v e r t y o u r i n c o m i n g c a l l s t o y o u r voice mailbox or another phone number. For details, contact your service provider. Select which calls you want to divert and the desired diverting option. To divert voice calls when your number is busy or when you reject inc oming calls, select If busy . Set the option on ( Ac tivate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the option is activated ( Check status ). Several diverting options can be active at the same time. When all calls are diverted, is shown in the standby mode. Call barring and call di verting cannot be active at the same time. Call barring Call barring (network service) allo ws you to restrict the calls that you make or rec eive with the device. To change the settings, you need the barring password from your service provider. Select the desired barring option, and set it on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whethe r the option is active ( Check status ). Call barring affects all calls, including data calls. Call barring and call di verting cannot be active at the same time. When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain official emergency numbers. Network Your device can automatically switch between the GSM and UMTS networks. The GSM network is indicated with in the standby mode. The UMTS network is indicated with . Network mode (shown only if supported by the network service provider)âÂÂSelect which network to use. If you select Dual mod e , the device uses the GSM or UMTS
Settings 120 network automatically, according to the network parameters and the roaming agreements between the network service providers. Cont act your service provider for more details. Operator selection âÂÂSelect Au tomatic to set the d evice to search for and selec t one of the available networks, or Manual to manually select the network from a list of networks. If the connection to the manually selected network is lost, the device sounds an error tone and asks you to reselect a network. The selected network must have a roaming agreement with yo ur home cellular network. Glossary: A roaming agreement is an agreement between two or more network service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use the services of other service providers. Cell info display âÂÂSelect On to set the device to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on microcellular network (MCN) technology and to acti vate cell info reception. Connection To edit access point and othe r connection settings, press , and select Tools > Settin gs > Co nnectio n > Bluetooth , USB , Access points , Packet data , Wireless LAN , Data call , SIP settings , Interne t telephone sett ings , Configurations , or APN control . For USB settings, see âÂÂUSBâÂÂ, p. 76. For settings for Bluetooth connectivity, see âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p. 73. Data connections and access points Your device supports packet data c onnections (network service), such as GPRS in th e GSM network. When you use your device in GSM and UMTS networks, multiple data connections can be active at the same time, and access points can share a data connection. In the UMTS network, data connections remain active during vo ice calls. You can also use a wireless LAN data connection. See âÂÂWireles s LANâÂÂ, p. 70. Only one connec tion in one w ireless LAN can be active at a time, but several applications can use the same internet access point. To establish a data connection, an access po int is required. You can define different kinds of access points, such as: ⢠MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages ⢠Internet acces s point (IAP) to send and receive e-mail and connect to the internet Check the type of access point you need with your service provider for the service you want t o access. For availability and subscription to packet data connection servic es, contact your service provider.
Settings 121 Access points You may receive access point setti ngs in a message from a service provider. See âÂÂData an d settingsâÂÂ, p. 37. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by yo ur service provider, and you ma y not be able to chan ge, create, edit, or remove them. indicates a protected access point. indicates a packet data access point, and a wireless LA N access point. Tip! You can create inter net access points in a wireless LAN with the WLAN wizard. Se e âÂÂWLAN wizardâÂÂ, p. 71. To create a new access point, select Options > New access point . To edit the settings of an access point, select Options > Edit . Follow the instructions fr om your service provider. Connection name âÂÂEnter a descriptive name for the connection. Data bearer âÂÂSelect the data connection type. Depending on the data connection you select, only certain setting fields are available. Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Other fields can be left empty, unless you have b een instru cted otherwise by your service provider. To be able to use a data co nnection, the network service provider must sup port this feature, and if necessary , activate it for your SIM card. Packet data access points Follow the instructions from your service provider. Access point name âÂÂYou obtain the access point name from your service provider. User name âÂÂT he user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service provi der. Prompt password âÂÂIf you must enter the password every time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the devi ce, select Yes . Password âÂÂA password may be ne eded to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service provi der. Authentication âÂÂSelect Normal or Secur e . Home page âÂÂDepending on the access point yo u are setting up, enter the web address or th e address of the multimedia messaging center. Select Options > Advanced settings to change the following settings: Network type âÂÂSelect the internet protocol type to use: IPv4 or IPv6 . The other settings depend on the selected network type.
Settings 122 Phone IP address (for IPv4 only)âÂÂE nter the IP address of your device. DNS address âÂÂIn Primary DNS address , enter the IP address of the primary DNS server. In Secondar y DNS address , enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server. Contact your internet servic e provider to obtain these addresses. Proxy server address âÂÂDefine the address for the proxy server. Proxy port number âÂÂEnter the proxy port number. Wireless LAN access po ints Follow the instructions from the wireless LAN service provider. WLAN networ k name âÂÂSelect Enter manually or Search for networks . If you select an existing network, WLAN network mode and WLAN securi ty mode are determined by the settings of it s access point device. Network statu s âÂÂDefines whether the target network is hidden or not. WLAN netw ork mode âÂÂSelect Ad-hoc to create an ad hoc network and to allow devices to send and receive data directly; a wireless LAN acces s point device is not need ed. In an ad-hoc network, all devices must use the same WLAN networ k name . WLAN security mode âÂÂSelect the encryption used: WEP , 802.1x (not for ad hoc networks), or WPA/WPA2 . If you select Open network , no encr yption is used. The WEP, 802.1x, and WPA functions can be used only if the network supports them. WLAN security settings âÂÂEnter the settings for the selected security mode: Security settings for WEP : ⢠Wep key in use âÂÂSelect the WEP key number. You can create up to four WEP keys. The same settings must be entered on the wireless LAN access point device. ⢠Authentication type âÂÂSelect Ope n or Shared for the authentication type between your device and the wireless LAN access poi nt device. ⢠WEP key settings âÂÂE nter WEP encryption (length of the key), WEP key format ( ASCII or Hexadecimal ), and WEP key (the WEP key data in the selected format). Security settings for 802.1x and WPA/WPA2 : ⢠WPA/WPA2 âÂÂSelect the means of authentication: EAP to use an extensible authentication protocol (EAP) plug-in, or Pre-shared key to use a password. Complete the appropriate settings: ⢠EAP plug-in settings (only for EAP )âÂÂEnter the settings as your service provider instructs.
Settings 123 ⢠Pre-shared key (only fo r Pre-shared key )âÂÂEnter a password. The same pa ssword must be entered on the wireless LAN access point device. ⢠WPA2 only mode (only for WPA/W PA2 )âÂÂSelect whether Temporal Key Integrit y Protocol (TKIP) is used. Homepage âÂÂDefine a home page. Select Options > Advanced settings and from the following: IPv4 settings : Phone IP address (the IP address of your device), Subnet mask (the subnet IP address), Default gateway (the gateway), and DNS address . Enter the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS server. Contact your internet service provider for these addresses. IPv6 settings > DNS address âÂÂSelect Auto matic , Well- known , or User defined . Ad-hoc channel (only for Ad-hoc )âÂÂTo enter a channel number (1-11) manually, select User defined . Proxy server address âÂÂEnter the address f or the proxy server. Proxy port number âÂÂEnter the proxy port number. Packet data The packet data settings affect all access points using a packet data connection. Packet data connection âÂÂIf you select When available and you are in a network that supports packet data, the device r egisters to the packet da ta networ k. Sta rting an active packet data connectio n (for example, to send and receive e-mail) is quicker. If there is no packet data coverage, the device periodically tries to register to the packet data network . If you select When needed , the device uses a packet data connection only if you start an application or action that needs it. Access point âÂÂThe access point name is needed to use your device as a packet data modem to your computer. Wireless LAN Show WLAN availability âÂÂSelect wh ether is displayed when a wireless LAN is avail able. Scan for networ ks âÂÂIf you set Show WLAN availability to Yes , select h ow often the de vice search es for avail able wireless LANs and updates the indicator. To view advanced settings, select Options > Advanced settings . Changing wireless LAN advanced settings is not recommended. Data call Select User defined or Unlimited to defi ne the time-out period after which data call co nnections automatically end
Settings 124 if no data has been transferred. If you select Unlimited , the connection stays active until you disconnect it. SIP settings SIP (Session Initiation Prot ocol) settings are needed for certain network services using SIP, such as video sharing. You may receive the settings in a special text message from your service provider. Yo u can view, delete, or create these setting profiles in SIP settings . Internet telephony To create or edit an internet call profile to make internet calls, select Options > New profile or Edit . Select SIP profiles and the profile you want to use for internet calls. Internet calls are not possible without the SIP profile and SIP settings. Configurations You may receive trusted server settings from your service provider in a configur ation me ssage. You can save, view, or delete these settings in Configurations . Access point name control With access point name control service, you can restrict packet data connectio ns and allow your device t o use only certain packet data access point s. This setting is only available if your SIM card supp orts the access point control service. To set the control servi ce on or off or to change the allowed access points, select Options and the corresponding option. To change the options, you need your PIN2 code. Contact your service provider for the c ode. Applications To edit the settings of some o f the applications in your device, press , and select Tools > Sett ings > Applications . The settings are also available in each application by selecting the settings option.
Troubleshooting: Q&A 125 Troubleshooting: Q&A Access codes Q: What is my password for the lock, PIN, or PUK codes? A: The default lo ck code is 12345 . If you forget or lo se the lock code, contact your device dealer. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network service provider. For information about passwords, contact your acc ess point provider, for example , a commercial internet service provider (ISP) or network service provider. Application not re sponding Q: How do I close an application that is not responding? A: Press and hold . Scroll to the application, and press to close the application. Bluetooth connectivity Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs device? A: Check that both devices are compatible, have activated Bluetooth connectivity, and are not in hidden mode. Check also that the distance between the two devices is not over 10 meters (33 feet) and that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a Bluetooth connection? A: If an other device is connect ed to you r device, you can either end the connection using the other device or by deactivating Bluetoot h connectivity. Se lect Tool s > Bluetooth > Bluetooth > Off . Display Q: Why do missing, discolored, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I tu rn on my device? A: This is a characteristic of this type of display. Some displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Home network (UPnP) Q: Why canâÂÂt the other device see the files stored on my device? A: Make sure that you have configured the home network settings, Content sharing is turned on in your device, and the other device is UPnP compatible. Q: What can I do if my home network conne ction stops working? A: Switch off the wireless LAN connection from your compatible PC and your device, and switch it on aga in. If this does not help, restart your compatible PC and your device. If the connection still does not work, reconfigure the WLAN settings in both your compatib le PC and device. See âÂÂWireless LANâÂÂ, p. 70, and âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 120.
Troubleshooting: Q&A 126 Q: Why can't I see my compatible PC in my device in the home network? A: If you are using a firewall application in your compatible PC, check that it allows home media server to use the external connection (you can add Home media server to the firewall applicationâÂÂs exce ptions list). Check from the firewall settings that the fire wall application allows traffic to the following ports: 190 0, 49152, 49153, and 49154. Some WLAN access point devices have a built-in firewall. In such ca ses, check th at the firewal l in the ac cess point device does not block traffic to the following ports: 1900, 49152, 49153, and 49154. Check that the WLAN settings are the same in your device and compatible PC. Memory lo w Q: What can I do if my device memory is low? A: You can delete unused items saved in your device regularly to avoid memory getting low. See âÂÂMemory lowâÂÂfree memoryâÂÂ, p. 68. To delete contact information, calendar notes, call timers, call cost timers, game scores, or any other data, go to the respective application to remove the data. If you are deleting multiple items and one of the following notes are shown: Not enough memory to perform operation. Delete some data fi rst. or Memory l ow. Delete som e data from phone memory. , try deleting items one by one (starting from the smallest item). T o v i e w w h a t k i n d o f d a t a y o u h a v e a n d h o w m u c h m e m o r y the different data groups consume, press , and select Tools > File manager > Options > Memory details . Q: How can I save my data before de leting it? A: Save your data using o ne of the following methods: ⢠Use Nokia Nseries PC Suite to make a backup copy of all data to a compatible computer. ⢠Send images to your e-mail a ddress, then save the images to your computer. ⢠Send data using Bluetooth connectivit y to a compatible device. Messaging Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a contact? A: The contact card does not have a phone number or an e-mail address. Add the miss ing information to the contact card in Contacts . Multimedia me ssaging Q: The note Retrieving message is shown briefly. What is happening? A: The device is trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia messaging center. Check that t he settings for multimedia messaging are defined correctly and that ther e are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia msg . . Q: How can I end the data connection when the device starts a data connection again and again?
Troubleshooting: Q&A 127 A: To stop the device from making a data connection, press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia messag e > Multimed ia retrieval and one of the following: Manual âÂÂto have the multimedia messaging center save messages to be retrieved later. You receive a notification when there is a new multimedia message t hat you can retrieve in the multimedia message center. Off âÂÂto ignore all incoming multimedia messages. After this change, the device does not make any network connections related to multimedia messaging. PC connectivity Q: Why do I have problems in connecting the device to my PC? A: Make sure that Nokia Nseries PC Suite is installed and running on your PC. See the user guide for Nokia Nseries PC Suite on the DVD-ROM. Fo r further information on how to use Nokia Nseries PC Suite, see the help function on Nokia Nseries PC Suite or visit the support pages at www.nokia.com. Q: Can I use my device as a fax modem wit h a compatible PC? A: You cannot use your device as a fax modem. However, with call diverting (network servi c e), you can divert incoming fax calls to another phone number. Wireless LAN Q: Why can't I see a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point even though I know I'm within its range? A: The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You can only access ne tworks that use a hidden SSID if you know the co rrect SSID, and have created a WLAN internet access point for the network on your Nokia device. Q: How do I switch wireless LAN (WLAN) off on my Nokia device? A: The WLAN on your Nokia device will switch off when you are not trying to connect, or are not connected to another access point, or scanning for available networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can specify that your Nokia device does not scan, or scans less often, for available networks in the ba ckground. WLAN will switch off in between background scans. To change the background scan settings: 1 Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Wireless LAN . 2 Change the value of Show WLAN availability to Never to stop background scans, or in crease the background scan time interval in Scan for netw orks . 3 To save your changes, select Back . When Scan for networks is set to Never , the WLAN availability icon will not be shown in the standby mode. However, you can still manua lly scan for available WLAN networks, and connect to WLAN networks as usual.
Battery information 128 Battery information Charging and discharging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The battery can be charged and discharged hu ndreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When the talk and standby times are noticeably shorter than normal, replace the ba ttery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and rech arge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. If a replacement battery is being used for the first time or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged period, it may be necessary to conn ect the ch arger, then disconnect and reconnect it to begin charging the battery. Unplug the charger from the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not lea ve a fully charged battery connected to a charger, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take several minutes before the charging indicator appears on the display or before any calls can be made. Use the battery only for its in tended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit th e battery. Accidental short- circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of th e positive ( ) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the conne cting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditio ns, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the b attery. Always try to keep the b attery between 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). A device with a hot or cold battery may not wo rk temporaril y, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Do not dismantle or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a battery leak, do not allow the liquid to come in contact with the skin or eyes. In the event of such a leak, flush your skin or eyes immediately with wate r, or seek medical help. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batter ies for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia battery, purchase it from
Battery information 129 an authorize d Nokia deale r, an d inspect the hologram label using the following steps: Successful completion of the steps is not a total assurance of the authenticity of the battery. I f you have any re ason to believe that your battery is not an authentic, original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it, and take it to the nearest authorized Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. Your authorized Nokia service point or dealer will inspect the battery for authenticity. If authenticit y cannot be verified, return the battery to the place of purchase. Authenticate hologram 1 When you look at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhancements logo when looking from another angle. 2 When you angle the hologram left, right, down, and up, you should see 1, 2, 3, and 4 dots on each side respectively. What if your b attery is not authentic? If you cannot confirm that your Nokia bat tery with the hologram on the label is an authentic Nokia battery, please do not use the battery. Take it to the nearest authorized Nokia service point or dealer for assist ance. The use of a battery that is not approved by the manufa cturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device and its enhancements. It may also invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the device. To find out more about original Nokia batteries, visit www.nokia.com/battery.
Care and maintenance 130 Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with ca re. The following suggestions will help you protect yo ur warranty coverage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your d evice does get w et, remove the battery, and allow the device to dry completely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the de vice in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of elec tronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temper ature, moisture can form inside the device and damage e lectronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the device oth er than as instructe d in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine me chanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, c leaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device. ⢠Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use a soft, clean, dry clot h to clean any lenses, such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses. ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replac ement antenna. Unauthorized ante nnas, modifications, or attachments could damage th e device a nd may violate regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Always create a backup of data you want to keep, such as contacts and calendar notes. ⢠To reset the device from ti me to time for optimum performance, power off the device and remove the battery. These suggestions apply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facility for service. Disposal The crossed-out wheeled-bin symbol on your product, literature, or packaging reminds you that in the European Union all electrical and electronic products, batteries, and accumulators must be taken to separate collection at the end of their working life. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. Return the products to collection to prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from un controlled waste disposal and to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Collection information is available from the product retailer, local waste authorities, national producer responsibility organizations, or your local Nokia representative. For more information, see product Eco-Declaration or country-specific information at www.nokia.c om.
Additional safety information 131 Additional safety information Small children Your device and its enhancemen ts may contain sm all parts. Keep them out of the re ach of small chil dren. Operating environment This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 2.2 centimeters (7/8 inch es) away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip, or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not contai n metal and should position the device the above-stated distance from your body. To transmit data files or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, t ransmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is av ailable. Ensure the abov e separation distance instructions are followed until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to th e device. Do not place credit cards or ot her magnetic storage media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of any radio transm itti ng equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your de vice in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or heal th care fa cilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacturers of medical devices recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 cent imeters (6 inches) should be maintained between a wirele ss device and an implanted medical device, such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the medical device. Persons who have such devices should: ⢠Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) from the medical device w hen the wireless device is turned on. ⢠Not carry the wireless device in a breast pocket. ⢠Hold the wireless device to the ear opposite the medical device to minimize the potential for interference. ⢠Turn the wireless device off immediate ly if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place.
Additional safety information 132 ⢠Read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of their implanted medical device. If you have any questions about using your wireless device with an implanted medical devi ce, consult your health care provider. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperl y installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, and air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer, or its representative, of your ve hicle or any eq uipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remembe r that air bags inflate with great force. D o not place objects, including installed or portable wi reless eq uipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly insta lle d and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the w ireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environm ents Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere, and ob ey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive at mospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refueling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the us e of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and dis tribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmos phere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include b elow deck on b oats, chemical transfer or storage facilities , an d areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders . You should check with the manu facturers of vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) to determine if th is device can be safely used in their vicinity.
Additional safety information 133 Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this device, operate using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for es sential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1 If the devi ce is not on, swit ch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the device. 2 Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready th e device for calls . 3 Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numb ers vary by location. 4 Press the call key. If certain features are in us e, you may first need to t urn those features off before you can ma ke an emergency call. If the device is in the offline or flight profile mode, you may need to change the profile to act ivate the phone function before you can make an emergency call. Cons ult this guide or your service provider for more information. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of comm unication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call un til given permission to do so. Certification information (S AR) This mobile device me ets guid elines fo r exposure to radio waves. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limit s for exposure to radio waves recommended by international guidelines . These guidelines were developed by the indepe ndent scientific organization ICNIRP and include safety marg ins designed to assure the protection of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mobile devices e mploy a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/ kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operating device can be belo w the maximum value because the device is designed to use on ly the power required to reach the network. That amount changes depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a ne twork ba se statio n. The highest SAR value under the ICNIRP guidelines for use of the device at the ear is 0.96 W/kg. Use of device accessories and enhancements ma y result in different SAR values. SAR valu es may vary depending on national reporting and testing requirements and the network band. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia.com.
134 Index A access point name control 124 access points 120 activation keys See digital rights management active standby mode 84 Adobe reader 110 alarm clock 98 application manager 99 applications installing 99 Java 99 removing 100 B batteries authenticating 128 charging 128 intend ed for use 10 prolonging life 17 Bluetooth 72 device address 74 pairing 74 security 73 sending data 73 switching off 73 bookmarks 65 C cache, clearing 66 calculator 98 calendar creating entries 101 synchronizing Nseries PC Suite 101 call log See log calls answering 95 barring 119 declining 95 diverting 119 duration 96 international 86 making 86 missed 96 received 96 settings 118 sharing video 92 transferring 95 waiting 95 camera active toolbar 54 adjusting lighting and color 56 editing videos 47 flash 56 image setup settings 56 saving video clips 59 scenes 57 self-timer 58 sequence mode 58 shooting video 59 still image camera settings 55 taking pictures 53 video recorder settings 61 cell broadcast 43 certificates 116 chargers 10 chat See instant me ssaging clock 98 codes 115 computer connections 76 conference call 90 configurations 124 connection settings 120
135 contact c ards 31 inserting pictures 31 sending 31 contact information 11 converter 111 copying contacts between the SIM card and device memory 32 copyright protection See digital rights manageme nt 109 D data cable 76 data calls 123 data connections details 75 ending 75 establishing 120 indicators 14 network 9 , 119 settings date 98 delivery reports 41 device manager 76 dictionary 35 digital rights management 109 Download! 17 DRM See digital rights manageme nt 109 E editing images 46 e-mail automatic retrievin g 38 deleting mailbox 41 deleting messages 38 opening 38 remote mailbox 37 retrieving from mailbox 38 saving 43 sending 35 settings 41 viewing attachments 38 writing 35 F factory settings 117 file formats .jad 99 .jar 99 .sis 99 music player 19 RealPlayer 102 file manager 68 fixed dialing 32 FM radio 24 G gallery active toolbar 45 editing images 46 images and videos 44 ordering files in albums 46 , 51 presentations 49 print basket 45 printing images 49 slide show 49 gameplay 30 games 30 GPRS See data conn ections GPS maps 17 settings 117 H hands-free operation See loudspeake r headset 16 help application 11 home network 21 , 51 , 77 I idle sceen See standby mode images See gallery indicators 14
136 installing applications 99 instant messaging blocki ng 105 connecting to a server 104 recording messages 105 sending instant messages 105 internet See web internet access points (IAP) See access points internet calls 124 J Java 99 K keyguard 114 keypad lock 114 L language settings 113 LED 16 lock code 115 log durat ion 97 erasing contents 97 filtering 96 loudspeaker 16 M mailbox 37 maps 17 mass memory tool 68 memory freeing memory 68 viewing memory consumption 68 menu, rearranging 82 messaging cell broadcast 43 e-mail 35 inbox 36 , 39 mailbox 37 multimedia messages 35 settings 39 text messages 35 missed calls 96 MMS See multimedia messages multimedia menu 15 multimedia messages creating 35 receiving 36 retrieving 36 saving 43 sendin g 35 settings 40 music See music player music player downloading music 23 file formats 19 music shop 23 playing songs 19 playlists 20 transferring music 21 N Navi wheel 15 , 117 N-Gage 30 Nokia wireless keyboard 80 notes 99 O original settings 117 P packet data settings 123 PC connections 76 pdf files 110 personalization 84 phone language 113 phonebook See contact cards PIN codes 115 podcasts 21 , 25 positioning 117 power saver 112 power saver LED 16 , 114 printing
137 contact cards 31 images 49 profiles 82 PUK codes 115 R radio 24 RealPlayer 102 recent calls 96 recorder 102 remote mailbox 37 , 38 remote SIM mode 75 resolution video quality settings 61 ringing tones 3-D 83 personal ringing tone 33 See also profiles S safety additional information 131 emergency calls 133 guidelines 8 scenes image scenes 57 video scenes 57 scroll key 15 , 117 security code See lock code sending contact cards, busine ss cards 31 messages 35 video clips 48 service commands 34 settings access points 121 application 112 applications 124 Bluetooth connectivit y 73 call barring 119 call diverting 119 certificates 116 configurations 124 data calls 123 data connections 120 defining 12 display 112 e-mail 37 , 41 IM 104 , 106 internet calls 124 keypad lock 114 language 113 lock code 115 messaging 39 multimedia messages 40 original settings 117 personalizing the phone 82 PIN code 115 positioning 117 power saver 112 sensor 117 SIP 124 slide handling 113 text messages 39 UPIN code 115 UPUK code 116 SIM card copying names and numbers to your device 32 messages 39 names and numb ers 32 using device without a SIM card 83 sis file 99 sleep mode 16 , 114 slide 113 SMS See text messages snooze 98 software installing applications 99 removing applications 100 transferring a file to your device 99 software update 18 , 76 songs
138 file formats 19 transferring 21 sound clips 44 sounds adjusting volume 16 muting a ringing ton e 95 recording sounds 102 speaker phone See loudspeake r speed dialing 90 standby mode 82 , 113 support information 11 svg files 49 switch 12 synchroni zation 80 T text messages inbox 34 receiving 36 saving 43 sending 35 , 36 settin gs 39 writing 35 themes 84 time 98 tones See ringing tones transfer conflicts 14 transferring content from another device 12 transferring music 21 troubleshooting 125 U UMTS See data connections Universal Plug and Play 78 unsupported file format 48 updating software 76 UPIN code 115 UPUK code 116 USB data cable 76 USSD commands 34 V video call answering 95 making 91 rejecting 95 video clips 44 video player See RealPlayer videos See gallery voice commands 69 voice dialing 90 voice mailbox 90 changing the phone number 90
139 diverting calls to voice mailbox 119 voice me ssages 90 voice t ags 69 making calls 91 volume co ntrol adjusting volume 16 during a call 86 loudspeaker 16 W wallpapers changing 84 using pictures 45 , 55 web access points, See access points blogs 64 browser 62 feeds 64 service messages 37 welcome application 12 wireless LAN 70 access poi nt settin gs 122 creating IAP 71 , 75 scanning 123 security 78 See also Universal Plug and Play settings 123 wizard 71 writing language 113